Home

Hitachi L700 Series AC Drives Instruction Manual

1. Precautions Use care to prevent the control circuit terminal block board from twisting when removing or mounting it Otherwise the board guide pins and connector pins may be damaged Do not pull the cables connected to the control circuit terminal block board when you remove the board from the L300P series Do not forcibly insert the board into the mounting slot Make sure that the board is correctly fitted onto the board guide pins and the connectors are correctly fitted to each other L300P series pA Ss L700 series Removing the control circuit terminal block board from the Mounting the removed control circuit terminal block board in L300P series the L700 series 1 Remove two fixing screws from the control circuit terminal 3 Remove the original control circuit terminal block board block board from the L700 series beforehand as instructed in steps 2 Pull the control circuit terminal block board straight toward 1 and 2 you to remove it from the L300P series Insert the control circuit terminal block board removed Precautions from the L300P series straight into the slot along the Pull out the board slowly board guide pins and connector
2. L700 1320 to 1600HFF 740 Ll 7 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings a 8 1 Precautions for Data Setting 8 1 8 2 Monitoring Mode eee 8 1 8 3 Function Mode eee 8 2 8 4 Extended Function Mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings 8 1 Precautions for Data Setting The default display mode limits the screens parameters that can be displayed on the monitor To enable the display of all parameters specify 00 full display for the function code display restriction 6037 To enable the parameters to be changed while the inverter is operating specify 10 for the software lock mode selection b031 8 2 Monitoring Mode With the default settings the monitor always displays the data output according to the output frequency monitoring d001 after power on To change the initial display content change the setting of the initial screen selection b038 as required Setting Change during during C
3. O OI AMI P24 PLC CM1 7 6 4 2 15 CM2 12 ALO AL2 Terminal screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 7Nm max torque 0 8Nm 3 Switching the input control logic In the factory setting the input control logic for terminal FW and intelligent input terminals is the sink logic To switch the input control logic to the source logic remove the jumper connecting terminals P24 and PLC on the control circuit block and then connect terminals PLC and CM1 with the jumper 2 20 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 4 Connecting a programmable controller to intelligent input terminals j When using an external power supply When using the internal interface power supply Remove the jumper from the control circuit terminal block Sink logic Output module EH YTP etc Output module EH YT etc Inverter Source logic Output module Output module EH YT etc Inverter EH YTP etc Inverter 5 Connecting a programmable controller to intelligent output terminals Sink logic Source logic Input module EH XD etc Inverter Input module Inverter EH XD etc 2 2 4 Wiring of the digital operator You can operate the inverter with not only the digital operator mounted in the inverter as standard equipment but
4. Check whether the power supply voltage has dropped Check the power supply Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient Check the power supply Check whether the thyristor has been damaged Check the thyristor Check whether the inverter has failed Repair the inverter 4 Check for the noise sources located near the inverter QO Remove noise sources Check whether the inverter has failed Repair the inverter Check whether an error has occurred in the external equipment when the external trip EXTERNAL function has been enabled Recover the external equipment from the error Check whether the inverter power has been turned on with an input operation signal remaining in the inverter when the USP function has been enabled Reset the operation command and then turn on the inverter power Check for the ground fault a n Check the output cables and motor Check the inverter itself for abnormality GND Flt Remove the output cables from the inverter and then check the inverter Check the main circuit for abnormality Check the main circuit with reference to Chapter 6 Repair the inverter Check whether the input voltage is high while the inverter is stopped Lower the input voltage suppress the power voltage fluctuation or connect an AC reactor between the power supply and the inverter input eu use Check whether the power supply voltage has dropped
5. 4 2 QNG SrG Controlin aiie iarna perairan 4 51 secondary resistance compensation 4 88 sensorless vector Control cccceeeeeee 4 16 4 90 SETS BUS A A AE eh 4 51 I EE A eeehes iecs 4 52 SF1 SF2 SF3 SF4 SF5 SF6 SF7 4 48 sign of the frequency to be added 4 14 SINK OQIG ire oo ceil peering eed eine cots 2 19 SUSOON in o Meteo teehee tates aad A 1 Slide switch SW1 cccccecccccececeeeseseeesesenenene 2 9 A 1 SEV i den nee ee 4 16 software 00K nesis lA diceedevictens Heda iiron 4 52 Source logiki a as aaea drea eeaeee 2 22 speed deviation MAX MUM sssseereeeeeereeere 4 96 SUA E E E EE 4 58 Stabilization constant 4 82 start end frequency setting for external analogiNpUt ieren irent eee A heer ly 4 14 Start frequency s e2 c se ccdsctecdessbecesianssetsessnacesienaes 4 14 Start freqUeNCy rate 4 14 starting Contact signal eeeeeseeeeeesteeeeeeeees 4 71 start with matching frequency 04 4 33 4 53 SWAT yaccitee ces Gee ct aie cuted accent reese bieeGeicns crete g 4 96 Stop Operation selection ee eeeeeeeeeseeeetenteeees 4 9 STOP RESET key Selection ccscceeeeeeeee 4 9 SI A a AE EE hit EE EE Wada ee 4 58 test Umann chet ara ane St 3 11 THErMIStOF asn cn 2 8 4 4 4 75 4 88 THM E E E NEET 4 39 SWE INPUT ins arar rrene aieiaiee 4 58 Beenie een EP E E bret etter 4 92 TOPQUE boostar ena 4 17 4 18 torque limitation eeen 4 92 4
6. Example 1 A015 A105 00 Example 2 A015 A105 01 Out put frequency in Out put frequency in Maximum the range from 0 to Maximum the range from 0 to frequency Teee A013 A103 is frequency A013 A103 is OHz 4 AO11 A101 A012 A102 A012 A102 A011 A101 AO1I A101 1 1 0 A013 A103 A014 A104 100 Analog input 0 A013 A103 A014 A104 100 Analog input 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA QQ 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA QQ 4 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Start end frequency settings for the O2 L terminal Range of data 02 start frequency A111 400 to 400 Hz Setting of the start frequency 02 end frequency A112 400 to 400 Hz Setting of the end frequency Setting of the rate of the start frequency 02 start frequency rate A113 100 to 100 to the external frequency command 10 Example 3 to 10 V 1 Z Setting of the rate of the end frequency oa end frequency A114 100 to 100 to the external frequency command 10 to 10 V 1 1 The frequency rates correspond to the voltages Example 3 10 to 10 V of the external frequency command Maximum frequency for as follows forward operation 10 to 0 V 100 to 0 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 10V All For example if the voltage of the signal to be input to ene the O2 L terminal is 5 to 5 V specify 50 for A114 Analog input A114 1
7. Overload restriction level b022 b025 Deceleration according to the deceleration rate at overload restriction Output current Maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 Target frequency i F001 Inverter output frequency b023 b026 4 40 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Overload nitice function The overload notice function allows you to make the inverter output an overload notice signal before tripping because of overload You can use this function effectively to prevent the machine e g a conveyor driven by the inverter from being overloaded and prevent the conveyor from being stopped by the overload protection of the inverter To use this function assign function 03 OK or 26 OL2 to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 Two types of overload notice signal are available for output Data or range of data Gy rlgadSianal outeut Enabling the warning output during g p C040 acceleration deceleration and constant mode om fm Enabling the warning output during constant 00 Disabling the warning output Specifying the current at which to output the Overigad level sening OO a 9X rated OL signal overload notice advance signal current A 1 00 Disabling the warning output Overload setting 2 0 1to 1 5xrated SPecifying the
8. 100 Curvature for deceleration 1 A152 coraa i ssa acceleration 2 gofo A151 Curvature for deceleration 2 A153 Curvature for Time s acceleration 1 A150 4 2 26 Energy saver operation Related code The energy saver operation function allows you to automatically minimize A085 Operation mode selection the inverter output power while the inverter is driving the motor at A086 Energy saving mode tuning constant speed This function is suited to operating a fan pump or other load that has a reduced torque characteristic To use this function specify 01 for the operation mode selection A085 Use the energy saving mode tuning function A086 to adjust the response and accuracy of the energy saver operation The energy saver operation function controls the inverter operation comparatively slowly Therefore if a sudden change in the load occurs e g impact load is applied the motor may stall and consequently the inverter may trip because of overcurrent 00 Normal operation _ _ _ 0 Slow High Energy saving mode tuning A086 100 Quick Low 4 32 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 27 Retry or trip after instantaneous power failure 1 Retry restart after instantaneous power failure You can select tripping or retrying restarting the motor operation as the inverter operation to be pe
9. 3 10 Character 9 is determined Press the 6 End the change of the extended function code HiTmacHn Siae ENEL 3 RUT w Selection of code A029 is completed If acode that is not defined in the code list or not intended for display is entered the leftmost digit fourth digit character A in this example will start blinking again In such a case confirm the code to be entered and enter it correctly For further information refer to Section 4 2 84 Function code display restriction on page 4 79 Section 4 2 85 Initial screen selection on page 4 81 Section 4 2 86 Automatic user parameter setting on page 4 82 and Chapter 8 List of Data Settings 7 Press the key to display the data corresponding to the function code change the data with the and or Byer and then press the key to store the changed data 4 Note that you can also use the procedure steps 1 to 6 described here to change the data 3 4 This procedure can also be used on screens displaying a code other than d001 2 If the a key is pressed while a digit is blinking the display will revert to the preceding status for entering the digit to the right of the blinking digit 3 If the oN key is pressed while the leftmost fourth digit is blinking the characters having been entered to change the code will be cancelled and the display will revert to the original code shown before the
10. Ea i 2 s x O J D 0 1 SA 1359h noe scaling conversion b086 R W l1 to 999 135Ah STOP key enable b087 0 enabling 1 disabling 2 disabling only stop 0 starting with 0 Hz 1 starting with matching 135Bh_ Restart mode after FRS b088 R W _ frequency 2 starting with active matching frequency 135Ch Reserved Inaccessible 135Dh_ Dynamic braking usage ratio b090 R W_ 0 to 1000 135Eh Stop mode selection b091 R W_ 0 deceleration until stop 1 free run stop 1 free 0 always operating the fan 1 operating the fan only 135Fh Cooling fan control b092 R W during inverter operation including 5 minutes after power on and power off C i 1360h __ Reserved Inaccessibe o y y O 1361h __ Reserved finaccessible e Fn O fa 0 disabling 1 enabling disabling while the motor is 1362h Dynamic braking control b095 W_ stopped 2 enabling enabling also while the motor is stopped R 1363h Dynamic braking activation level b096 R W_ 330 to 380 660 to 760 R 1364h Inaccessible ____________ Ooo oar 1365h Thermistor for thermal protection W 0 disabling the thermistor 1 enabling the thermistor control with PTC 2 enabling the thermistor with NTC 1366h R W 1367h 1368h _ Free setting V f voltage 1 0 to 8000 1369h 0 to free setting V f frequency 3 136Ah 136Bh 136Ch 136Dh 136Eh_ Free setting V f voltage 4 136Fh 1370h
11. py step H023 H223 H033 value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value Starting ane motor generates an Reduce the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 impact when it starts The motor runs unsteadily Torque is insufficient Torque limited during torque limited Reduce the overload restriction level to lower than the operation at a low torque limiter level frequency Low frequency Motor rotation a Increase the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 operation inconsistent Startin Motor runs backwards Set 01 enable on reverse run protection function b046 9 for short moment b046 Note 1 Always set the carrier frequency b083 to 2 1 kHz or more If the carrier frequency is less than 2 1 kHz the inverter cannot operate the motor normally Note 2 When driving a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than the inverter adjust the torque limit 6041 to b044 so that the value a calculated by the expression below does not exceed 200 Otherwise the motor may be burnt out torque limit x inverter capacity motor capacity Example When the inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit value is calculated as follows based on the assumption that the value a should be 200 Torque limit 6041 to b044 x motor capacity inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 b021 b041 to b044 4 91 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
12. 4 Reduce the carrier frequency setting b083 The motor speed falls when a load oe the slippage compensation gain for the A047 A247 is applied to the motor automatic torque boost step by step The motor speed increases when a Reduce the slippage compensation gain for the A047 A247 load is applied to the motor ay Rede torque boost step by step Reduce the voltage compensation gain for the A046 A246 sont torque boost step by step The inverter trips due to overcurrent 2 Reduce the slippage compensation gain for the A047 A247 when a load is applied to the motor aba torque boost step by step 3 Reduce the voltage setting for the manual torque A042 A242 boost step by step This function cannot be selection for 3rd moter setting Manual torque boost valid 4 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 19 DC braking DB setting The DC braking function allows you to apply DC braking to the motor according to the load on the motor You can control DC braking in two ways the external control through signal input to intelligent input terminals and the internal control to be performed automatically when the motor is started and stopped Note that the motor cannot be stopped by DC braking if the load on the motor produces a large moment of inertia Related code DC braking enable DC braking frequency setting DC braking
13. Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 kW 4 1 11 Cumulative power monitoring When the cumulative power monitoring function is selected the inverter displays the cumulative value of electric power input to the inverter You can also convert the value to be displayed to gain data by setting the cumulative input power display gain setting b079 Related code d015 Cumulative power monitoring b078 Cumulative power clearance b079 Cumulative input power display gain setting Value displayed by function d015 calculated value of input power kW h Cumulative input power display gain setting b079 The cumulative power input gain can be set within the range 1 to 1000 in steps of 1 You can clear the cumulative power data by specifying 01 for the cumulative power clearance function b078 and pressing the STR key You can also clear the cumulative power data at an intelligent input terminal by assigning function 53 KHC cumulative power clearance to the intelligent input terminal When the cumulative input power display gain setting b079 is set to 1000 the cumulative power data up to 999000 kW h can be displayed Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 1 kW h or the unit set for function b079 1000 to 9999 in units of 10 kW h or the unit set for function b079 100 to 999 in units of 1000 kW h or the unit set for function b079 4 1 12 Cumulative operation RUN time monitoring Related coda When the cumulat
14. tem Functioncode Data Description Automatic user parameter setting 00 Disabling automatic user i b039 gt function enable Enabling automatic user Related code 4 2 87 Stabilization constant setting H006 H206 H306 Motor stabilization constant 1st 2nd 3rd motors The stabilization constant setting function allows you to adjust the inverter A045 V f gain setting to stabilize the motor operation when the motor operation is unstable b083 Carrier frequency setting If the motor operation is unstable check the motor capacity setting H003 H203 and motor pole setting H004 H204 to determine whether the settings match the motor specifications If they do not match readjust the settings If the primary resistance of the motor is less than the standard motor specification try to increase the setting of HO06 H206 H306 step by step Try to reduce the setting of HO06 H206 H306 if the inverter is driving a motor of which the capacity is higher than the inverter rating You can also use the following methods to stabilize the motor operation 1 Reducing the carrier frequency b083 See Section 4 2 11 2 Reducing the V f gain setting A045 See Section 4 2 17 item Functioncode Data Description Stabilization constant H006 H206 0 to 255 Increase or reduce the setting to stabilize H306 the motor V f gain setting A045 20 to 100 Reduce the setting to stabilize the motor 0 5 to 12 0 kHz lt 0 5 to
15. 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications 3 Common specifications of 200 V class and 400 V class models continued Model name type name 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320 1600 SJ700 XXXFF2 FEF2 FUF2 L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H H H H H Ambient temperature storage 10 C to 40 C ambient 20 C to 65 C storage 20 to 90 RH no condensation allowed Eg temperature note5 T c humidity B E Vibration tolerance 5 9m s 0 6G 10 55Hz 2 94m s 0 3G 10 55Hz e See Note 1 i i i sae instalation Environment without corrosive gases and dust at an altitude of 1 000 m or less Note9 environment Coating color Gray Feedback option Vector control with sensor Digital input option 4 digit BCD input 16 bit binary input DeviceNet option Option to support the open network DeviceNet function LonWorks option Option to support the open network LonWorks function Optional boards Profibus DP option Option to support the open network Profibus DP function Braking resistor AC reactor DC reactor noise filter operator cables Harmonic wave suppressor unit Otheroptional components LCR filter analog operation panel regenerative braking unit controllers for various applications Note 1 The vibration tolerance was tested in compliance with
16. 1 For models with 30 kW or less capacity On the backing plate cut the joints around each section to be cut off with cutting pliers or a cutter remove them and then perform the wiring is Pa Joint lt Section to be cut off 2 For the models with 37 kW to 75kW 1 For wiring without using conduits Cut an X in each rubber bushing of the backing plate with cutting pliers or a cutter and then perform the wiring lt Backing plate 2 For wiring using conduits Remove the rubber bushings from the holes to be used for wiring with conduits and then fit conduits into the holes Note Do not remove the rubber bushing from holes that are not used for wiring with a conduit If a cable is connected through the plate hole without a rubber bushing and conduit the cable insulation may be damaged by the edge of the hole resulting in a short circuit or ground fault 2 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 Wiring Be sure to ground the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Commit wiring work to a qualified electrician Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Before wiring make sure that the power supply is off Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Perform wiring only after installing the inverter Otherwise y
17. 1015h Cumulative operation RUN d016 high 1016h jtime monitoring d016 low 1017h Cumulative power on time d017 high 1018h monitoring d017 low Heat sink temperature 101Ah Motor temperature monitoring d019 101Bh 101Ch 0 to 999900 A A h 0 1 C C 200 to 2000 200 to 2000 Inaccessible end 240 Capacitor on main circuit board 2 1 Low cooling fan speed Inaccessible es Reserved Life check monitoring 101Eh to 1025h Reserved Oo 1026h aa monitoring across 4102 to 9999 0 1 V 1027h BRD load factor monitoring d103 0 to 1000 0 1 Electronic thermal overload 1028h monitoring d104 R 0 to 1000 0 1 ean eserves dO25 HIGH R er User monitor 1 ALON R 2147483647 to 2147483647 1030h _ _do26 HIGH R ooh User monitor 1 ATON R 2147483647 to 2147483647 N A N aN foo a Q R N Pia e N are A N KR foe wo O K N 1 1034h d028 HIGH 1035h Pulse counter d028 LOW 0 to 2147483647 1 oe Position setting monitor ALON 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 1038h iti do30 HIGH R 1039h Position feedback monitor d030 LOW R 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 103Ah to iv List of registers Register Macs ar Data 1103h 5 F002 high 1104h Acceleration 1 time setting F002 low R W 11 to 360000 0 01 sec 1032h User monitor 1 do27 HIGH R 1033h d027 LOW R 1105h F003 high T1O6h Deceleration 1 tim
18. 3 2 2 Code display system and key operations This section describes typical examples of digital operator operation in basic and full display modes and an example of special digital operator operation in extended function mode U The initial display on the monitor screen after power on depends on the setting of function b038 For details see Section 4 2 85 Initial screen selection When the setting of function b038 is 01 factory setting the monitor initially shows as the setting of function d001 output frequency monitoring Pressing the E key in this status changes the display to f Note The display contents on the monitor depend on the settings of functions b037 function code display restriction 6038 initial screen selection and b039 automatic setting of user parameters For details see Sections 4 2 84 Function code display restriction 4 2 85 Initial screen selection and 4 2 86 Automatic user parameter setting Item Function code Data Description 00 Full display 01 Function specific display nuneton cove Grey b037 02 User setting restriction 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display factory setting 00 Screen displayed when the STR key was pressed last same as the operation on the SJ300 series Initial screen selection b038 01 d001 output frequency monitoring Initial display at 1 02 d002 output current
19. AHD terminal O w l Input analog command Pa Remark Frequency command __ gt S Frequent use of this function may damage the memory element 4 2 57 Intelligent pulse counter PCNT and PCC Related code The intelligent pulse counter function allows you to input a pulse C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to terminal 8 functions train via an intelligent input terminal 028 Pulse counter monitor The cumulative count of input pulses can be monitored by the pulse counter monitor d028 function The value of cumulative counter cannot be stored The counter value is cleared to zero when the inverter power is turned on or the inverter reset Turning on the PCC pulse counter clear terminal clears the cumulative counter The frequency resolution of the input pulse can be calculated by the formula shown below for pulse signal input with a duty ratio of 50 Frequencies not less than the relevant resolution cannot be input It is recommended to use this function up to 100HZz For the input terminal response see Section 4 2 79 Frequency resolution Hz 250 input terminal response time setting C160 to C168 1 Example When the input terminal response time is 1 the frequency resolution is 125 Hz Input terminal response Input pulse CN PONT F Value of counter 1 2 3 4 4 61 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 58 Inte
20. Active frequency matching 0 01 Active frequency matching 0 frequency at the last shutoff 1 maximum TS1Eh restart frequency select b030 RI frequency 2 set frequenc 0 disabling ene of data other than b031 when SFT is on 1 disabling change of data other than b031 and frequency settings when SFT is on 2 zm 2 afg afg Software lock mode selection b031 disabling change of data other than b031 3 disabling change of data other than b031 and frequency settings 10 enabling data changes 1322h 1323h b034 high R W 1324h TTT on warning time b034 low R W 0 to 65535 1 10h 4 134 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Berai E ee Monitoring and setting items Data resolution nu minimum reduced voltage start time to 255 1326h Reduced voltage start selection b036 maximum reduced voltage start time 0 full display 1 function specific TORT user 1327h Function code display restriction b037 PW soting 3 ee a display 4 UREI TERE 0 screen displayed when the STR key was EEA 1328h JInitial screen selection b038 Raw Pe 1 d001 2 d002 3 d003 4 d007 5 F001 Automatic user parameter 1329h setting function enable b039 Rw 0 disabling 1 enabling cana quadrant specific setting 01 switching by 132Ah__ Torque limit selection b040 R W terminal 02 analog input 03 option 1 04 Haa
21. Display on remote operator ERR1 PRG CMD PRG NST PRG ERR1 PRG 0 PRG 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 1 3 Tri conditions monitorin See Section 5 1 1 5 Accumulated time h for which the inverter has been running before tripping 6 Accumulated time for which the inverter power has been on before tripping These digits indicate a trip factor 1 Trip factor This digit indicates the inverter status at tripping Explanation of display Resetting Initialization at power on or with the reset terminal turned on Stopping the motor Decelerating or operating the motor During constant speed Accelerating the motor Status after receiving a zero frequency operation command Starting the motor Applying DC braking to the motor CO 47M Cwm Co Overload restricted operation Note The above descriptions indicate the inverter status at the occurrence of tripping which may not correspond to the apparent operation of the motor Example When the PID control is used or the frequency command is input as an analog signal a voltage or current signal the inverter may repeat acceleration and deceleration alternately at short intervals to make up for the fluctuations of the analog signal even if the motor is apparently running at constant spe
22. Specification of the input frequency Pulse train frequency scale P055 1 0 to 50 0 kHz corresponding to the maximum allowable frequency Time constant of pulse train P056 0 01 to 2 00 s Setting of the filter time constant for frequency filter the a train input Pulse train frequency bias P057 100 to 100 Pulse train frequency limit P058 0 to 100 o Frequency source setting A001 ae PV source setting A076 selection 1 pulse train selection 2 Bias limitation Frequency requency measurement command Maximum frequency F004 Frequency scale 1 0 to 50 0 kHz Primary delay filter Block diagram for pulse train frequency input 4 97 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 Communication Functions Related code A001 Frequency source setting A002 Run command source setting C071 Communication speed selection C072 Node allocation C073 Communication data length selection C074 Communication parity selection C075 Communication stop bit selection C078 Communication wait time Communication mode selection The inverter can engage in RS485 communications with an external control system that is connected to the TM2 terminal block on the control circuit terminal block board of the inverter The L700 series inverter shares the ASCII communication protocol with the SJ300 and L300P series inverters
23. 0 13 Det erninati on tine C169 speci fi ed Frequenc G1 G2 G3 4 2 Bit operation mode Assign functions 32 SF1 to 38 SF7 individually to the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 to make multispeed s 0 to 7 available for selection speedo 4 Frequency input from Specify the desired frequencies for speeds 1 to 7 SF1 to SF7 the digital operator or by setting multispeeds 1 to 7 A021 to A027 via an external analog input terminal Speed 1 ee Speed 1 Speed 1 SF1 Speed 2 SF2 Speed 3 Speed 4 S3 Speed 5 a i E i Speed 6 a i Speed7 ON se NN SF7 e If two or more input terminals are turned on at the same E FW time the terminal given the smallest terminal number among them has priority over others The X mark in the above table indicates that the speed can be selected regardless of whether or not the corresponding terminal is turned on 4 49 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 42 Jogging JG command setting The jogging command setting function allows you to set and finely tune the motor stopping position To use this function assign function 06 JG to an intelligent input terminal Related code A038 Jog frequency setting A039 Jog stop mode C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions 1 Jog frequency setting Output frequency A038 Since the inverte
24. 1 Communication specifications ASCII mode Modbus RTU mode 2 400 4 800 9 600 or 19 200 bps Selection with the digital operator Communication method Half duplex communication oe el transmission Transmission code ASCII code Binary code o o Transmission method__ _ Transmission beginning with the lowest order bit Z Z Applicable interface RSA O No parity even parity or odd parity Daas Initiation only by a command from the external Initiation method control system Waiting time 10 to 1 000 ms 0 to 1 000 ms Setting with the digital operator 1 to N connection N Maximum of 32 inverters with the digital operator Overrun framing BCC Overrun framing Error check vertical parity and CRC 16 and longitudinal parity errors longitudinal parity errors lt Specifications and connections of RS485 ports gt For the RS485 communication function use the TM2 terminal block on the control circuit terminal block board Abbreviated name of Description terminal Control circuit block for transmission Negative signal terminal SN ah for transmission Terminal to enable the terminating resistor Control circuit ee ne heal block board erminating resistor Followings are recommended as the wire to connect TM2 Solid core wire 0 14mm 1 5mm when two wires are on one terminal pole 0 14 mm 0 5mm Standard wire 0 14mm 1 Omm when two wires are on one terminal pole 0 14 mm 0 2mm Standard wire
25. 120 Hz Set frequency fset 60 Hz fon 120 x 0 01 1 2 Hz FA1 foff 120 x 0 02 2 4 Hz At acceleration the signal turns on when the output frequency reaches 58 8 Hz 60 1 2 58 8 At deceleration the signal turns off when the output frequency reaches 57 6 Hz 60 2 4 57 6 2 Signal output when the set frequency is exceeded 02 FA2 or 24 FA4 The inverter outputs the signal when the output frequency exceeds the acceleration or deceleration frequency specified by a frequency setting C042 or C043 FA2 or C045 or C046 FA4 _ 4 fon 1 of maximum frequency V fof foff 2 of maximum frequency Output frequency fon J FA2 FA5 3 Signal output only when the set frequency is reached 06 FA3 or 25 FA5 The inverter outputs the signal only when the output frequency reaches the frequency specified by a frequency setting C042 or C043 FA3 or C045 or C046 FA5 fon 1 of maximum frequency Output frequency foff 2 of maximum frequency fon J FA3 FA5 4 65 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 62 Running time over and power on time over signals RNT and ONT Related code b034 Run power on warning time C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function d016 Cumulative operation RUN time monitoring d017 Cumulati
26. 2 4 Coil data 4 17 4 Starting coil number 06 5 CRC 16 code upper digit 12 lower digit 2 6 _CRC 16 code lower digit 1A 5 Number of coils upper digit 00 4 The data as many as the specified number of data a ee ee SY bytes is transferred 6 Number of coils lower digit 3 06 7 CRC 16 code upper digit 5C 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 90 1 This query cannot be broadcasted 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to be read first 3 If 0 or a value more than 32 is specified as the number of coils to be read the inverter will respond with error code 03h The data received in the response indicates the status of coils 7 to 14 Read the received data 17h 00010111b as shown below The least significant bit indicates the status of coil 7 Coilnumber 14 13 12 n 10 9 8 7 Coil status_ OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON If the query has specified the reading of an undefined coil the data on the said coil is represented by 0 in the response If the function to read the coil status cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 118 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions ii Reading registers 03h This function reads a specified number of registers beginning at a
27. Recover the power supply Check the MCB and magnetic contactors for poor contacts Replace the MCB and the magnetic contactor Check whether the cooling efficiency has been lowered Replace the cooling fan Check the heat sink for clogging Clean the heat sink Check whether the inverter is installed vertically Check the installation Check whether the ambient temperature is high Lower the ambient temperature 3 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power 5 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes Roi Display on Display on Gate array communica tion error Phase loss input protection Main circuit error 3 IGBT error Thermistor error Emergency stop 4 Low speed overload protection Modbus communica tion error Option 1 error If an error occurs in the communication between the internal CPU and gate array the inverter will trip When the phase loss input protection has been enabled b006 01 the inverter will trip to avoid damage if an phase loss input is detected The inverter trips when the phase loss input continues for about 1 second or more The inverter will trip if the gate array cannot confirm the on off state of IGBT because of a malfunction due to noise short or damage to the main
28. Terminal layout Inverter model Rojo Charge lamp L700 110LFF L700 110HFF RO and T0 M4 Ground terminal M5 Jumper G Pu connecting G Other terminals M5 terminals PD Ground terminal with jumper shaded in the When not using the DCL figure to enable disable the EMC filter function do not remove the jumper from terminals PD and P Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function L700 150LFF L700 150HFF RO and TO M4 Ground terminal M5 Other terminals M6 Disabling the EMC filter factory settin L700 185 to L700 220LFF L700 185 to L700 300HFF Jumper connecting RO and T0 M4 lt terminals PD and P Ground terminal M6 Ground terminal with Other terminals M6 When not using the DCL jumper shaded in the do wot reniove the lumber figure to enable disable the f t ne As Bo meni EMC filter function Om Aera Sra O Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function L700 300LFF RO and T0 M4 Ground terminal M6 Other terminals M8 Enabling the EMC filter Disabling the EMC filter factory setting 2 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal layout Inverter model TO Charge lamp R L700 370LFF RO and T0 M4 Ground terminal M6 Other terminals M8 Jumper connecting Ground terminal with U terminals PD and P
29. This terminal outputs one of the selected 0 to 10 VDC voltage output PWM output mode monitoring items The monitoring items available for selection include output frequency output current output torque Maximum allowable Digital monitor unsigned output voltage input power electronic thermal overload LAD current 1 2 mA voltage frequency motor temperature heat sink temperature general output Maximum frequency digital output frequency and digital current monitor 3 6 kHz For the items digital output frequency and digital current monitor this terminal outputs a digital pulse signal at 0 10 VDC with a duty ratio of 50 This terminal supplies 24 VDC power for contact input signals P24 If the source logic is selected this terminal is used as a common contact Maximum allowable outpiit supply current 100 mA input terminal This common terminal supplies power to the interface power supply P24 thermistor input TH and digital monitor FM terminals If the sink logic is selected this terminal is used as a common contact input terminal Do not ground this terminal Power supply Frequency command voltage Input impedance 10kQ Allowable input voltages 0 3 to 12 VDC Input impedance 10kO Allowable input voltages 0 to 12 VDC Frequency command current Input impedance 10kO Maximum allowable current 24 mA Maximum allowable current 2 mA Analog monitor voltage AM
30. Wi2 Wi3 E Electrodynamometer type wattmeter Effective value of full waves 3 wattmeter method input power factor Pfin Calculated from the measured input voltage En input current lin and input power W DA Pfin vV 3 En lin WN 64000198 Output voltage Eour Across U V V W and W U Eu Ev and EW BE Method shown in the figure below or rectifier type voltmeter Effective value of fundamental wave Output current Current at U V and W Moving iron ammeter Effective value of lour lu IV and IW full waves Output power Across U V and V W E Electrodynamometer type Effective value of 2 wattmeter method Wout Wo1 Wo2 wattmeter full waves or 3 wattmeter method Output power Calculated from the measured input Wout factor Pfour voltage Eour input current lour Pfour _ _ x 100 and input power Wour vV 3 Eourt lout Notes 1 To measure the output voltage use an instrument that reads the effective value of the fundamental wave To measure the current or power use an instrument that reads the effective value of full waves 2 Since the inverter output waveform is controlled by PWM it has a large margin of error especially at low frequencies In many cases general testers may be inapplicable for the measurement because of the adverse effect of noise Method to meas
31. to connect the terminals RO and TO terminal screw size M4 Connect a 3A fuse in the control circuit power supply line Tightening torque 1 2Nm max torque 1 4Nm If the control circuit power supply connected to RO and TO is turned on earlier than the main circuit power supply connected to R S and T ground fault is not checked at power on When supplying DC power to the control circuit power supply terminals RO and TO specify 00 as the a b NO NC selection function code C031 to C036 for intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 and intelligent relay terminals ALO AL1 and AL2 If 01 is specified as the a b NO NC selection output signals may chatter when the DC power supply is shut off 2 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 3 Wiring of the control circuit 1 Wiring instructions 1 Terminals L and CM1 are common to I O signals and isolated from each other Do not connect these common terminals to each other or ground them Do not ground these terminals via any external devices Check that the external devices connected to these terminals are not grounded Use a shielded twisted pair cable recommended gauge 0 75 mm for connection to control circuit terminals and connect the cable insulation to the corresponding common terminal Tightening torque 0 7Nm max torque 0 8Nm The length of cables connect
32. 05 asy sequence user parameter U 06 asy sequence user parameter U 07 asy sequence user parameter U 08 sy sequence user parameter U 09 asy sequence user parameter U 10 asy sequence user parameter U 11 asy sequence user parameter U sy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U 14 asy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U 16 U a O pe z oO gt e o2 ol oO Ww oO m mim w 1677h asy sequence user parameter U mim w sy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U sy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U asy sequence user parameter U 25 asy sequence user parameter U 27 asy sequence user parameter U 28 asy sequence user parameter U 29 asy sequence user parameter U 30 asy sequence user parameter U 31 1686h to 2102h 1 The following table lists the code data for parameter H003 motor capacity selection w Reserved Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity b2kw 04 05 15 22 37 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 C Motorcapacity 55kw 7 5 11 15 185 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 e al analea aa aa eA C Motorcapacity 90kw 110 132 150 160
33. Base Maximum frequency frequency 4 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 17 V F characteristic curve selection m e e a a Related code A044 A244 A344 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 b112 Free setting V f frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 b101 b103 b105 b107 b109 b111 b113 Free setting V f voltage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The V F characteristic curve selection function allows you to set the output voltage output frequency V f characteristic To switch the V F characteristic curve selection among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SETS to intelligent input terminals Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching Function code Data Vit characteristic po Remarks S O 00 Constant torque characteristic VC S 01 Reduced torque characteristic A044 A244 1 7th power of VP A344 Free V f characteristic Available only for A044 and A244 Sensorless vector control SLV Available only for A044 and A244 See Section 4 2 96 1 Constant torque characteristic VC With this control system set the output voltage is in proportion to the output frequency within the range from 0 Hz to the base frequency Within the output frequency range over the base frequency up to the maximum frequency the output voltage is constant regardless o
34. C105 FM gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 Oo O 4 76 i 5 C106 AM gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 O O E s ra C107 AMI gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 O Oo ir R C109 AM bias adjustment 0 to 100 0 O O C110 AMI bias adjustment 0 to 100 20 O Q Note lt gt indicate the setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Dotat Seting Chango Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed a or not or not T Rated C111 Overload setting 2 0 0 to 1 50 x rated current A lt 0 0 to 1 50 x rated current A gt Coe O O 4 40 ec inverter C121 O input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 cre O o oO e C122 Ol input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 ae O O z S 123 02 input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 aie O O C130 Output 11 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C131 Output 11 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C132 Output 12 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C133 Output 12 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0
35. CRC 16 code lower digit 41 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 41 1_ If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return any response 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to be read first If the function to write data to a coil cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response iv Writing data to a specified register 06h This function writes data to a specified register Example When setting 50 Hz as the base frequency setting A003 in the inverter at slave address 5 Since register 1203h to store the base frequency setting A003 has a data resolution of 1 Hz specify 50 0032h as the updating data to set 50 Hz Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 06 2 Function code 06 3 Starting register number 12 3 Starting register number 12 __ upperdigit 2 0 upper digit 4 Starting register number 02 4 Starting register number 02 lower digit 2 lower digit 5 Updating data upper digit 00 5 Updating data upper digit 00 6 Updating data lower digit 32 6 Updating data lower digit 32 7 CRC 16 code upper digit AD 7 CRC 16 code upper digit AD 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 23 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 23 1_ If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return a
36. If an operation command has been input to the inverter before the inverter enters alarm status the inverter will restart suddenly when the alarm status is reset Before resetting the alarm status make sure that no operation command has been input While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any internal part of the inverter or insert a bar in it Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Do not touch the heat sink which heats up during the inverter operation Otherwise you run the risk of burn injury The inverter allows you to easily control the speed of motor or machine operations Before operating the inverter confirm the capacity and ratings of the motor or machine controlled by the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury Install an external brake system if needed Otherwise you run the risk of injury When using the inverter to operate a standard motor at a frequency of over 60 Hz check the allowable motor speeds with the manufacturers of the motor and the machine to be driven and obtain their consent before starting inverter operation Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the motor and machine During inverter operation check the motor for the direction of rotation abnormal sound and vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the machine driven by the motor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety Instructions 4 Maintenance
37. NO 01 NC 00 x oO 4 63 C034 Terminal 14 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O Intelligent output terminals C035 Terminal 15 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x Q C036 Alarm relay active state 00 NO 01 NC 01 x O 8 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed or not or not C038 Low current indication signal output 00 output during acceleration deceleration and constant speed 0 x o mode selection operation 01 output only during constant speed operation Rated 4 72 Low current indication signal n current C039 detection level 0 0 to 1 50 x rated current A o O O inverter 00 output during acceleration deceleration and constant speed C040 Overload signal output mode operation 01 output only during constant speed operation 0 x 2 Rated 4 40 C041 Overload level setting 0 0 to 1 50 x rated current A lt 0 0 to 1 50 x rated current gt ete O O inverter P C042 Frequency arrival setting for accel 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 O J i 2 C043 Freque
38. P N is supplied to control power supply terminals RO and TO the inverter may detect undervoltage and trip when the inverter power is turned off If this cause a problem in your system specify 00 or 02 for the trip selection The inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the output frequency is not more than half the base frequency or 2 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly Even when a retry operation 01 to 03 is specified for the selection of restart mode b001 and disabling tripping 00 or 02 is specified for the selection of a trip after instantaneous power failure or undervoltage in the stopped state the inverter will trip if the instantaneous power failure continues over the allowable under voltage power failure time See example 2 Even when a retry operation is specified for the trip selection the inverter will trip if the cause of trip is not removed by the end of the retry wait time before motor restart b003 If this occurs prolong the retry wait time Even when a retry operation is specified for the retry selection the inverter will trip if the undervoltage status continues for 40 seconds or more when starting the motor with matching frequency is selected inverter may restart suddenly by alarm resetting resetting and retry start The figures below show the timing charts for starting with a matching frequency when 02 is specified for the selection of restart mode b001 t0 Duration of
39. PUE pe ee 5 AL ON ____SUndenvoliage AL ote L ON IP OFF f___1__ IP el Example 10 b004 02 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power supply ON Power supply ON i oF L iele Operation command ON Operation command gy 7 FF OFF Inverter output ON Inverter output ON OFF _ _ lt OFF D Ns T EO Pee IP IP oe Note 1 You can assign the instantaneous power failure alarm signal IP 08 and the undervoltage alarm signal UV 09 to any of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 to output the alarm signals Note 2 For the alarm output following the occurrence of power failure of 1 second or longer see the explanation of reset Section 4 2 48 4 35 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Restarting methods Restart with matching frequency The inverter detects the frequency and rotation direction based on the residual voltage in the motor and then restarts the motor based on the detected frequency Restart with input frequency The inverter starts the output with the frequency specified for the start frequency selection b030 searches for the point where the frequency and voltage are balanced while keeping the current at the restart current level 0028 and then restarts the motor If the inverter trips when it restart
40. SL frequency A141 A142 Related code A141 Operation target frequency selection 1 A142 Operation target frequency selection 2 A143 Operator selection A001 Frequency source setting A076 PV source setting Operator selection for Addition A141 A142 p A143 Subtraction A141 A142 reguenoy operation Multiplication A141 x A142 Frequency source setting A001 Output of operation result PV source setting A076 Output of operation result Note 1 The 1 up and 2 down keys of the digital operator are ineffective when the frequency operation function is enabled Also the frequency displayed by the output frequency monitoring d001 Scaled output frequency monitoring d007 or output frequency setting F001 cannot be changed with key operations Note 2 The settings of A141 and A142 can be the same 4 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 13 Frequency addition function The frequency addition function allows you to add or subtract the value specified as the frequency to be added A145 to or from the frequency value of a selected frequency command To use this function assign function 50 ADD to an intelligent input terminal When the ADD terminal is turned on the inverter performs the addition or subtraction of the value specified as A145 Related code A145 Frequency to be added A146 Sign of
41. STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No se ot control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 07 Parameter Data parameter number 4 bytes See Note 14 Data Parameter data decimal ASCII 8 bytes See Note 13 code BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 14 Possible range of parameters is as follows F002 A001 b001 C001 H001 P001 F001 is written with 01 command Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section ix 08 command This command initializes specified settings in the inverter The setting items to be initialized follow the setting of the initialization mode b084 When b084 is 00 the trip history data is cleared Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No e e RE oficontrol target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 08 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative respo
42. a lalalala X S jo oo oo oo NO SSE ak N a Nar o o o Z ol5 ZlzZzlzZ O S 5 w QO O oO n D oO 4 137 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions RUN running 1 FA1 constant speed reached FA2 set frequency overreached OL overload notice advance signal 1 1415h Terminal 11 function co21 OD output deviation for PID control 5 AL alarm signal FA3 set frequency reached 7 OTQ over torque IP instantaneous power failure 9 UV undervoltage TRQ torque limited 11 RNT operation time over ONT plug in time over 13 THM thermal alarm signal ZS 0Hz detection signal 1416h Terminal 12 function C022 fom 13 function FA4 set frequency overreached 2 FA5 set frequency reached 2 OL2 overload notice advance signal 2 FBV PID feedback comparison NDc communication line disconnection LOG1 logical operation result 1 LOG2 logical operation result 2 LOG3 logical operation result 3 LOG4 logical operation result 4 LOGS logical operation result 5 LOGE logical operation result 6 WAC capacitor life warning WAF cooling fan speed drop FR starting contact signal 1418h Terminal 14 function C024 OHF heat sink overheat warning LOC low current indication signal M01 general purpose output 1 M02
43. general purpose output 2 MO3 general purpose output 3 M04 general purpose output 4 M05 general purpose output 5 MO6 general purpose output 6 1419h Terminal 15 function C025 IRDY inverter ready 51 FWR forward rotation RVR reverse rotation 53 MJA major failur WCO window comparator O 55 WCO window comparator Ol 56 WCO window comparator O2 When alarm code output is selected by C062 functions 141Ah_ Alarm relay terminal function C026 ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 ACn alarm code output are forcibly assigned to intelligent output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 respectively 0 output frequency 1 output current 2 output torque 3 digital output frequency 4 output voltage 5 input power 141Bh_ FM siginal selection C027 6 electronic thermal overload 7 LAD frequency 8 digital current monitoring 9 motor temperature 10 heat sink general 0 output frequency 1 output current 2 output torque 4 output voltage 5 input power 6 electronic thermal 141Ch_ AM siginal selection C028 overload 7 LAD frequency 9 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature 11 output torque signed value 13 general purpose output YA1 00 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque 04 output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic 141Dh_ AMI siginal selection C029 thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 09 motor
44. inspection and parts replacement Before inspecting the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply and wait for 10 minutes or more Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Before inspection confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off and the DC voltage between terminals P and N is 45 V or less Commit only a designated person to maintenance inspection and the replacement of parts Be sure to remove wristwatches and metal accessories e g bracelets before maintenance and inspection work and to use insulated tools for the work Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury 5 Others Do not discard the inverter with household waste Contact an industrial waste management company in your area who can treat industrial waste without polluting the environment iv Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety Instructions Precautions Concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC The L700 series inverter conforms to the requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC However when using the inverter in Europe you must comply with the following specifications and requirements to meet the EMC Directive and other standards in Europe A WARNING This equipment must be installed adjusted and maintained by qualified engineers who have expert knowledge of electric work inverter operation and the hazardous circumsta
45. key to change the displayed value to 00 for forward operation or 01 for reverse operation and then press the key once to determine the operation direction The display reverts to F004 Set the monitor mode To monitor the output frequency display the function code d001 and then press the key once The monitor shows the output frequency To monitor the operation direction display the function code d003 and then press the E key once The monitor shows for forward operation C for reverse operation or for stopping Press the key to start the motor The RUN lamp green LED goes on Press the o key to decelerate or stop the motor When the motor stops the RUN lamp green LED goes off During the test run confirm that the inverter does not trip while accelerating or decelerating the motor and that the motor speed and frequencies are correct If a trip due to overcurrent or overvoltage has occurred during the test run increase the acceleration and deceleration time Make sure that there is enough margin to trip level by monitoring the output current d002 and DC voltage d102 3 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 3 phase power supply O O0QO PDL _ DG r actor Digital operator Braking unit Operating box OPE 4MJ2 OPE 8MJ2 Type D grounding 200 V class model Type C ground
46. n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O 2 A028 Multispeed 8 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 Q O 2 A029 Multispeed 9 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O p A030 Multispeed 10 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O 2 A031 Multispeed 11 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A032 Multispeed 12 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A033 Multispeed 13 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A034 Multispeed 14 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A035 Multispeed 15 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 Oo O A038 Jog frequency setting Start frequency to 9 99 Hz 1 00 Q O 00 free running after jogging stops disabled during operation 01 deceleration and stop after jogging stops disabled during operation 4 50 02 DC braking after jogging stops disabled during operation A039 Jog stop mode 03 free running after jogging stops enabled during operation 00 x 04 deceleration and stop after jogging stops enabled during operation 05 DC braking after jogging stops enabled during operation 1 This setting is valid only when the OPE SR is connected 8 3 Phone 800 894 04
47. number before specifying the number of data bytes If the function to write data to multiple coils cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 121 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vii Writing data to multiple registers 10h This function writes data to sequential registers Example When setting 3 000 Hz as the Acceleration 1 time F002 in the inverter at slave address 1 Since register 1103h and 1104h to store the Acceleration 1 time F002 have a data resolution of 0 01 seconds specify 300000 493E0h as the updating data to set 3 000 seconds Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 01 1 Slave address 1 01 2 Function code 10 2 Function code 10 3 Starting register address 11 3 Starting register address upper 11 upper digit 2 digit 2 4 Starting register address 02 4 Starting register address lower 02 lower digit 2 digit 2 5 Number of registers upper 00 5 Number of registers upper 00 digit digit 6 Number of registers lower 02 6 Number of registers lower digit 02 digit 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit E5 7 Number of data bytes 3 04 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 34 8 Updating data 1 upper digit 00 ee 9 Updating data 1 lower digit 0
48. s 0 0 x O C134 Output 13 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C135 Output 13 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O 47 C136 Output 14 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C137 Output 14 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C138 Output 15 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C139 Output 15 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C140 Output RY on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C141 Output RY off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O 7 C142 Logical output signal 1 selection Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O 3 C143 Logical output signal 1 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x C144 BSA put signal 1 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o 5 C145 Logical output signal 2 selection Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 Oo 5 C146 Logical output signal 2 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 e E C147 eae put signal 2 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o 5 C148 Logical output signal 3 selection Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O C149 Logical output signal 3 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O cigo Scal nuput ee 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o C151 Logical output signal 4 selection Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00
49. to 1 50 x rated current A current b028 x O frequency lt 0 20 x rated current to1 50 x rated current A gt o inverter 433 bozg Active frequency matching scan time 0 10 to 30 00 s 050 x o Active frequency matching restart 00 frequency at the last shutoff 01 maximum frequency b030 00 x O frequency select 02 set frequency x 00 disabling change of data other than b031 when SFT is on 2 01 disabling change of data other than b031 and frequency settings when SFT g A is on S b031 Software lock mode selection 02 disabling change of data other than b031 01 x O 4 52 03 disabling change of data other than b031 and frequency settings K 10 enabling data changes during operation Note lt gt indicate the setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed or allowed or _FF not not b034 Run power on warning time 0 to 9999 0 to 99990 1000 to 6553 100000 to 655300 hr 0 x O 4 66 i nas oan 00 enabling both forward and reverse rotations x x 2 DOGS Rotational direction restriction 01 enabling only forwar
50. viii List of registers 3rd control settings ee Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Be lg 3103h__ Acceleration 1 time setting 3rd F302 high RW J to 360000 0 01 sec 3104h motor F302 low f 3105h __ Deceleration 1 time setting 3rd __F303 high RW to 360000 3106h__ motor F303 low ae 07h to ix List of registers 3rd control setting 3203h aaa setting 3rd A303 oe to maximum frequency 3rd motor 1 Hz 3204h a frequency setting 3rd A304 Rw fso to 400 1 Hz p pena p ee 3216h Sal frequency setting 3rd A320 high R W _ 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 3rd 0 01 Hz 3217h motor A320 low R W motor BEAK 8h to apem o pee 323Ch a torque boost value 3rd A342 Raw fo to 200 0 1 9 Manual torque boost frequency 323Dh adjustment 3rd motor A343 R W_ 0 to 500 0 1 V F characteristic curve s23Fh selection 3rd motor API Rw fo VC 1 VP Ea BE reed E a 326Dh_ Acceleration 2 time setting 3rd A392 high RW to 360000 0 01 sec 326Eh_ motor A392 low 326Fh__ Deceleration 2 time setting 3rd A393 se 3270h motor Sete Tow Raw 2 360000 0 01 aes Eag h to kog Electronic thermal setting 330Ch calculated within the inverter b312 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 Ta current output 3rd motor Electronic thermal characteristic 0 reduced ore ene Reserved inaccessblo 330Eh to 3507h not stabilization constant 3rd H306 raw fo t
51. 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity S Depending on H031 Auto constant R2 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity x x Depending on H231 Auto constant R2 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity x x Depending on H032 Auto constant L 1st motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH motor capacity x x Te H232 Auto constant L 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH Depending on x x motor capacity H033 Auto constant lo 1st motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A Depending on x x motor capacity Depending on H233 Auto constant lo 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A motor capacity x x Depending on H034 Auto constant J 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 motor capacity x x Depending on H234 Auto constant J 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 motor capacity x x H050 PI proportional gain for 1st motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 Oo O H250 PI proportional gain for 2nd motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O O H051 PI integral gain for 1st motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O O H251 PI integral gain for 2nd motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O O 4 60 g H052 P proportional gain setting for 1st 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 o o S motor non s m S H252 P proportional gain setting for 2nd 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 o o a motor e Terminal selection PI proportional ra 8 H070 gain setting 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O Oo H071 Term
52. 0 OFF S e 0015h _ FA2 set frequency overreached R 1 ON 0 OFF _ _ gt o Y OL overload notice advance signal 1 R 1 ON 0 OFF gt O 0017h _ OD output deviation for PID contro R 1 ON 0 OFF _ _ gt S Y E 0018h _ AL alarm signa ER ON OFOFF S e 0019h _ FA3 set frequency reached R 1 0ON 0 OFF S e 001Ah OTQ over torque _ R 1 0ON 0 OFF S OE 001Bh IP instantaneous power failure R 1 ON 0 OFF 001Ch UV undervoltage R J1 0N 0 OFF S e 001Dh_ TRQ torque limite R 1 ON 0 OFF_ __ S Oe 001Eh RNT operation time ove R f1 0N 0 OFF S e 001Fh_ ONT plug in time ove R 1 ON 0 OFF S Oe 0020h _ THM thermal alarm signa R f 1 ON 0 OFF S e 0021h_ Reseved S o G ef 0022h_ Reserved S oo e 0023h_ Reserved o o G ef 0024h _ Reseved S o G ef 0025h_ Reserved i oo T e 0026h_ BRK brake release R f 1 0N 0 OFF S e 0027h_ BER brake erro _ _ R 1 ON 0 OFF S e 0028h _ ZS 0 Hz detection signa R f 1 ON 0 OFF S e 0029h_ DSE speed deviation maximum R f1 ON 0 OFF S e 002Ah POK positioning completed R 1 ON 0 OFF 002Bh_ FA4 set frequency overreached 2 R 1 ON 0 OFF 002Ch FA5 set frequency reached 2 1 ON 0 OFF R 002Dh on overload notice advance signal oR 1 ON 0 OFF PRA ne za 002Eh Odc Analog O disconnection detection 002Fh OlDc Analog Ol disconnection detection i DOO SOE O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection oso
53. 0027h Trip monitoring 3 inverter status See the list of inverter trip factors below 0029h Trip monitoring 3 frequency low 002Ah Trip monitoring 3 current d083 Output current at tripping DC input voltage at tripping 002Ch Trip monitoring 3 running time high 002Dh Trip monitoring 3 running time low h Cumulative power on time at tripping th Cumulative running time at tripping 0024h Trip monitoring 2 power on time high 0028h Trip monitoring 3 frequency high 0 to 40000 002Bh _ Trip monitoring 3 voltage 1h 002Eh Trip monitoring 3 power on time high ee 002Fh Trip monitoring 3 power on time low Cumulative p wer on timeat tripping mt 0030h Trip monitoring 4 factor See the list of inverter trip factors below i 0031h Trip monitoring 4 inverter status See the list of inverter trip factors below 0032h Trip monitoring 4 frequency high 0033h_ Trip monitoring 4 frequency low 01040000 9 01 R2 0034h Trip monitoring 4 current d084 Output current at tripping 0035h Trip monitoring 4 voltage i ippi DC input voltage at tripping 0036h Trip monitoring 4 running time high 0037h Trip monitoring 4 running time low Cumulative Funning time at trippirig 0038h Trip monitoring 4 power on time high 0039h Trip monitoring 4 power on time low Cumulative power on time at tripping 4 126 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr c
54. 03 00 01 Torque limit selection b040 02 03 04 b041 0 to 150 Forward powering in Torque MOI quadrant specific setting mode Torque limit 2 b042 0 to 150 Reverse regeneration in q quadrant specific setting mode cei b043 0 to 150 Reverse powering in Jorque imit 3 eee quadrant specific setting mode Torque limit 4 b044 0 to 150 Forward regeneration in q quadrant specific setting mode 40 Terminal function C001 to C008 41 42 10 NOTE lt gt applied for 90 to 160kW 4 93 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions When 00 quadrant specific setting mode is specified for the torque limit selection 0040 the torque limits 1 to 4 apply as shown below Torque Regeneration Powering b041 b042 Reverse rotation Forward rotation RV FW Powering Regeneration b043 b044 When 01 terminal switching mode is specified for the torque limit selection b040 the torque limits 1 to 4 are set as shown in the example below The torque limits 1 to 4 are switched by the torque limit switches 1 and 2 assigned to intelligent input terminals Example When torque limit switch 1 41 and torque limit switch 2 42 are assigned to intelligent input terminals 7 and 8 respectively Intelligent input terminals 1 8 OFF OFF b041 ON OFF r b042 OFF ON r b044 ON ON b043 Whe
55. 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions E Ambient temperature 50 C derating reference 200Vclass 400Vclass 90kW Derating of output current Derating of output current 052 4 6 8 10 12 0512 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency kHz Carrier frequency kHz NOTE In case of replacing with L700 combined with LCR filter please check the type code of LCR filter and consult for compatibility 90 160kW 4 2 36 Automatic carrier frequency reduction Related code The automatic carrier frequency reduction function automatically b089 Automatic carrier frequency i reduction selection reduces the carrier frequency according to the increase in output current b083 Carrier frequency setting To enable this function specify 01 for automatic carrier frequency reduction selection b089 Range of data Automati carier b089 00 01 00 invalid 01 valid frequency reduction When the output current increases to 60 72 84 or 96 of the rated current this function reduces the carrier frequency to 12 9 6 or 3 kHz respectively This function restores the original carrier frequency when the output current decreases to 5 lower than each reduction start level 0 4 55kW 75 132kW Carrier frequency reduction start level Carrier frequency after Carrier frequency reduction start level Carrier frequency after Restoration
56. 1371h 1372h 1373h 0 1374h alo arg a Daa SINSA oO ua oO TIIT NISIN o j ui INS of nfo f oo NS E a a e DE Oj a o e lt ie o S o freecom 1383h __ Reserved Inaccessible o 1384h __ Reserved TT inaccessible _ _ _ Z o o 1385h R W T GA ie ie a eG a Pa ee ona Reserved gt ES naccessible 4 136 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Function code Register No ren fer 1 function js fere 2 function 1403h a 4 function a 5 function a 6 function jon on 7 function 1408h Terminal 8 function 9 Monitoring and setting items Data resolution RV Reverse RUN 2 CF1 Multispeed 1 setting CF2 Multispeed 2 setting CF3 Multispeed 3 setting CF4 Multispeed 4 setting 6 JG Jogging DB external DC braking 8 SET Set 2nd motor data 2CH 2 stage acceleration deceleration 11 FRS free run stop 12 EXT external trip 13 USP unattended start protection 14 CS commercial power source enable 15 SFT software lock 16 AT analog input voltage current select 17 SET3 3rd motor control 18 RS reset 20 STA starting by 3 wire input 21 STP stopping by 3 wire input 22 F R forward reverse switching by 3 wire input 23 PID PID disable 24 PIDC PID reset 26 CAS control gain sett
57. 2 Torque limit 1 forward driving 132Bh Jin 4 quadrant mode boat Rw ototsoimo to 150 ototsoimo aea aea Ehn limit 2 132Ch reverse regenerating in b042 R W J0 to 150 no 1 4 quadrant mode Torque limit 3 reverse driving 132Dh in 4 quadrant mode boss Rw Ptos oto1soimoy 150 no EZI EZI Torque limit 4 132Eh forward regenerating in b044 R W J0 to 150 no 1 E quadrant mode 132Fh_ Torque limit LADSTOP enable b045 0 disabling 1 enabling 1330h_ Reverse Run protection enable b046 RW 0 disabling 1 enabling 1331h to a D 0 disabling 1 enabling 2 nonstop operation at Controller deceleration and stop nore power failure no restoration t334 on power loss ou ae Nonstop operation at momentary power failure eae to be done DC bus voltage trigger level Over voltage threshold during 1337h _ Deceleration time setting during b053 high RW to 360000 0 01 1338h power loss target voltage level b053 low sec Initial output frequency decrease 1339h b054 R W ototo 1000 0 01 Hz Proportional gain setting for 133Ah nonstop operation at momentary b055 R W 0 to 255 power failure Integral time setting for nonstop 0 001 133Bh operation at momentary power b056 R W JO to 65535 failure ca Pewee M limit level of 133Fh 010100 ower limit b061 b062 2 CA Mi limit level of wind 9 1340h b061 0 to 100 lower limit b060 b0
58. 3 Error indications by protective functions with the easy sequence function used Display on Description digital operator The inverter will display the error code shown on the right if an invalid instruction is found in a downloaded program 1 The inverter will display the error code if the PRG terminal is turned on when no program has been loaded The inverter will display the error code shown on the right if subroutines for instructions and next instructions are nested in more than eight levels The inverter will display the error code shown on the right if the for or another instruction to start nesting is not found at the jump destination of a go to instruction and the next or another instruction to end nesting precedes the nesting start instruction An error is assumed when an arithmetic operation instruction has resulted in overflow or underflow or a division by zero has been attempted An error is assumed when a chg param or mon param instruction has attempted to reference an undefined parameter set the data beyond the specified setting range in a parameter or update a parameter that cannot be changed during the inverter operation Invalid instruction Nesting count error Execution error 1 The inverter outputs an error code when a trip instruction is executed User trips 0 to 9 1 The error code is output when the relevant program runs 5 7
59. 30 M8 Re0 8 8 1 MAX8 8 RX225B 200A H125 R amp R 37 L700 370LFF 100 38x 2 38 M8 100 8 8 1 MAX8 8 RX225B 225A H150 45 L700 450LFF 100 38x 2 38 a M8 100 8 8 1 MAX20 RX225B 225A H200 55 L700 550LFF 150 60x 2 60 M8 150 8 8 1 MAX20 RX400B 350A H250 75 L700 750LFF 150 60x 2 80 M10 R150 10 19 5 MAX22 RX400B 350A H300 11 L700 110HFF 55 55 5 5 M5 R5 5 5 2 4 MAX4 0 EX50C 30A HK35 15 L700 150HFF 8 8 55 me R86 4 0 MAX4 4 EX60B 60A HK35 18 5 L700 185HFF 14 14 8 M6 R14 6 4 5 MAX4 9 EX60B 60A HK50 22 L700 220HFF 14 14 8 me R14 6 4 5 MAX4 9 RX100 75A HK50 30 L700 300HFF 22 22 14 me R22 6 4 5 MAX4 9 RX100 100A H65 g 37 L700 370HFF 38 22 N me 38 6 4 5 MAX4 9 RX100 100A H80 gt 45 L700 450HFF 38 22 Az M8 R38 8 8 1 MAX20 RX225B 150A H100 55 L700 550HFF 60 30 Z M8 R60 8 8 1 MAX20 RX255B 175A H125 75 L700 750HFF 100 38X2 38 M8 100 8 8 1 MAX20 RX225B 225A H150 90 L700 900HFF 100 38X2 38 M10 R100 10 20 0 MAX22 RX225B 225A H200 110 L700 1100HFF 150 60X2 60 M10 R150 10 20 0 MAX35 RX400B 350A H250 132 L700 1320HFF 80X2 80 Mio 80 10 20 0 MAX35 RX400B 350A H300 160 L700 1600HFF 100X2 80 M10 R100 10 20 0 MAX35 RX400B 350A H400 Note Cable gauges indicate those of HIV cables maximum heat resistance 75 C 1 Please use the round type c
60. 335 za NA Toa F001 multispeed 0 lt Start frequency adjustment b082 1 1036 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 lt 11037 Jog frequency setting A038 lt Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 Jump center frequency settings Il I ALI 1085128511385 4202 A220 A320 2 lt gt __ 1 2 3 Jump hysteresis frequency width settings 1 2 3 1086 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 lt gt A063 A064 A065 A066 A067 A068 3 1091 1291 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 gt 1092 1292 Fequency lower limit setting A062 A262 gt 171095 1295 Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 A202 A220 A320 2 gt a V f frequency 7 1096 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 gt Free setting V f frequency 1 to 6 6100 b102 b104 b106 gt b108 b110 Free setting V f frequency 2 to 6 0102 b104 b106 b108 lt Free setting V f frequency 1 b110 b100 Free setting V f frequency 1 6100 gt Free setting V f frequency 2 Free setting V f frequency 3 to 6 0104 b106 b108 b110 lt b102 11440 Free setting V f frequency 1 2 b100 b102 gt Free setting V f frequency 3 5 Free setting V f frequency 4 to 6 0106 b108 b110 lt b104 Free setting V f frequency 1 to 3 b100 b102 b104 b110 gt Free setting V f frequency 4 Free setting V f frequency 5 6 0108 b110
61. 4 2 The content of the display varies depending on the arameter type p yp To update numerical data be sure to press the 1 2 Oto key after changing the data Ta ALP mosen Extended function mode B Pressing the key reflects the valu set here in i ALTO the corresponding parameter Q 0 Note that the value is not reflected in the corresponding z AGF U parameter i LFO Extended function a 6 9 mode C AQT Extended function 34 mode H i function mode U NT Extended PARETO a Ce function mode P Display with the factory setting Pressing the key d G 4 You cannot restore the stores the value set here ALTO display with the in the corresponding U F 0 0 key parameter DFF T 3 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 4 Procedure for directly specifying or selecting a code You can specify or select a code or data by entering each digit of the code or data instead of scrolling codes or data in the monitor function or extended function mode The following shows an example of the procedure for changing the monitor mode code d001 displayed to extended function code A029 1 Display the monitor mode code d001 is displayed HITACHI Soe ohz RUNO z mo OOO 120m o 2 amp Oe 3 AY the Non toget
62. 4 2 77 Window comparators WCO WCOI WCO2 detection of terminal disconnection ODc OIDc O2Dc E E E E OS SE SENG USuseticb SORECSNE SORES SRE T AE ATT A T TT TTT 4 a 74 4 2 78 Output signal delay hold function C130 to C141 s ttstrsttstsstttetetteteteeeeteneetenenceneens 4 75 4 2 79 Input terminal response time serreteeretett eerste tee e teen te teste etetee teen eteneeteeeeteneeeeeeetenteeneey 4 75 4 2 80 External thermistor function TH b098 D099 CO85 crrrrrtssrtttrtttereetttetetteettteeettteeenees 4 75 4 2 81 FM terminal C027 b081 PPE TILLY ECPCE RECT ETELCe LCE ET RCL Creer TERE CER eL eC Terre CR CEE Cee ECR Tere Tier 4 76 4 2 82 AM and AMI terminals C028 C029 C106 C108 to C110 vrrrrrrrrteerrettetteeetttttteeetttsees 4 77 4 2 83 Initialization setting b084 b085 RITE LEPE CELE CEPT CRE RT TET ECE TET PCE R Cee CECE CCT ECC eer Ce CRC eno 4 78 4 2 84 Function code display restriction 0037 UOO1 to U012 serrsserrrssrrrrssrerrsssrressreeessnneens 4 79 4 2 85 Initial screen selection selection of the initial screen to be displayed after power on D038 sseeeeeeerrertrtererersrsrsrerrsesrsrerererenturerererennentetenennueunenenenennnnuneneenreeeeeeennt 4 81 4 2 86 Automatic user parameter setting 0039 U001 to UO12 erssesereerrsrrrerrrrrrrrrrssesrerereeenees 4 82 4 2 87 Stabilization constant setting HOOG Renee 4 82 4 2 88 Selection of operation at option board error P001 POO2 rsrrrrsterretteeteretttttteeetetteees 4 82 4
63. 4 74 z comparators O 6 A i boge Maximum limit evel of window 100 to 100 lower limit b067 b068 2 100 o o comparators O Minimum limit level of window hag r o y b067 comparators 0 01 02 100 to 100 lower limit b066 b068 2 100 O O Hysteresis width of window ran A b068 comparators 0 01 02 0 to 10 lower limit b066 b067 2 0 O O b070 Operation level at O disconnection 0 to 100 or no ignore no O b071 Operation level at OI disconnection 0 to 100 or no ignore no O b072 Operation level at O2 disconnection 100 to 100 or no ignore no O Note lt gt indica Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com e the setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 7 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed z or not or not Cumulative input power data ina oa b078 clearance Clearance by setting 01 and pressing the STR key 00 O O re Cumulative input power display gain b079 setting 1 to 1000 als O b082 Start frequency adjustment 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 0 50 x 4 43 if 0 5 to 12 0 kHz subject to derating 3 b083 Carrier frequency setting lt 0 5 to 8
64. 5 b050 Controller deceleration and stop on 00 disabling 01 nonstop deceleration to stop 00 2 power loss 02 DC voltage constant control with resume 03 without resume amp DC bus voltage trigger level during 220 0 b051 power loss 0 0 to 999 9 1000 V 440 0 x x tai P 2 b052 Over voltage threshold during power 0 0 to 999 9 1000 V 360 0 x x 2 oss 720 0 o P e A 3 boss peceleration time setting during Power 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 1 00 x x 4 84 2 w nitial output frequency decrease 3 b054 during power loss 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 00 x x o Q Proportional gain setting for nonstop 2 b055 operation at power loss 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 O O 7 F S ntegral time setting for nonstop Zz b056 operation at power loss 0 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 s 0 100 O O poeg Maximum limit level of window 0 to 100 lower limit b061 b062 2 100 o o comparators O pogi Minimum limit level of window 0 to 100 lower limit b060 b062 2 o o o comparators O Hysteresis width of window Eha 3 b062 comparators O 0 to 10 lower limit b061 b062 2 0 O O Maximum limit level of window hais 0 9 b063 comparators O 0 to 100 lower limit b064 b066 2 100 O O o w Minimum limit level of window bites 7 9 9 z b064 comparators O 0 to 100 lower limit b063 b066 2 0 O O cara z 8 boes Hysteresis width of window 0 to 10 lower limit b063 b064 2 0 o o
65. 95 torque LAD StOD eeseeeseseeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeennees 4 95 trip COUNT aia aaien eaa R die Esa aa e n eaaa 4 5 trip MONIHOTINQ naesneenneenneeneennnnnsennnennennnnennnnnene 4 5 troubleshooting eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeereneeeens 5 1 TRO ise tel tessa aa easter tered 4 93 TROT RQ resne taner eens ates 4 93 2 stage acceleration deceleration e 4 30 20H rie eek eh ee E 4 30 WG ieazcete sts cick cok aie eee ee tet te 4 57 Ub sccueh hae dhe laden ni iis 2 19 unattended start protection s e 4 56 aE senntatdd pedensdecdese aguedes Raphi nearest Cietent 4 57 UP DWN dissec adie eiren a Deea ranka 4 57 user MONION a iroisraniiai iiet aaia aa eias 4 5 user parameter eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 79 4 82 USEF SOWING nirin ieioea ea diriana iae 4 80 USP rales aoe bet auaa a Sea a dt 4 57 UENEN E E 4 35 4 61 V f gain setting i saaseenneneineennnnennnirnnnnnna 4 15 A E E E de ale O S 4 16 VPA 7 powem aeee re eek cal ae 4 16 WAG E EEE i ee eh 4 70 WA Bette era cents a A wm cent etite 4 71 WAINING FUNCTION 0 eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenneeerenaeees 5 10 WCO vs he eed wars eee 4 74 WCOlins anusn daieagie E E 4 74 WCO2nen alain A Math SA is 4 74 WINGOW COMPALALON ee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeneeeees 4 74 wiring of control circuit terminal eee 2 20 OHZ detection Signal s e 4 66 OHz speed detection signal n e 4 66 ZS nied nN Sat eave ees 4 66 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
66. A002 If the forward operation FW and reverse operation RV commands are input at the same time the inverter stops the motor operation Terminal function C021 to C025 41 FR Starting contact Alarm relay terminal function C026 signal Forward operation command Reverse operation command Starting contact signal FR 4 2 71 Heat sink overheat warning signal OHF The inverter monitors the temperature of its internal heat sink and outputs the heat sink overheat warning OHF signal when the temperature exceeds the heat sink overheat warning level C064 Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 a ae Heat sink overheat ara pada Alarm relay terminal function C026 a Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C064 Heat sink overheat warning level Setting of the threshold Heat sink overheat warning level C064 0 to 200 temperature at which to output the heat sink overheat warning signal 4 71 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 72 Low current indication LOC signal The inverter outputs the low current indication LOC signal when the inverter output current falls to the low current indication signal detection level C039 or less You can select one of the two signal output modes with the low current indication signal output mode sel
67. A044 A244 03 Sensorless vector control curve selection Quadrant specific setting mode 7 iii Terminal switching mode Sea 02 Analog input mode selection 03 Option 1 mode 04 Option 2 mode Torque limit 1 b041 0 to 150 ih powering in quadrant specific setting Torque limit 2 b042 0 to 150 Reverse regeneration in quadrant specific setting mode Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 b045 Torque limit LADSTOP enable Torque limit 3 b043 0 to 150 dg powering in quadrant specific setting Torque limit 4 b044 0 to 150 Forward regeneration in quadrant specific setting mode Tasma os O te TT LADSTOP enable Terminal function C001 to C008 4 95 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 101 Easy sequence function Related code You can create a user program with EZSQ the A017 Easy sequence function selection programming software dedicated to the L700 on a P100 to P131 Easy sequence user parameters personal computer and download the program to your L700 series inverter Thus you can convert your inverter to a special machine on which user defined functions are installed Please refer to programming instruction of EZSQ user manual The easy sequence function does not provide an operation mod
68. C008 eeseeesereeneererene 4 57 4 2 52 External trip EXT function C001 to COO8 srr tseststteseeeeteteteteentneeteteteteteatatanenens 4 58 4 2 53 3 wire interface operation function STA STP and F R C001 to C008 streets 4 58 4 2 54 Control gain switching function CAS A044 C001 to C008 H005 H050 to H052 H070 to H072 EPEA E E T A AAT E 4 59 4 2 55 P PI switching function PPI A044 C001 to C008 H005 H050 to H052 H070 to H072 EAE EE EE E EEE E TA T T T E N 4 60 4 2 56 Analog command holding function AHD C001 to C008 eseeereeerrerrrrrrrrrrrreeeseen 4 61 4 2 57 Intelligent pulse counter PCNT and PCC ssssssssssrssssesssssesssssesneesseesnseensnensneesneensseeness 4 61 4 2 58 Intelligent output terminal setting C021 to CO26 vrs etter terete tees eeerenenees 4 62 4 2 59 Intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection C031 to CO36 verreesen 4 63 4 2 60 Running signal RUN C021 to C025 srt tetenetetetetetetetatataneeataes 4 64 4 2 61 Frequency arrival signals FA1 FA2 FA3 FA4 and FA5 C021 to C025 C042 C043 C045 C046 oe ais Wis bib widie ea uiue Nee ee Dun Sieeebiue iets Dun Sijeua bios Deisebiesibe bets Dub siese tine beweeUsbSe en T cues 4 64 4 2 62 Running time over and power on time over signals RNT and ONT b034 C021to C026 d016 d017 aA AA A E N A a NEEN Dor 4 66 4 2 63 0 Hz speed detection signal ZS A044 C021 to 0025 COGS eteeeereeeeeereeeree 4 66 4 2 64 Over torque signal OTQ A044 C021 to
69. C018 01 b NO contact Cd Note 1 If function 31 forcible operation or 51 forcible operation terminal is assigned to an intelligent input terminal the settings made with functions A001 and A002 will be invalidated when the said intelligent input terminal is turned on and those methods to input frequency setting and operation commands which are specified for the said terminal will be enabled Note 2 On the remote operator SRW being used to operate the inverter pressing the REMT remote key enables you to input both frequency setting and operation commands from the remote operator Note3 When the DeviceNet option board SJ DN is used A002 is not needed to be changed from default because the run command source is automatically set via DeviceNet In case it is changed it is to be set as 01 02 or 03 4 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 6 Stop mode selection The stop mode selection function allows you to select one of two methods of stopping the motor when a stop command is input from the digital operator or via the control circuit terminal block One is to decelerate the motor according to the specified deceleration time and then stop it the other is to let the motor run freely until it stops If a start command is input while the motor is in free running status the inverter will restart the motor according to the sett
70. C025 C055 to CO58 eeeeeeeeeeneerenene 4 67 4 2 65 Alarm code output function ACO to AC3 C021 to C025 C062 eeeeeereeeeeeree 4 68 4 2 66 Logical output signal operation function LOG1 to LOG6 C021 to C026 C142 to C159 EEEE sieug otis danisuvete dacudecedesisnscegcces eb seesdeessecsiessdedescveseeaastuscecvces ceecasevedtedsscusedesicus 4 69 4 2 67 Capacitor life warning signal WAC C021 to CO26 srrrrestereeeteeeeeteeteeetseeeseeeteeeteeees 4 70 4 2 68 Communication line disconnection signal NDc C021 to C026 C077 eenesenen s 4 70 4 2 69 Cooling fan speed drop signal WAF C021 to C026 b092 to A022 rrrrrrttttttesteetees 4 71 4 2 70 Starting contact signal FR C021 to CO26 srt teeters te teen teteteteeenteeeneneenenaes 4 71 4 2 71 Heat sink overheat warning signal OHF C021 to C026 C064 seeren 4 71 4 2 72 Low current indication LOC signal C021 to C026 C038 C039 srrtttttttttttettsetees 4 72 4 2 73 Inverter ready signal IRDY C021 to C026 srrtttrstrtstteret teeters teeeeeeeteteenenteteneerenenaes 4 72 4 2 74 Forward rotation signal FWR C021 to CO26 srrrstessttestettetetetettetetee ee teneeteneeeeneees 4 72 4 2 75 Reverse rotation signal RVR C021 to CO26 srr teste eeteteteeee ents eeeneenenaes 4 73 4 2 76 Major failure signal MJA C021 to CO26 vrrrstetrettttetstetetetetetetetetetetetetetatatateteataes 4 73 x Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Contents
71. C081 1 1456h C082 WW 1 1457h C083 R W 1 1458h 1459h C085 R W 0 1 145Eh Reserved Inaccessible 145Fh_ Debug mode enable C091 1469h Up Down memory mode selection C101 R W 0 not storing the frequency data 1 storing the frequency data 146Ah Reset mode selection C102 R W 0 resetting the trip when RS is on 1 resetting the trip when RS is off 2 enabling resetting only 146Bh Restart mode after reset C103 frequency 146Ch Reserved Inaccessible 146Dh FM gain adjustment C105 R W_ 50 to 200 upon tripping resetting when RS is on 3 resetting only trip 146Eh AM gain adjustment C106 R W_ 50 to 200 146Fh AMI gain adjustment C107 R W_ 50 to 200 1 0 starting with 0 Hz 1 starting with matching 4 139 So To Vo Halal 3s 1450h C076 R W Oo J x d zz en 1451h 1452h 1453h 1454h 1455h 1456h 1457h 1458h 1459h 145Ah to R W frequency 2 restarting with active matching ary A fez 5 o Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register 1470 1471h 1472h 1473h hA Reserved 147Dh 147Eh 147Fh e Reserved 1486h 1487h 1488h 1489h 148Ah 148Bh 148Ch 148Dh 148Eh 148Fh Function name Reserved AM bias adjustment AMI bias adjustment Overload setting 2 Zz olo O input zero calibrat
72. C136 Output 14 on delay time C137 Output 14 off delay time C138 Output 15 on delay time C139 Output 15 off delay time C140 Output RY on delay time Output RY off delay time 4 2 78 Output signal delay hold function The output signal delay hold function allows you to set on delay and off delay times for each output terminal Since every output signal is turned on or off immediately when the relevant condition is satisfied signal chattering may occur if signal outputs conflict with each other Use this function to avoid such a problem by holding or delaying specific signal outputs To use this function set on delay and off delay times for individual output terminals a total of six terminals such as intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 and the alarm relay terminal Range of data C130 C132 C134 C131 0133 C135 Output off C137 C139 C141 0 0 to 100 0 s Setting of off 4 2 79 Input terminal response time The input terminal response time function allows you to specify a sampling time for each of intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 and the FW terminal You can use this function effectively to remove noise e g chattering Related code C160 to C167 Response time of intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 C168 FW terminal response time If chattering hinders constant input from an input terminal increase the response time setting for the input terminal Note that an increase in response time
73. Capacitor Life Curve 4 Even if dust is detached when the cooling fan is in the state of the lock by dust etc it takes the time of about 5 10 second to the re rotation 5 Inverter circuit and converter circuit including resistors have the thing that the exchange is needed by power cycle life 6 It is necessary to exchange it in proportion to accumulation ON OFF frequency ON OFF life 7 Please refer to the manual for Output of Life Warning 6 4 Ground Resistance Test with a Megger When testing an external circuit with a megger disconnect all the external circuit cables from the inverter to prevent it from being exposed to the test voltage Use a tester in high resistance range mode for a conduction test on the control circuit Do not use a megger or buzzer for that purpose Apply the ground resistance test using a megger only to the main circuit of the inverter Do not carry out the test using a megger for its control circuit Use a 500 VDC megger for the ground resistance test Before the main circuit test with a megger remove the jumper for switching the inverter s internal filter function and then connect terminals R S T U V W P PD N RB RO and TO by wires as shown in the figure below Subsequently carry out the test After the test using the megger remove the wires from terminals R S T U V W P PD N RB RO and TO and connect the jumper for switching the inverter s internal fil
74. Data resolution Inaccessible Inaccessible Register 0 0 01 Hz 0 free running after jogging stops disabled during operation 1 deceleration and stop after jogging stops disabled during operation 2 DC braking after jogging stops disabled during operation 3 free running after jogging stops enabled during operation 4 deceleration and stop after jogging stops enabled during operation 5 DC braking after jogging stops enabled during operation manual torque boost 1 automatic torque boost to 200 to 500 VC 1 VP 2 free V f sensorless vector control 0 to 100 2 a a 2 Z 3s oo N to 255 to 255 naccessible disabling to 40000 to 50 to 70 1 enabling 2 set frequency only 0 01 Hz 0 1 sec 1 oO to 600 0 1 sec Q edge operation 1 level operation to 70 to 600 to 120 naccessible maximum frequency limit to maximum frequency 0 or maximum frequency limit to maximum frequency 0 to 40000 1 0 1 sec 0 1 kHz oa oO fo 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 to 600 0 1 sec 4 131 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions a Function name Monitoring and setting item
75. E A A EE 4 28 4 29 Odean oe e N E tes a 4 74 offline auto tuning eeeeeeeeerreeerrrerrrrreren 4 86 OHR ae ia ri lsc corer 4 71 OU EEEE AEE TT 2 8 2 20 OlDGeni n io nannies 4 74 0 IOE a l E EEEE A 4 41 OUR AS RTTE A Pa E E T eetitea teeta 4 40 online auto tuning eeeeeeeeeeeerreerrrern 4 88 ONT s c8e heii cee ania a dons 4 66 OPE perei le ie ee 3 4 4 8 4 52 Operating Methods eeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeees 3 1 operation after Option erfor 4 82 Operation frequency eeeeeeeeseeeeesteeeeeneeeees 4 13 operation MOE eeeeeceeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees 4 33 operation time over signal RNT plug in time over signal ONT OPC ALON ESTEER EEEE TTET OTQ 2 nei output Current MONILOLING e 4 1 output frequency MOnitoring 4 1 output frequency setting 4 7 output signal delay hold ccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 75 output voltage monitoring eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 4 3 overcurrent restraint 4 42 overload notice advance signal 4 40 4 41 overload restriction 4 40 OVONOTGU Okin Bee ee 4 67 AARE alae EEEE E E TT 4 60 P24 id A E eee eek 2 8 2 20 POG ca Siete dna aidatsnaieia tad 4 61 PGER ma ota at Ala eaa a a a ae eke 4 96 PONT arsine ae re a eee ten 4 5 4 61 phase loss input 0 2 eect eenteeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeees 4 36 phase loss input protection eeeeeeeeees 4 36 PID sist iid deltoid sheets bee ae 4 26 PIDG E ee tate idee netted Sait 4 29 power MONILOM
76. FOC terminal is off J Output frequency Restarting according to the setting of b088 Exciting current flows 4 92 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions 4 2 98 Torque limitation function The torque limitation function allows you to limit the motor output torque when 03 sensorless vector control is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 You can select one of the following four torque limitation modes with the torque limit selection b040 1 Quadrant specific setting mode In this mode individual torque limit values to be applied to four quadrants i e forward powering reverse regeneration reverse powering and forward regeneration are set as the torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 respectively 2 Terminal switching mode In this mode the torque limit values set in the torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 are switched from one another according to the combination of the states of torque limit switch terminals 1 and 2 TRQ1 and TRQ2 assigned to intelligent input terminals A single selected torque limit is valid in all operating states of the inverter
77. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 How to calculate the block check code BCC Example When using the 01 command frequency setting command to set the inverter output frequency to 5 Hz the station No of the inverter is 01 Transmission frame configuration p STX Station No Command Data BCC ASCII code gt 0x 02 Ox 30 31 Ox 30 31 0x 30 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D Ox The contents of Station No to Data are converted into ASCII data and the ASCII data is XORed bit by bit The final XOR result is set as the block check code BCC In the above example of transmission frame BCC is calculated as follows 3 0 0 31 3 31 30 30 30 35 30 Xor 01 Xor 31 Xor 00 Xor 30 Xor 00 Xor 30 Xor 05 Xor 35 30 Xor O5 05 This result is used as BCC Reference ASCII code conversion table Character data ASCII code Character data ASCII code 4 113 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 2 Communication in Modbus RTU mode 1 Communication protocol The communication between the inverter slave and external control system master is based on the following protocol 1 IT External control system Inverter MW GQ Time 2 Waiting time silent interval
78. JIS C60068 2 6 2010 IEC 60068 2 6 2007 Note 2 The insulation distance complies with the UL and CE standards Note 3 The applicable motor refers to Hitachi standard 3 phase motor 4 pole when using other motors care must be taken to prevent the rated motor current 50 60Hz from exceeding the rated output current of the inverter Note 4 Function 64 EMR cannot be assigned to input terminal 3 by an operation from the operator The function is automatically assigned to the terminal when slide switch SW1 is set to ON Note 5 The storage temperature refers to the short term temperature during transport Note 6 The frequency command will equal the maximum frequency at 9 8V for input voltage 0 to 10VDC or at 19 8mA for input current 4 to 20mA If this characteristic is not satisfactory for your application contact your Hitachi sales representative Note 7 The analog voltage monitor and the analog current monitor are rough output values for analog meter connection The maximum output value might shift a little by the difference of the analog output circuit than 10V or 20mA Please inquire when there is a possibility that the inconvenience is caused Notes As for the range of the speed change the variation range is different according to the installation situation and the characteristic and the usage condition of the motor Please inquire about details Note9 The density of air decreases by 1 whenever rising by 100m when the altitude exceeds 100
79. L700 150HFF 15 10 35 90 10 100 L700 185HFF 18 5 10 24 110 10 100 L700 220HFF 22 10 24 90 10 100 L700 300HFF 30 10 20 80 10 100 2 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation EN This chapter describes typical methods of operating the inverter how to operate the digital operator and how to make a test run of the inverter 3 1 Operating Methods PEE REEN E EE EEEE 3 2 1 3 2 How To Operate the Digital Operator eee 3 4 3 3 How To Make a Test Run initebieneedinweceucineveucsceebines 3 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 Operating Methods While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any terminal or internal part of the inverter check signals or connect or disconnect any wire or connector Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Be sure to close the terminal block cover before turning on the inverter power Do not open the terminal block cover while power is being supplied to the inverter or voltage remains inside Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch the terminal of the inverter even if it has stopped Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire If the retry mode has been selected the inverter will restart sud
80. O ae C152 Logical output signal 4 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O isg ee Signa g operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o C154 Logical output signal 5 selection Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O C155 Logical output signal 5 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O Cie eee operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o C157 Logical output signal 6 selection Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O C158 Logical output signal 6 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O C159 eae put signal 6 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o C160 nput terminal response time setting 1 0 to 200 x2ms x O d C161 nput terminal response time setting 2 0 to 200 x2ms x O C162 nput terminal response time setting 3 0 to 200 x2ms x Oo 2 C163 nput terminal response time setting 4 0 to 200 x2ms x O 7 C164 nput terminal response time setting 5 0 to 200 x2ms x O 4 75 E C165 nput terminal response time setting 6 0 to 200 x2ms x Q C166 nput terminal response time setting 7 0 to 200 x2ms x O 2 C167 nput terminal response time setting 8 0 to 200 x2ms x G C168 mpa terminal response time setting 0 to 200 x2ms o aee 00 200 10m o x o fes Note lt gt indicate th
81. R W 200 to 1000 0 1 an current output 0 reduced torque characteristic 1 constant torque 130Eh Electronic thermal characteristic b013 Paw oraracienstio 2 free setting EA J inaccessible o o U O Fee sting electronic thermal 1310h freauone b015 Raw Joto 400 a Hz 1311h Pee seting electronic thermal b016 0 to Rated current ee Free a electronic thermal 1312h frequency 2 b017 Rw o to 400 1313h Teer Na WaT thermal b018 0 to Rated current 0 1 I Free See electronic thermal 1314h frequency 3 b019 0 to 400 1315h Free setting E thermal b020 S Rated c rrent 0 1 current 3 L 1 Ot 0 disabling 1 enabling auring acceleration and constant speed operation 2 enabling during 1316h roan resinenonoperation b021 R W_ constant speed operation 3 enabling during acceleration and constant speed operation speed increase at regeneration 1317h Overload restriction setting b022 200 to 1500 Deceleration rate at overload 1 01 0 disabling 1 enabling woe acceleration and constant speed operation 2 enabling during 1319h lies restriction operation b024 R W constant speed operation 3 enabling during acceleration and constant speed operation speed increase at regeneration 131Ah Overload restriction setting 2 b025 200 to 1500 EGON rate at Se J 01 131Ch TET enable b027 R W _ J0 disabling 1 enabling Active frequency matching scan 131Dh start frequency b028 R W 200 to 1500 0 1
82. R1 3300 1 125 R21700 R23390 1 2 lo V 272 xX 2 X Mys00 LJ300 xX 10 V Voltage class 200 or 400 V 4 89 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Convert the moment of inertia J into the motor shaft data When the value of J is large the motor response is fast and the motor torque increases quickly When the value of J is small the motor response is slow and the motor torque increases slowly To control the response set the value of J and then adjust the speed response H005 H205 4 Inthe modes of sensorless vector control OHZ range sensorless vector control and vector control with sensor inverter may output reverse to given operation command in the low speed range as a nature of those control In case there is a specific inconvenience for example reverse rotation damage the machine enable the reverse run protection 0046 see 4 2 101 Reverse run protection function Arbitrary setting of motor constants For the arbitrary setting of the motor constants the function codes requiring settings vary depending on the settings of the 1st 2nd control function and the motor constant selection When the 1st 2nd control function is enabled and 00 is specified for the motor constant selection gt Directly input the desired values for H020 to H024 When the 1st 2nd control function is enabled and 01 or 02 is specified for the m
83. Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes OA BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response See ltem 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 110 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions xii OB command This command recalculates the constants set in the inverter This command must be issued when the base frequency or the setting of parameter H has been changed for the RS485 communication Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station number of control target Station No 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 0B BCC Blok check cod 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 111 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Positive
84. The inverter can recognize only the operation command that is input while the IRDY signal is output If the IRDY signal is not output check whether the input power supply voltage connected to the R S and T terminals is within the range of specification Signal is not output when the power is given only to control power supply Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 50 IRDY Inverter ready signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 4 2 74 Forward rotation signal FWR Related code The inverter continues to output the forward rotation FWR signal C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions while it is driving the motor for forward operation C026 Alarm relay terminal function The FWR signal is turned off while the inverter is driving the motor for reverse operation or stopping the motor Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 FWR Forward rotation signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 75 Reverse rotation signal RVR Related code The inverter continues to output the forward rotation RVR A R Non Tungugns signal while it is driving the motor for reverse operation The RVR signal is turned off while the inverter is driving the motor for forward operation or stopping the motor tem Function code Data or range of data Description ___ Terminal
85. Tripping when the power failure duration exceeds the specified time See example 2 Retry wait time before b003 0 3 to 100 s Time to wait until restarting the motor 00 Disabling the inverter fromtripping Instantaneous power failure under voltage trip Disabling the inverter from tripping when the inverter is alarm enable 2 4 stopped or while the motor is being decelerated or stopped after the operation command has been turned off 02 Retrying the motor operation up to 16 times after instantaneous power failure E ROAS pee 01 Retrying the motor operation an unlimited number of times 4 after instantaneous power failure Related code b001 Selection of restart mode b002 Allowable under voltage power failure time b003 Retry wait time before motor restart b004 Instantaneous power failure under voltage trip alarm enable b005 Number of restarts on power failure under voltage trip events b007 Restart frequency threshold b008 Selection of retry count after undervoltage C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function Restarting the motor with 0 Hz if the frequency becomes Restart frequency threshold b007 0 00 to 400 0 Hz less than the frequency set here during motor free running See examples 3 and 4 00 Tripping Restarting the motor with 0 Hz at retry Starting the motor with a matching frequency at retry Trip retry selection b008 Starting the motor wi
86. Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
87. a Edge mode b Level mode i Example 4 a when the start command is input i Example 4 b when the start command is input FW p FW TESE Output Output frequency frequency lt A5 lt A58 ii Example 5 a when the stop command is input ii Example 5 b when the stop command is input FW FW Free running Output Output Free running frequency an ae frequency y l i i z apr ADI o 088 m2 amp 3B 055 __ ii Example 6 a when the stop command is input ii Example 6 b when the stop command is input p a a a Output Output i en LLL O i f o A55 A055 A052 i A052 l 4 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 Internal DC braking triggered only when the output frequency reaches a set frequency A051 02 You can also operate the internal DC braking function so that DC braking is applied to the motor when the inverter output frequency falls to the DC braking frequency setting A052 or below Please do not use external DC braking by ON OFF of DB terminal when you select this function In this mode DC braking operates only when the operation command signal is on i e the start command is input The inverter starts DC braking when both the frequency set by the frequency command and the current output frequency fall to the DC braking frequency setting A052 or below See examp
88. active range start frequency 00 external start frequency 01 0 Hz 01 x O selection A016 External frequency filter time const 1 to 30 or 31 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz with hysteresis 31 x O 4 15 A017 Easy sequence function selection 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 x x 4 96 F 4 00 binary 16 speeds selectable with 4 terminals ADIS Multispeed operation selection 01 bit 8 speeds selectable with 7 terminals o R 4 A020 Multispeed frequency setting 0 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A220 Multispeed frequency setting 2nd motor 0 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor Hz 0 00 O O A320 Multispeed frequency setting 3rd motor 0 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 3rd motor Hz 0 00 O O A021 Multispeed 1 setting 0 0 or start frequency to 1st maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A022 Multispeed 2 setting 0 0 or start frequency to 2nd maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A023 Multispeed 3 setting 0 0 or start frequency to 3rd maximum frequency Hz 0 00 Oo O 2 A024 Multispeed 4 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O amp A025 Multispeed 5 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O D A026 Multispeed 6 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O gar 5 A027 Multispeed 7 setting 0 0 or start frequency to
89. after reset C103 When C102 03 starting with 0 Hz is selected regardless to C103 setting If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it starts the motor with matching frequency increase the retry wait time before motor restart b003 You can select the alarm reset timing with the reset mode selection C102 You can also enable the reset signal to be output only when resetting an error alarm The RS terminal can be configured only as an a contact NO Do not use the RS terminal for the purpose of shutting off the inverter output The reset operation clears the electronic thermal and BRD counter data stored in the inverter and without this data the inverter may be damaged during operation Function Data or range of ae Retry wait time See the explanations of the retry after instantaneous power before motor restart b003 0 3 to 100 s failure or the retry after trip due to insufficient voltage Time to wait after reset until restarting the motor Restart frequency See the explanations of the retry after instantaneous yee Resetting the trip when the RS signal is turned on T example 1 When operation is normal Shutting off the inverter output When an error has occurred Resetting the trip Resetting the trip when the RS signal is turned off See example 2 When operation is normal Shutting off the inverter output Reset mode When an error has occurred Resetting the trip selection Resetting the trip when the RS signal is t
90. aitie inc newest sienna a a EiS 4 86 Keypad Run key routing nsee 4 7 KHein te el een aes 4 3 EA AE Gace ads 2 8 2 20 LAG ret a Sas Satta te 4 10 4 32 LAD tiie oA inne an ens 4 10 life check monitoring cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 4 4 70 VOCE a etal nee o L cotta 4 72 LOG1 LOG2 LOG3 LOG4 LOG5 LOG6 4 69 logical output signal operation eee 4 69 low current indication Signal eee 4 72 main circuit terminal 2 8 main circuit WITING eeeeeeeeeeeereeerrreerrirerrrnserees 2 20 maintenance and inSpection eeeeeeeeeee 6 1 major failure signal eenen 4 73 MAXIMUM frequency sssseieeeeeeereeerererrnneres 4 11 Manual torque booSt eeeeeererrreerreene 4 18 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 4 48 MO1 MO2 MO3 Ml4 MOS MO6 4 62 MOODUS RTU 8 asec ete eater 4 114 Mo Acs a a iis ee rack aa a e E ES 4 73 monitor MOE ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeneees 4 1 8 1 motor constant ccceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 4 86 4 89 motor temperature MONItOriING s e 4 4 multispeed 4 setting seeen 4 48 multistage speed position determination timMe ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeerenaeees 4 49 ND Gs te iste he Bestest eet TE 4 70 aLe EEE EEEE ESEESE 4 48 AON A E A eeveeu the 4 48 4 63 nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure ceseeceeeeseeeteseeeeressenenees 4 84 Oeae ea a 2 8 2 20 O PAE E AAE E 2 8 2 20 4 12 87A DG E EEEE T TE A A 4 74 OD
91. allows you to initialize the adjusted settings on the inverter to restore the factory settings You can also clear the trip history data alone The settings of initialization are described below The settings of P100 to P131 running time data and power on time data cannot be cleared 00 Clearing on the trip history data parameters or trip The factory settings are restored settings Initializing procedure Adjust the above settings as required and then perform the following procedure Related code b084 Initialization mode parameters or trip history b085 Country code for initialization HITACHI Sauru HITACHI SPUER oHz OHz RUN oV RUN o F P oy PRG 8 8 8 8 on lt PRG Lad 3 og k o O o o JAIO SAJE 1 Holding down the FUNC and 2 2 Initialization is in progress 3 When the initialization is down keys press and hold down The above figure shows the completed the monitor displays the STOP RESET key monitor display indicating that the code d001 After the monitor starts blinking initialization is in progress Confirm that the settings have release only the STOP RESET intended for Japan Those been initialized key The display on the monitor intended for other regions and trip changes to that shown in the history clearance are shown middle figure above below Release the FUNC and 2 down keys Initialization in progress display for trip history c
92. ambient recorder humidity must be 90 RH or less without condensation Whole inverter Check for abnormal vibrations and o Check visually and by listening There must be no abnormality noise found Power supply Check that the main circuit voltage Measure the voltage between the The measured voltage must be Tester digital voltage is normal O main circuit terminals R S and T within the allowable tolerance for multimeter AC power voltage Main General check 1 Check the ground resistance Disconnect all input and output cables 500 VDC class circuit between the main circuit and rom tne invertsrs mair erent terminal megger i j ock qetacl e control circuit terminal ground terminals with a megger block from the inverter and remove the jumper for switching the inverter s o internal filter function Subsequently The measured ground resistance measure the insulation resistance must be 5MQ or more between the ground terminal and the jumper connecting all the following terminals R S T U V W P PD N RB RO and eck screws a o loosening 3 Check each part for any trace of o Check visually There must be no abnormality overheating found Connecting 1 Check the conductors for o Check visually ree and distortion o oo There must be no abnormality 2 Check the cable insulations for o found damage Terminal block Check the terminal blocks for o Check visually There must be no abnormality damage found Inverter circuit Chec
93. and negative responses i Positive response Response frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter ACK Control code acknowledgement 1 byte ACK 0x06 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to ACK See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D ii Negative response Response frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter NAK Control code negative 1 byte NAK 0x15 acknowledgement Error code Content of communication error 2 bytes See Note 13 XOR of the items from Station No to Error BEG Block cnecKicode 2 bytes code See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 15 Error codes Error code Description 01H Parity error 02H Sum check error 03H Framing error 04H Overrun 05H Protocol error 06H ASCII code error 07H Receiving buffer overflow 08H Reception timeout 11H Command error 12H 13H Execution disabled 14H z 15H 16H Parameter error 17H If a command is broadcasted to all inverter stations no response will be returned to the external control system 4 112 Phone 800 894 0412
94. b212 R W from current output 2nd motor W 230Dh Electronic thermal b213 R 0 reduced torque characteristic 1 characteristic 2nd motor constant torque characteristic 2 free setting 230Eh to i Motor data selection 2nd 0 Hitachi standard data 1 auto tuned data 2 E20 H202 auto tuned data with online auto tuning function 0 1 2503h Motor capacity 2nd motor H203 R W 1 2504h Motor poles setting 2nd motor H204 a ae 1 4 poles 2 6 poles 3 8 poles 4 2505h Motor speed constant 2nd H205 high RW Ji to 80000 0 001 2506h motor H205 low e a e a Aa ee e a Saa e a 253Eh_ PI integral gain for 2nd motor H251 R W_ 0 to 10000 0 1 P proportional gain setting for 259 nase Rw foto 1000 T Psor Reserven o ee o ERT peana Ooo i peee 1 The following table lists the code data for parameter H203 motor capacity selection 0 1 EA Code data 00O 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity 0 2 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 NEEE Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity 5 5kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 OA Code data 22 23 24 25 J 26 fJ 2 Jooo dodd Motor capacity 90kW 110 132 150 160 4 145 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions
95. com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 50 Unattended start protection USP function The unattended start protection function allows you to make the inverter trip with error code E13 displayed if the inverter power is turned on when an operation command has been turned on You can recover the inverter from tripping by performing the reset operation or turning the operation command off See example 1 Related code C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions If the inverter is recovered from tripping with the operation command left turned on the inverter will start operation immediately after recovery See example 2 The inverter can operate normally when an operation command is turned on after the inverter power is turned on See example 3 To use this function assign function 13 USP to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 The following charts show examples of the timing of the unattended start protection operation Example 1 Power supply USP RS aam J Example 2 Po wer supy ff FW USP l RS M Alarm j Example 3 ower wo USP E E RS Alarm Output Output Zz Output frequency TS frequency frequency PA ltem Functioncode Data Description Terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 USP Unattended start protection 4 2 51 Remote control function UP and DWN Related code The remote control function allows you to
96. copied In such cases confirm the parameter settings on both copy source and copy destination inverters before using the copy destination L700 series After copying the data be sure to power off and on again to reflect the copied data 3 Option boards You can use the option boards SJ DG SJ DN SJ LW and SJ PBT mounted in the L300P series for the L700 series To mount the option boards in the L700 series follow the same mounting procedure as that used for the L300P series For details refer to the instruction manual for each option board Precaution Since the L700 series has many new functions and additional parameters some functions of the SJ DN SJ LW and SJ PBT option boards conforming to the open network specifications cannot be implemented on the L700 series A 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com A CUD estan teedes ects cadet senate avatar ad 4 48 4 63 acceleration deceleration patterns 4 31 acceleration curve Constant eeeeeeeeeeeees 4 31 acceleration tiMe cccccccsssseceeeeeteneeees 4 10 4 30 acceleration 2 time neceser 4 30 acceleration StOP cccessecereesereeteseeeeresseners 4 25 ADD oieee ereer iin anes 4 14 AAD tice eis cel Aino i aaia ei aaae 4 61 A siesta a SS gk Ee i 4 62 alarm code output oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenees 4 68 alarm relay terminal fUNCtION eee 4 63 allowable under v
97. deteriorates the response The response time can be set in a range of about 2 to 400 ms corresponding to settings of 0 to 200 Range of data Response time of intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 Secs 0 to 200 Variable in step of 1 4 2 80 External thermistor function TH The external thermistor function allows you to connect an external thermistor installed in external equipment e g motor to the inverter and use the thermistor for the thermal protection of the external equipment Connect the external thermistor to control circuit terminals TH and CM1 Make the functional settings according to the thermistor specifications as described below When using this function the wiring distance between the inverter and motor must be 20 m or less Since the thermistor current is weak isolate the thermistor wiring to the inverter from other wirings appropriately to prevent the thermistor signal from being affected by the noise caused by other signal currents including the motor current Sa o OEO Disabling the external thermistor TH function Thermistor for th rmal Enabling the TH function resistor element with protection control b098 a positive temperature coefficient PTC l Enabling the TH function resistor element with a negative temperature coefficient NTC Related code b098 Thermistor for thermal protection control b099 Thermal protection level setting C085 Thermistor input tuning Thermal protection level Settin
98. driving the motor Data or range of data 00 Specifying that the fan operates on a constant basis Specifying that the fan operates only while the Cooling fan b092 inverter is driving the motor control 01 Note that the fan operates for 5 minutes after the inverter power is turned on and after the inverter is stopped Note The cooling fan stops automatically when instantaneous power failure occurs or the inverter power is shut off and resume the operation after power recovered 4 46 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 39 Intelligent input terminal setting Related code You can assign the functions described below to intelligent input C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions terminals 1 to 8 To assign the desired functions to the terminals specify the desired data listed in the table below for terminal settings C001 to C008 For example C001 corresponds to intelligent input terminal 1 You can select the a contact or b contact input for individual intelligent input terminals You can assign one function only to an intelligent input terminal If you have attempted to assign a function to two or more intelligent input terminals the function is assigned to only the terminal to which you have last attempted assignment Function data NO no assign is assigned to other terminals and those terminals are ineffective in
99. eee etter eee eee eer eee eee rer eee eee eer eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 a 33 4 2 28 Phase loss power input protection b006 eceuccncaecccccccccccccccuccuccucccceccceuccscuscccsuscccussssecees 4 36 4 2 29 Electronic thermal protection b012 b013 b015 b016 C021 to C026 C061 4 37 4 2 30 Overload restriction overload notice b021 to b026 C001 to C008 C021 to C026 C040 C041 C111 eG uses Wejuue Cubes ces uuu bis beciweeueu bieeBejetinces Wels Scib tien sebioe bee cel Sides t sue baetustbieesebuebieuse ts 4 40 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 2 31 Overcurrent restraint 0027 sss teeteteteeretee ee te tsetse teen teetee teen teneeneeeeteeeteeteteeeeneneeeneaeny 4 41 4 2 32 Overvoltage supression during deceleration b130 to 0132 eeeeeeeererenererreneem 4 42 4 2 33 Start frequency setting D082 essere te erete teen eretee te ceeeeteeteeteeeeeetenteeeeeetenteeeeees 4 43 4 2 34 Reduced voltage start function 036 D082 lt restsetseresetseteettteteeteeteeeeeetente een eeneteneneneeees 4 43 4 2 35 Carrier frequency setting deen nee nee ne en ne en ne ene ene On AO On AO eR GOEAGEEROEEOOHEOOHSOORAOOAGOESGEESOESOSORSGORGOERGE HOSE 4 44 4 2 36 Automatic carrier frequency reducation strstr tert tttereet ttre tees tenteten teen ce nenen ee teneees 4 45 4 2 37 Dynamic braking BRD function b090 b095 D096 strstst tsetse tee tee tet teetetenees 4 46 4 2 38 Cooling fan operation settin
100. filter setting A016 PPE TEEPE eee etter eee eee eee etter eee eee 4 15 4 2 16 Vit gain setting A045 A082 Pee Eee e ere eee eee eter eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee 4 n 15 4 2 17 V F characteristic curve selection A044 b100 D101 ereeesreeeerereerenemrne 4 16 4 2 18 Torque boost setting A041 f A042 A043 H003 H004 eee tee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eter eee 4 18 4 2 19 DC braking DB setting A051 to A059 C001 to C008 ssrreststrtrsereeteetstteetettestensens 4 20 4 2 20 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A062 sessssosusossusossusousususousussssususessusossessusunuseususons 4 24 4 2 21 Jump frequency function A063 to A068 Pere ere rere errr er errr reer ere rere titer errr tier errr irri irr 4 25 4 2 22 Acceleration stop frequency setting A069 A070 A097 terere 4 25 4 2 23 PID function A001 A005 A071 to A076 d004 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 C044 eR EE eRe E ee eee 4 26 4 2 24 Two stage acceleration deceleration function 2CH F002 F003 A092 to A096 C001 to C008 Pere eee ere eee eee eee ere rete eer eee er eee rete ee eee eee eer eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 eat 30 4 2 25 Acceleration deceleration curve selection A097 A098 A131 A132 srrttrtttrrttterttee 4 31 4 2 26 Energy saver operation A085 A086 cca eccuceeccccuccccuccunuccccccccnecccccucccccecccecccssuscccusccceessous 4 32 4 2 27 Retry or trip after instantaneous power failure 0001 to b005 b007 b008 C021 to C026 Pere eee Eee eee eee eee
101. gain switching function CAS The control gain switching function allows you to set and switch between two types of gains and time constants for the speed control system with proportional and integral compensations when the V F characteristic curve selection is the sensorless vector control Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors H070 Terminal selection PI proportional gain setting H071 Terminal selection PI integral gain setting H072 Terminal selection P proportional gain setting To use this function assign function 26 CAS control gain setting to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the CAS terminal is turned off the gain settings H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 and H252 are selected When the CAS terminal is turned on the gain settings H070 H071 and H072 are selected If function 26 CAS control gain setting is not assigned to any intelligent input terminal the same gain settings as those selected when the CAS terminal is off are selected Data or range of data V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 Sensorless vector control Terminal function C001 to C008 CAS Control gain setting
102. i Cumulative running time hour x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 2 Output current A x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code g DC voltage V x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 3 Cumulative power on time hour x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code g 4 107 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vii 06 command This command reads a specified setting item from the inverter Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 06 Parameter Data parameter number 4 bytes See Note 12 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 12 The parameters that can be specified for reading are F002 to F004 A001 to A153 b001 to b132 C001 to C159 H003 to H073 and P001 to P131 To read the F001 parameter use the 01 command Response frame Positive response Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter ACK Control code acknowledgement 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data to be sent decimal ASCII 8 bytes
103. installed inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire When carrying the inverter do not hold its top cover Otherwise you run the risk of injury by dropping the inverter Prevent foreign matter e g cut pieces of wire sputtering welding materials iron chips wire and dust from entering the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Install the inverter on a structure able to bear the weight specified in this Instruction Manual Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Install the inverter on a vertical wall that is free of vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or its parts are missing Otherwise you run the risk of injury Install the inverter in a well ventilated indoor site not exposed to direct sunlight Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to high temperature high humidity condensation dust explosive gases corrosive gases flammable gases grinding fluid mist or salt water Otherwise you run the risk of fire The inverter is precision equipment Do not allow it to fall or be subject to high impacts step on it or place a heavy load on it Doing so may cause the inverter to fail 2 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 1 Precautions for installation 1 Transportation The inverter uses plasti
104. instantaneous power failure t1 Allowable under voltage power failure time b002 t2 Retry wait time before motor restart b003 Example 1 Example 2 Power supply Power supply Inverter output Inverter output l Freerunning _ Free running Motor speed e Motor speed e to t2 l to gt Example 3 When the motor frequency speed Example 4 When the motor frequency speed is more than the setting of b007 is less than the setting of b007 Power supply Power supply Inverter output Inverter output Motor frequency speed Free running Free running F b007 Motor frequency 0 matching 9 AN t0 t2 frequency KON t2 Starting with lt lt gt lt lt gt 9 Hz 4 34 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Output of the alarms for instantaneous power failure and undervoltage in the stopped state Use function b004 to specify whether to output an alarm when instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs The inverter outputs the alarm providing the control power remains in the inverter Output of the alarms for instantaneous power failure and undervoltage in the stopped state Examples 5 to 7 show the alarm output operations with standard settings Examples 8 to 10 show the alarm output operations with the settings to supply DC power P N
105. inverter power Do not open the terminal block cover while power is being supplied to the inverter or voltage remains inside Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch the terminal of the inverter even if it has stopped Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire If the retry mode has been selected the inverter will restart suddenly after a break in the tripping status Stay away from the machine controlled by the inverter when the inverter is under such circumstances Design the machine so that human safety can be ensured even when the inverter restarts suddenly Otherwise you run the risk of injury Do not select the retry mode for controlling an elevating or traveling device because output free running status occurs in retry mode Otherwise you run the risk of injury or damage to the machine controlled by the inverter If an operation command has been input to the inverter before a short term power failure the inverter may restart operation after the power recovery If such a restart may put persons in danger design a control circuit that disables the inverter from restarting after power recovery Otherwise you run the risk of injury The STOP key is effective only when its function is enabled by setting Prepare an emergency stop switch separately Otherwise you run the risk of injury
106. inverter will be limited to 0 Hz However when 02 enabling the inverted output is set for the PID Function Enable A071 the PID operation result to be output to the inverter is inverted if the result is a negative value Setting 02 for function A071 disables the PID variation limit A078 described above 8 PID gain adjustment If the inverter response is unsteady when the PID control function is used try to adjust gain settings as follows If the feedback data does not quickly follow the change in the target value Increase the P gain A072 If the feedback data is unstable although it quickly follows the change in the target value Reduce the P gain A072 If considerable time is required until the feedback data matches the target value Reduce the gain A073 If the feedback data fluctuates unsteadily Increase the gain A073 If the inverter response is slow even after the P gain is increased Increase the D gain A074 If the feedback data becomes fluctuant and unsteady when the P gain is increased Reduce the D gain A074 9 Maximum PID deviation output OD You can set the PID deviation level C044 for PID control When the PID deviation exceeds the level set as the level C044 the signal is output to an intelligent output terminal A value from 0 to 100 can be set as the level C044 The range of values corresponds to the range of target values from 0 to the maximum To use this ou
107. level reduction kHz Restoration level reduction kHz Less than 60 of rated current 15 0 Less than 60 of rated current 10 0 60 55 of rated current 12 0 60 55 of rated current 8 0 72 67 of rated current 9 0 71 66 of rated current 6 0 84 79 of rated current 6 0 83 78 of rated current 4 5 96 91 of rated current 3 0 91 86 of rated current 3 0 11 to 75kW 90 to 160kW Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 10 0kHz eee 8 0kHz 6 OK nnn a ae ee B OK HZ peene 0 5 t f ff 10 0 5 f f t t 10 60 71 8391 Output current 60 71 8391 Output current The rate of carrier frequency reduction is 2 kHz per second The maximum limit of carrier frequency change by this function is the value specified for the carrier frequency setting b083 the minimum limit is 3 kHz Note If 3 kHz or less frequency has been specified for b083 this function is disabled regardless of the setting of b089 4 45 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 37 Dynamic braking BRD function The dynamic braking BRD function is provided in the L700 300LFF HFF and other models that have the built in BRD circuit With this function the energy regenerated by the motor is consumed by an external resistor i e the energy is converted to heat You can effectively use this function in your system for example to operate the motor as a generator by rapid
108. of the digital operator 6 1 3 Periodic inspection Check those inverter sections and parts which are accessible only while the inverter is stopped and which should be inspected regularly When you intend to carry out a periodic inspection contact your local Hitachi Distributor During a periodic inspection perform the following 1 Check that the cooling system is normal Clean the air filter as needed 2 Check the screws and bolts for tightness and retighten them Screws and bolts may have loosened because of vibrations and temperature changes Check them carefully 3 Check to ensure conductors and insulators are not corroded or damaged 4 Measure the dielectric breakdown voltage of insulators 5 Check the cooling fan smoothing capacitors and relays and replace them if necessary 6 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 2 Daily and Periodic Inspections Inspection cycle Part to Inspection item Detail of inspection Periodic Inspection method Criterion Test equipment inspect Daily Annual Biennial General Environment Check the ambient temperature See Section 2 1 Installation The ambient temperature must Thermometer humidity and dust be within 10 C to 50 C without hygrometer O congelation The
109. operation 4 48 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 1 Binary operation mode Assign functions 02 CF1 to 05 CF4 individually to the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 to make multispeed s 0 to 15 available for selection Specify the desired frequencies for speeds 1 to 15 by setting multispeeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 You can set speed 0 by using function A020 A220 A320 or F001 see Section 4 2 1 when you have specified the digital operator for the frequency source setting You can set speed 0 by using the O Ol or O2 terminal when you have specified the control circuit board for the frequency source setting Speed 11 Speed1_ OFF OFF OFF ON atte Frequency input from Speed2 OFF OFF ON OFF z the digital operator or via an external analog input terminal ON ON With multispeed binary operation mode you can use the multistage speed position determination time setting C169 to specify a delay to be set until the relevant terminal input is determined Use this specification to prevent the application of fluctuating terminal input before it is determined The input data is finally determined when terminal input becomes stable after the delay set as C169 Note that a long determination time deteriorates the input terminal response ON ON ON ON ON ON Deternination tine C169
110. other data on the inverter the d090 Programming error monitoring inverter displays a warning The PRG program lamp lights up while the warning is displayed until the data is rewritten forcibly or corrected For details on the programming error monitoring function see Section 5 2 Warning Codes 4 1 24 DC voltage monitoring Related code When the DC voltage monitoring is selected the inverter displays the DC voltage 4102 DC voltage monitoring across terminals P and N of the inverter While the inverter is operating the monitored value changes as the actual DC voltage of the inverter changes Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 V 4 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 25 BRD load factor monitoring Related code When the BRD load factor monitoring function d103 is selected the inverter d103 BRD load factor monitoring displays the BRD load factor If the BRD load factor exceeds the value set as the P090 Dynamic braking usage ratio dynamic braking usage ratio b090 the inverter will trip because of the braking resistor overload protection error code E06 Display 0 0 to 100 0 in steps of 0 1 4 1 26 Electronic thermal overload monitoring Related code When the electronic thermal overload monitoring function d104 is selected the 4104 Electronic thermal overload inverter displays the electronic thermal over
111. p setting power This terminal supplies 10 VDC power to the O O2 Ol terminals Allewable iead current supply 0 mA or less Input a voltage 0 to 10 VDC as a frequency command 10 V specifies the maximum frequency To specify the maximum frequency with a voltage of 10 V or less set the voltage using function A014 Auxiliary Input a voltage 0 to 10 VDC as a signal to be added to the frequency frequency command input from the O or Ol terminal You can input an independent command frequency command from this terminal O2 terminal alone by changing the voltage setting Input a current 4 to 20 mA DC as a frequency command 20 mA specifies the maximum frequency The Ol signal is valid only when the AT signal is on Assign the AT function to an intelligent input terminal This terminal outputs one of the selected 0 to 10 VDC voltage output monitoring items The monitoring items available for selection include output frequency output current output torque signed or unsigned output voltage input power electronic thermal overload LAD frequency motor temperature heat sink temperature and general output This terminal outputs one of the selected 4 to 20 mA DC current output monitoring items The monitoring items available for selection include output frequency output current output torque unsigned output voltage input power electronic thermal overload LAD frequency motor temperature heat sink temperature and general output
112. power supply wiring during operation Use this noise filter to reduce the radio noise radiant noise Radio noise filter on input side Use this noise filter to reduce the radiant noise radiated from Capacitor filter CFI X input cables DC reactor DCL X XX beak staal to control the harmonic waves generated by Use these devices to increase the braking torque of the Braking resistor inverter for operation in which the inverter turns the connected Regenerative braking unit load on and off very frequently or decelerates the load running Noise filter on the output side ACF CX Radio with a high moment of inertia Connect this noise filter between the inverter and motor to reduce the radiant noise radiated from cables for the purpose of reducing the electromagnetic interference with radio and television reception and preventing malfunctions of measuring equipment and sensors noise filter Use this noise filter to reduce the noise generated on the Zero phase reactor output side of the inverter This noise filter can be used on ZCL XXX both the input and output sides AC reactor for the output side For reducing vibrations and preventing thermal relay malfunction ACL X XX This filter converts the inverter output into a sinusoidal 7 Using the inverter to drive a general purpose motor may cause larger vibrations of the motor when compared with driving it directly with the commercial power supply Connect this
113. ra a C D c o 02 gt i i oO fom D g Analog monitor current Allowable load impedance 2500 or less Interface power supply common a 2 2 lt fa a ba j 2 G lt fe 4 e z rom 2 5 N oO 6 a Conditions for turning Forward rotation Turn on this FW signal to start the forward rotation of the motor turn it off to Contact input on command stop forward rotation after deceleration Voltage across input and PLC 18 VDC or more command a aii Operation Input impedance between Select eight of a total 60 functions and assign these eight functions to input and PLC 4 7kQ terminals 1 to 8 Maximum allowable voltage Intelligent input Note across input and PLC If the emergency stop function is used terminals 1 and 3 are used 27 VDC exclusively for the function For details see Item 3 Emergency stop function on page 2 8 Load current with 27 VDC power about 5 6 mA Contact input Function selection and logic switching 2 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Symbol Terminal name Electric property To switch the control logic between sink logic and source logic change the jumper connection of this PLC terminal to another terminal on the control Intelligent input circuit terminal block WA l PLC comm
114. routing F004 PEER Eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 7 4 2 3 Rotational direction restriction b035 Pee RECEP eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 i 7 4 2 4 Frequency source setting A001 snsssnnssnnnnnussnunnunssunnnuussnunnunussnunnunnsnunnunnsnunnunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 8 4 2 5 Run command source setting A002 C001 to C008 C019 F004 rrrreterrreeeeeereeeeeesees 4 8 4 2 6 Stop mode selection b091 F003 b003 b007 b088 OOEETETETETETELECELETETEELELELELELELELELELEELELI 4 S 9 4 2 7 STOP key enable b087 eee eee eee ete eee eee eee eee rete eee eee eee eter eee eee eee e ree ere eee eee ete 4 9 4 2 8 Acceleration deceleration time setting F002 F003 A004 P031 C001 to C008 4 10 4 2 9 Base frequency setting A003 A081 s A082 Pee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 11 4 2 10 Maximum frequency setting A004 PPE eee Tete eee Teeter eee etree eet eee eee ee eee eee 4 11 4 2 11 External analog input setting O O2 and Ol A005 A006 C001 to C008 4 12 4 2 12 Frequency operation function A141 to A143 A001 A076 srrrstrtsstsstrttstseteetetees tenes 4 13 4 2 13 Frequency addition function A145 A046 C001 to COO8 ssrrestrtttsteetettetseteetesteesens 4 14 4 2 14 Start end frequency setting for external analog input A011 to A015 A101 to A105 A111 to A114 vrrseeseretetete ee ttette tees eteeee tens etenenneeeenenneceesenenneeeeeseutenteceesenauteceuenanseenanenantees 4 14 4 2 15 External analog input O OI O2
115. source setting A001 the setting of AT selection A005 is invalid The table below shows how the PID target value is selected according to the setting of A006 when the analog input is selected by the PV source setting and the control circuit terminal block 01 is specified for A001 f PID target value PM SOTERRAR ere A006 00 A006 01 A006 02 A006 03 O 02 O 02 SMOrg non reversible reversible i Ol O2 Ol O2 0 04 osei __ Operation targets include the O 02 O 02 input to the Ol terminal non reversible reversible corra OE 10 operation Operation targets include the Ol 02 Ol O2 T to the Ol and O terminals reversible 4 27 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions When you specify the 02 RS485 communication for the PV source setting A076 transfer data as described below 1 When the ASCII mode is selected C078 00 Use the 01 command for data transfer To transfer feedback data set the most significant byte of frequency data to 1 Example When transmitting the frequency data specifying 5 Hz The data to be transmitted consists of six bytes indicating a value 100 times as large as the set frequency value gt 000500 Change the most significant byte to 1 100500 Convert the data to ASCII format gt 31 30 30 35 30 30 Note In ASCII mode the unit of setting is always frequency Hz 2 When
116. specified register address Example When reading the trip history data from the inverter at slave address 5 Assume that the conditions of the past three trips are as follows d081 factor of most recent trip d081 inverter state at most recent trip Register number 0012h 0013h Trip factor upper digit Overvoltage E07 Decelerating 02 Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 03 2 Function code 03 3 Starting register number 00 3 Number of data bytes 3 04 upper digit 2 4 Starting register number 00 4 Starting register number 11 upper digit lower digit 2 5 Starting register number 07 5 Number of registers upper 00 lower digit digit 6 Starting register number 1 00 6 Number of registers lower digit 02 upper digit 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit 95 7 Starting register number 1 02 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 8A lower digit 1 This query cannot be broadcasted 8 _CRC 16 code upper digit 36 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the 9 _CRC 16 code lower digit 37 actual coil number of the coil to be read first 3 The data equivalent to the specified number of data bytes is transferred In this example 4 bytes are transferred because the data on two registers is returned in the response Read the data received in the response as follows Response buffer 4 5 6 7
117. stopping by 3 wire input STP forward reverse switching by 3 wire input F R PID disable PID PID integration reset PIDC control gain switching CAS acceleration by remote control UP deceleration by remote control DWN data clearance by remote control UDC forcible operation OPE multispeed bit 1 SF1 multispeed bit 2 SF2 multispeed bit 3 SF3 multispeed bit 4 SF4 multispeed bit 5 SF5 multispeed bit 6 SF6 multispeed bit 7 SF7 overload restriction selection OLR torque limit selection enabling disabling TL torque limit 1 TRQ1 torque limit 2 TRQ2 P PI switching PPI LAD cancellation LAC trigger for frequency addition A145 ADD forcible terminal operation F TM cumulative power clearance KHC general purpose input 1 MI1 general purpose input 2 MI2 general purpose input 3 MI3 general purpose input 4 MI4 general purpose input 5 MI5 general purpose input 6 MI6 general purpose input 7 MI7 general purpose input 8 MI8 analog command holding AHD emergency stop EMR Note4 no assignment no Thermistor input terminal 1 terminal positive temperature coefficient negative temperature coefficient switchable for resistor Intelligent output terminals Output 5 open collector output terminals NO NC switchable sink logic source logic switchable 1 relay 1c contact output terminal NO NC switchable Terminal functions Select six of 51 functions Running RUN
118. terminal is on the device to input frequency and operation commands is forcibly switched to the control circuit terminal block If the input device is switched while the inverter is operating the current operation command is canceled and the inverter stops the output When restarting the inverter operation turn off the operation command that was to be entered from each input device for safety s sake and then enter a new operation command Terminal function C001 to C008 F TM Forcible terminal operation Related code A001 Frequency source setting A002 Run command source setting C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions 4 52 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 47 Free run stop FRS function The free run stop FRS function allows you to shut off the inverter output to let the motor start free running You can effectively use this function when stopping the b028 Active frequency matching scan start frequency motor with a mechanical brake e g electromagnetic b029 Active frequency matching scan time constant brake If an attempt is made to forcibly stop the motor with 080 nce fregueney matching restart frequency a mechanical brake while the inverter keeps its output the 6901 te Coos Terminal 1 to 8 functions inverter may trip because of overcurrent To use this function assign function 11 FRS to one of
119. terminals Example FW terminal and intelligent input terminals 7 2 and 1 ON Intelligent input terminals 8 e 5 i and A OFF ON The segment is on indicating the ON state Bi E HE oF The segment is off indicating the OFF state OFF gt a Intelligent input terminals t i w t t I i ne Eo ne eae ae 1 When input terminal response time is set terminal recognition is delayed refer 4 2 79 4 1 6 Intelligent output terminal status Related code When the intelligent output terminal status function d006 is selected d006 Intelligent output terminal status the inverter displays the states of the outputs from the intelligent output terminals This function does not monitor the states of the control circuit terminals but monitors those of the outputs from the internal CPU Intelligent input terminal status is independent of the a b contact selection for the intelligent input terminals Example Intelligent output terminals 12 and 11 ON Alarm relay terminal AL and intelligent output terminals 15 to 13 OFF Display DOS The segment is on indicating the ON state I 0 OFF The segment is off Ee indicating the OFF state Intelligent input terminals A t iy t ai cu on 4 1 7 Scaled output frequency monitorin Related code When the scaled output frequency monitoring d007 is selected the do07 Scaled output frequency monitoring inverter displays the gain data converted from the output freq
120. the following three types 1 Motor constants of Hitachi general purpose motor 2 Motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning 3 Arbitrarily set motor constants The motor constants set for the 1st motor control apply to the 3rd motor control Data or range of data 00 Constant torque characteristic VC Reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power gi of VP S a E r 02 1 Free V f characteristic 03 1 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 1 0 Hz range sensorless vector control 05 1 Vector control with sensor V2 Maida 00 Hitachi general purpose motor constants P annaia H002 H202 Motor constants tuned by auto tuning selection 02 Motor constants tuned by online auto tuning H003 H203 Ore t0900 kw Note lt gt applied for 90 to 160kW lt 0 2 to 160 kW gt Motor poles setting H004 H204 2 4 6 8 or10 poles o o S O Motor constantL H022 H222 0 00to 655 3 m o o O Auto constant R1 H030 H230 0 000 to 65 53 Q9 S O Auto constant R2 H031 H231 0 000 to 65 53 Q9 Z S O 0 00 to 655 3 mhi O O Auto constantlo H033 H233 0 00 to 655 3 A eC O 0 001 to 9999 ta pt 1 Any of 00 to 05 can be selected for the 1st motor A044 Only 00 to 04 can be selected for the 2nd motor A244 Only 00 or 01 can be selected for the 3rd motor A344 2 If you copy the data from a J300 series inverter to your L700 series inverter set constants R1 R2 and lo as follows R1 L700
121. transition of the monitored data on display codes on display Pressing the A or key respectively scrolls up or down the code displayed in code display mode or increases or decreases the numerical data displayed in data display mode Press the A or key until the desired code or numerical data is shown To scroll codes or increase decrease numerical data faster press and hold the key Monitor mode Pressing the E key with a function code displayed shows the monitored data corresponding to the function code Monitor display 1 Cer Pressing the E or key with the monitored data displayed reverts to the display of the function code corresponding to the monitored data With the factory setting the monitor shows initially after power on Pressing the E key in this status changes the display to Function or extended function mode Pressing the key with a function code displayed shows the data corresponding to the function code Data display Data setting Pressing the AN or we key respectively increases or decreases the displayed numerical data Press the key until the desired data is shown Pressing the key with numerical data displayed stores the data and then returns to the display of the corresponding function code Note that pressing the key with numerical data displayed returns to the display of the function code corresponding to the numerica
122. 0 10 000 to 80 000 1 590 O oO H006 Motor stabilization constant 1st motor 0 to 255 100 O oO Motor stabilization constant H206 ond motor 0 to 255 100 O Q 4 82 Motor stabilization constant H306 3rd motor 0 to 255 100 O O Depending on H020 Motor constant R1 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity x x Depending on H220 Motor constant R1 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity x 5 Depending on H021 Motor constant R2 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity x x Depending on H221 Motor constant R2 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity x x Nn e g Depending on S H022 Motor constant L 1st motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH motor capacity x x 5 c a 8 H222 Motor constant L 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH Depending on x x 5 motor capacity S H023 Motor constant lo 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A Depending on x x 8 motor capacity Depending on H223 Motor constant lo 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A motor capacity x x Depending on H024 Motor constant J 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 motor capacity x x Depending on H224 Motor constant J 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 motor capacity x x Depending on H030 Auto constant R1 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q motor capacity x x Depending on H230 Auto constant R1 2nd motor
123. 0 kHz subject to derating gt 3 0 x x 4 44 b084 Initialization mode parameters or trip 00 clearing the trip history 01 initializing the data 00 x 4 78 history 02 clearing the trip history and initializing the data b086 Frequency scaling conversion factor 0 1 to 99 0 1 0 Oo 4 2 b087 STOP key enable 00 enabling 01 disabling 02 disabling only the function to stop 00 x Oo 4 9 00 starting with 0 Hz 01 starting with matching frequency 4 5 b088 Restart mode after FRS 02 starting with active matching frequency 00 x 9 453 5 b089 Automatic carrier frequency reduction 00 invalid 01 valid 00 x 4 45 b090 Dynamic braking usage ratio 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 Oo 4 46 b091 Stop mode selection 00 deceleration until stop 01 free run stop 00 Q 4 9 00 always operating the fan b092 Cooling fan control 01 operating the fan only during inverter operation including 5 minutes 01 x O after power on and power off i p 00 disabling 01 enabling disabling while the motor is topped 4 46 b095 Dynamic braking control 02 enabling enabling also while the motor is topped 01 x Q b096 Dynamic braking activation level 330 to 380 660 to 760 V on x o b098 Thermistor for thermal protection 00 disabling the thermistor 01 enabling the thermistor with PTC 00 x o control 02 enabling the thermistor with NTC 4 75 b099 Thermal protection level setting 0 to 9999 Q 3000 x oO b100 Free setting V f frequency 1 0 t
124. 0 upper 0 lower 1 upper 1 lower Starting register number digit digit digit digit Response data Trip condition Trip due to overvoltage Decelerating If the function to read registers cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 119 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iii Writing data to a specified coil 05h This function writes data to a specified coil The following table shows the updating of the coil status Coil status Updating data upper digit Updating data lower digit ooh O Example When sending an operation command to the inverter at slave address 10 To start the inverter operation 03 must be set in parameter A002 Coil 1 is used to turn on an operation command Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 OA 1 Slave address 0A 2 Function code 05 2 Function code 05 3 Starting coil number 00 3 Starting coil number upper 00 upper digit 2 digit 4 Starting coil number 00 4 Starting coil number lower 00 lower digit 2 digit 5 Updating data upper digit FF 5 Updating data upper digit FF 6 Updating data lower digit 00 6 Updating data lower digit 00 7 CRC 16 code upper digit 8D 7 ___CRC 16 code upper digit 8D 8
125. 0 01 Hz Multispeed 7 setting ea Eo or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1226h f A028 high F A i 1227h Multispeed 8 setting A028 low Rw or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz en Multispeed 9 setting EION a0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 122Ah_ Multispeed 10 setting A030 high R W 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz teen A030 low RW Jo or start frequency to maximum frequency 122Ch__ Multispeed 11 setting A031 high quensy qHensy 0 01 Hz 122Dh A031 low i TEET F 122Eh _ Multispeed 12 setting A032 high R W 0 start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 122Fh A032 low OERS i 1230h _ Multispeed 13 setting A033 high R W 0 start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1231h A033 low F Senne F 1232h Multispeed 14 setting A034 high Raw 0 0 start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1233h A034 low gt aon 7 1234h Multispeed 15 setting A035 high Raw 0 0 start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 4 130 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Mio a Reserved J fJ Reserved o J J 1236h 1237h 1238h 0 Ea 1239h Jog stop mode A039 R W Reserved f P a Torque boost method A041 R W selection Manual torque boost value A042 R W Manual torque boost frequency adjustment pers RW V F characteristic cur
126. 0 1mA Ca 0 1mA Ca 0 1mA Ca 0 2mA Ca 0 2mA C a 0 2mA Ca 0 2mA 2 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 3 Applicable peripheral equipment See Item 4 Recommended cable gauges wiring accessories and crimp terminals Note 1 Power supply Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 ELB Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Magnetic contactor power stastanhanianieniennenieniannahehehededeiaietnietetatatatatetatatatatatatatatatatatataataatatatatetatatataatatatatatatatataatateaeemmmtammtatatate Noise filter for inverter NF XXX Radio noise filter Zero phase reactor ZCL X The peripheral equipment described here is applicable when the inverter connects a standard Hitachi 3 phase 4 pole squirrel cage motor Select breakers that have proper capacity Use breakers that comply with inverters Use earth leakage breakers ELB to ensure safety Use copper electric wire HIV cable of which the maximum allowable temperature of the insulation is 75 C If the power line exceeds 20 m cable that is thicker than the specified applicable cable must be used for the power line Use a 0 75 mm cable to connect the alarm output contact Tighten each terminal screw with the specified tightening torque Loose terminal screws may cause short circuits and fire Tightening a terminal screw with excessive torq
127. 0 480 Selectable on 400 V class inverter models 2 AVR function The AVR function maintains the correct voltage output to the motor even when the voltage input to the inverter fluctuates The output voltage maintained by this function is based on the voltage specified by the AVR voltage select Use the AVR function select A081 to enable or disable the AVR function The AVR function is always enabled 00 AVR function select A081 The AVR function is always disabled The AVR function is disabled at deceleration 1 1 Disabling the AVR function at motor deceleration increases the energy loss on the decelerated motor and decreases the energy regenerated on the inverter which results in a shorter deceleration time 4 2 10 Maximum frequency setting Related code The maximum frequency setting function allows you to set the A004 A204 A304 Maximum frequency maximum frequency of the motor driven by the inverter Setting 1SV2naara motors The maximum frequency set here corresponds to the maximum level of each external analog input See Section 4 2 12 for example 10 V Output of the input of O to 10 V voltage To switch the maximum frequency among the 1st 2nd and 3rd AVR settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent voltage input terminals Use the SET and SETS signals for switching select The inverter output voltage with the frequency ranging from the base 100 frequency to the maximum frequency is tha
128. 00 A111 4 Maximum frequency for reverse operation 4 2 15 External analog input O Ol O2 filter setting Related code The external analog input filter setting function allows you to set the A016 External frequency filter time input voltage input current sampling time to be applied when frequency const commands are input as external analog signals You can use this filter function effectively for removing noise from the frequency setting circuit signal If the noise disables the stable operation of the inverter increase the setting Setting a larger value makes the inverter response slower The filtering constant is set value 1 to 30 x 2 ms When the setting is 31 factory setting a hysteresis of 0 1 Hz is added to the filtering constant 500 ms Range of data Setting of 1 to 30 Set value x 2 ms filter eae ee A016 1 to 30 or 31 Setting of 31 500 ms filter fixed with hysteresis ime const of 0 1 Hz 4 2 16 V f gain setting Related code The V f gain setting function allows you to change the inverter output A045 V f gain setting voltage by specifying the rate of the output voltage to the voltage 100 4082 AVR voltage select selected with the AVR voltage select function A082 If the motor operation is cranky try to increase the gain setting Function code Range of data V f gain setting A045 20 to 100 Setting of the rate of reducing the output voltage AVR voltage select 100
129. 00 0000000000001000 SPD speed position switching 0000100000000000 0000000000002000 PCNT pulse counter 0000200000000000 0000000000004000 PCC pulse counter clear 0000400000000000 0000000000008000 0000800000000000 0000000000010000 0001000000000000 0000000000020000 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 0004000000000000 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 0000000000100000 0010000000000000 0000000000200000 0020000000000000 0000000000400000 0040000000000000 0000000000800000 0080000000000000 0000000001000000 0100000000000000 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 0000000004000000 0400000000000000 0000000008000000 0800000000000000 a 0000000010000000 1000000000000000 0000000020000000 2000000000000000 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 0000000080000000 8000000000000000 Example When activating the forward rotation Multispeed 1 setting and Multispeed 2 setting settings on the inverter with station No 01 specify the following in the Data part 0x0000000000000001 0x0000000000000004 0x0000000000000008 0x000000000000000D Consequently the whole transmission frame is as follows STX 01 02 000000000000000D BCC CR Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 104 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com E
130. 00 hr 4 3 time monitoring T i d017 Cumulative power on time 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 hr 4 4 monitoring Heat sink temperature 020 to 200 0 C apts monitoring 4 4 Motor temperature 020 to 200 0 C a019 monitoring e 4 4 1 Capacitor on main circuit board 2 Cooling fan speed drop d022 Life check monitoring _ La bed _ ON 4 4 III i lore 2 1 d023 Program counter 0 to 1024 4 4 d024 Program number monitoring 0000 to 9999 4 4 8 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting Default operation operation Page allowed or allowed or not not d025 User monitor 0 2147483647 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits including d026 User monitor 1 2147483647 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits including 4 5 d027 User monitor 2 2147483647 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits including d028 Pulse counter 0 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits 4 5 d080 Trip Counter 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 times 4 5 P va Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V do81 Trip monito
131. 00 series inverter whose slide switch SW1 is OFF or an SJ300 series inverter the digital operator on your SJ700 series inverter may display R ERROR COPY ROM for a moment This event may occur because the data on intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 cannot be copied since on your inverter exclusive functions have already been assigned to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 due to the slide switch SW1 setting to ON Note that other data is copied If this event occurs check the settings on both copy source and copy destination inverters 4 148 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes E eee This chapter describes the error codes of the inverter error indications by the functions and troubleshooting methods 5 1 Error Codes and Troubleshooting seere 5 1 5 2 Warning Codes ee ceecccuccccccccccccccusuccucucucnccccscusuauane 5 x 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 1 Error Codes and Troubleshooting 5 1 1 Error Codes oi Display on Display on 7 i 3 If the motor is constrained Check whether the load has fluctuated sharply or suddenly accelerated During Eliminate the load fluctuation or decelerated a high constante Check for the short circuit of output current will flow in the speed i connections inverter and the inverter operation Check the output cables may fail To a
132. 0000080000000000 PPI P PI mode selection 0000000000001000 EXT External trip 0000100000000000 BOK Braking confirmation 0000000000002000 USP Unattended start protection 0000200000000000 ORT Orientation 0000000000004000 CS Commercial power source enable 0000400000000000 LAC LAD cancellation 0000000000008000 SFT Software lock 0000800000000000 PCLR Clearance of position deviation 0000000000010000 AT Analog input voltage current select 0001000000000000 STAT Pulse train position command input enable 0000000000020000 SET3 3rd motor control 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 RS Reset 0004000000000000 ADD Trigger for frequency addition 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 F TM Forcible terminal operation 0000000000100000 STA Starting by 3 wire input 0010000000000000 ATR Permission of torque command input 0000000000200000 STP Stopping by 3 wire input 0020000000000000 KHC Cumulative power clearance 0000000000400000 F R Forward reverse switching by 3 wire input 0040000000000000 ISON Servo On 0000000000800000 PID Enabling disabling PID 0080000000000000 FOC Forcing 0000000001000000 PIDC PID reset 0100000000000000 MI1 General purpose input 1 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 MI2 General purpose input 2 0000000004000000 CAS Control gain setting 0400000000000000 MI3 General purpose input 3 0000000008000000 UP Remote control UP function 0800000000000000 MI4 General purpose input 4 0000000010000000 DWN Remote c
133. 03 F202 A292 A293 F203 F202 A292 A293 F203 F302 A392 A393 F303 Example 3 When 02 is specified for A094 or A294 FW Output frequency _ gt F002 F202 4 30 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code A097 Acceleration curve selection A098 Deceleration curve setting A131 Acceleration curve constants setting A132 Deceleration curve constants setting A150 Curvature for EL S curve acceleration 1 A151 Curvature for EL S curve acceleration 2 A152 Curvature for EL S curve deceleration 1 Curvature for EL S curve deceleration 2 4 2 25 Acceleration deceleration curve selection You can set different patterns of motor acceleration and deceleration according to the type of system to be driven by the inverter Use functions A097 and A098 to select acceleration and deceleration patterns respectively You can individually set an acceleration pattern for acceleration and a deceleration pattern for deceleration When the acceleration deceleration pattern is set other than 00 linear using analog input as frequency source is to be avoided because it prolongs the acceleration or deceleration time Data or range of data 00 Linear acceleration deceleration eadein S curve acceleration deceleration A097 A098 U curve acceleration deceleration curve selection l Inverted U cur
134. 036 Reduced voltage start selection increase the output voltage gradually when starting the motor b082 Start egueney adjustment Set a small value for the reduced voltage start selection b036 if you intend to increase the start torque On the other hand setting a small value will cause the inverter to perform full voltage starting and to easily trip because of overcurrent Range of data 00 Disabling the reduced voltage starting Reduced voltage start b036 oo 01 Short about 6 ms selection 01 to 255 t 255 Long about 1 53 s Start frequency b082 Output frequency Output voltage Reduced Voltage Start 00 01 06 b036 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 35 Carrier frequency setting The carrier frequency setting function 0083 allows you to change the carrier frequency of the PWM waveform output from the inverter Increasing the carrier frequency can lower the metallic noise from the motor but may increase the inverter noise and current leakage You can use this function effectively to avoid resonance of the mechanical system and motor sto BON C2 setting lt 0 5 to 8 0 kHz gt 2 1 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the inverter capacity When increasing the carrier frequency fc derate the output current as shown in the following table Derated output current is to be set as elec
135. 04 Maximum frequency setting gt oO O X A005 AT selection A020 Multispeed frequency setting gt O N A021 Multispeed 1 setting gt O N N A022 Multispeed 2 setting b002 Allowable under voltage power failure time b008 Selection of retry after trip b001 Selection of restart mode b011 Retry wait time after trip ion 1 F003 Deceleration 1 time setting C022 Terminal 12 function 29 C036 Alarm relay active state 4 2 85 Initial screen selection selection of the initial screen to be displayed after power on Related code The initial screen selection function allows you to specify the screen that pass nitialscreen selection is displayed on the digital operator immediately after the inverter power is turned on The table below lists the screens items selectable The factory setting is 01 d001 To adjust the screen selection setting of your L700 series inverter to an L300P series inverter select 00 the screen displayed when the STOP RESET key was last pressed Screen displayed when the STR key was pressed last equivalent to the setting on SJ300 Initial screen selection d007 Scaled output frequency monitoring Note When 00 the screen displayed when the STR key was last pressed has been selected the monitor displays code entry to a group of functions if the functional item displayed last is not nh op FE Example If the inverter power is turned off immedi
136. 087 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 4 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 8 Acceleration deceleration time setting Specify a longer time for slower acceleration or deceleration specify a shorter time for quicker acceleration or deceleration The time set with this function is the time to accelerate or decelerate the motor from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency or Related code F002 F202 F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A004 A204 A304 Maximum frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors P031 Accel decel time input selection C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions vice versa If you assign the LAD cancellation LAC function to an intelligent input terminal and turns on the terminal the set acceleration deceleration time will be ignored and the output frequency will immediately follow the frequency setting command To switch the acceleration and deceleration time among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals see Section 4 2 38 Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching As the Accel decel time input selection by P031 select one of the 1 input from the digital operation 2 input from option board 1 3 input from option board 2 and 4 input from
137. 0m Therefore it is necessary to decrease the calorific value The calorific value of the main circuit semiconductor such as IGBT is proportional to the current and the voltage Therefore please decrease by 1 and use the current rating every time it rises by 100m Please inquire about use in the high ground of 2500m or more 7 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications 7 2 External dimensions L700 110 to 150 LFF HFF o 3 Cable hole 33 x28 H L700 185 to 300 LFF HFF om D aL 3 Cable hole 42 x 42 5 N AAN Yr 7 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications L700 300 LF
138. 1 The current value of the jump center frequency is updated to the current value of the jump frequency value of Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection This chapter describes the precautions and procedures for the maintenance and inspection of the inverter 6 1 Precautions for Maintenance and INSPOCHION viecccctevesencecdeeececeveesccnvdvieedeevtaceeneess 6 1 6 2 Daily and Periodic Inspections 6 2 6 3 Replacing Parts c cc eeeeceeeeeeneeeeeenteeeeeeeaaes 6 3 6 4 Ground Resistance Test with a Megger 6 3 6 5 Withstand Voltage TeSt eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 6 4 6 6 Method of Checking the Inverter and Converter CirCuits 0 ccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 6 4 6 7 DC Bus Capacitor Life Curve ee 6 5 6 8 Output of Life Warning ccceeeeeeeneeeees 6 5 6 9 Methods of Measuring the Input Output Voltages Current and Powe c cceecee 6 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection Before inspecting the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply and wait for 10 minutes or more Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Before inspection confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off and the DC voltage between terminals P and N is 45 V or
139. 1 mH 1529h H032 low 152Ah H033 high R W Auto constant lo 1st motor high RAW to 65530 0 01 A 152Bh H033 low 152Ch H034 high R W 162Ch_ fauto constant J 1st motor high ew to 9999000 0 001 152Dh H034 low TEESE penea Oo ee o 153Dh PI proportional gain for 1st motor Hoso Rw oto 10000 0 1 153Eh PI integral gain for 1st motor Ho51 Raw oto 10000 0 1 eeen oo ee eea oo i ee 4553h Terminal selection P proportional H072 Rw o to 1000 gain setting TE ens COo o pe 4 141 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions W R 1601h A mode on expansion card ng 0 tripping 1 continuing operation 1602h as mode on expansion card poo2 0 tripping 1 continuing operation 1603h to EE rs C e e Temperature compensation 1619h thermistor enable P025 00 no compensation 01 compensation 161Eh l 1 1 2 2 0 digital operator 1 option 1 2 option 2 161Fh Accel decel time input selection P031 Rw p easy sequence 162Bh__ Reserved inaccessible O 162Ch__ Reserved inaccessible _ 162Dh__ Reserved inaccessible O 162Eh_ DeviceNet comm watchdog timer P044 to 9999 0 0 tripping 1 tripping after decelerating and stopping the Inverter action on DeviceNet comm motor 162Fh error F049 2 ignoring errors 3 stopping the motor
140. 1 1 L700 220H C3 1 2 5 L700 300L C3 5 2 5 L700 300H C3 1 2 5 L700 370L C3 5 2 5 L700 370H C3 1 2 5 L700 450L C3 5 2 5 L700 450H C3 1 2 5 L700 550L C3 20 3 L700 550H C3 5 2 5 L700 750L C3 20 3 L700 750H C3 5 2 5 L700 900H C3 10 2 5 L700 110H C3 10 2 5 L700 1320H C3 10 2 5 L700 1600H C3 10 2 5 Table 1 V Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety Instructions Precautions Concerning Compliance with UL and cUL Standards Standards to be met UL508C and CSA C22 2 No 14 05 These devices are open type and or Enclosed Type 1 when employing accessory Type 1 Chassis Kit AC Inverters with three phase input and three phase output They are intended to be used in an enclosure They are used to provide both an adjustable voltage and adjustable frequency to the ac motor The inverter automatically maintains the required volts Hz ration allowing the capability through the motor speed range 1 Use 60 75 C CU wire only or equivalent For models L700 series except for L700 110H and L700 150H 2 Use 75C CU wire only or equivalent For models L700 110H and L700 150H 3 Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 k rms symmetrical amperes 240 V maximum For models with suffix L 4 Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 k rms symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum For models with suffix H 5 Install device in pollutio
141. 1 3 Exterior Views and Names of Parts The figure below shows an exterior view of the inverter model L700 185LFF HFF to L700 300LFF HFF Front cover POWER os L ALARM lamp Digital operator Spacer cover Terminal block cover gt Specification label Exterior view of shipped inverter For the wiring of the main circuit and control circuit terminals open the terminal block cover For mounting optional circuit boards open the front cover Position to mount optional board 1 Position to mount optional board 2 Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals Backing plate Exterior view of inverter with front and terminal block covers removed 1 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Ee Sees This chapter describes how to install the inverter and the wiring of main circuit and control signal terminals with typical examples of wiring 2 1 Installation eeececccuccccccccccccucucuacecccecccucuscucuaucceccacaes 2 1 2 2 Wiring T TTTETTTTTTTTTTTTTITETTITETTTETTITTTIITTETETETEIEETEITTTTTTT 2 4 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 Installation J N CAUTION Install the inverter on a non flammable surface e g metal Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not place flammable materials near the
142. 1 to C008 08 and A094 01 or A295 and A296 38 One of C001 to C008 11 b088 F302 F303 A303 A304 A320 A342 A343 A392 A393 39 One of C001 to C008 17 b312 b313 and H306 C102 C101 C040 and C041 C040 and C111 C042 and C043 C055 to C058 C063 NIN wo ard AJAJAJAJAIATA Dla BR co ro gt c oO 47 One of C021 to C008 24 or 25 C045 and C046 48 One of C021 to C008 33 C142 to C144 4 49 54 9 C145 to C147 C148 to C150 C151 to C153 C154 to C156 C157 to C159 54 C064 2 User setting display mode The monitor displays only the codes and items that are arbitrarily assigned to user parameters U001 to U012 except codes d001 F001 and b037 oo 3 Data comparison display mode The monitor displays only the parameters that have been changed from the factory settings except all monitoring indications d and code F001 Note that the settings of input span calibration and input zero calibration C081 to C083 and C121 to C123 and thermistor input tuning C085 are not always displayed 4 80 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 Basic display mode The monitor displays basic parameters The monitor display is the factory setting The following table lists the parameters that can be displayed in basic display mode A003 Base frequency setting O gt 2 o A0
143. 1 to C123 A001 10 A002 01 03 04 or 05 A017 01 A041 01 A044 00 or 01 A044 03 04 or 05 A044 04 A 03 04 or 05 and H002 00 A 03 04 or 05 and H002 01 or 02 A044 and or A244 02 A051 01 or 02 A051 01 or 02 d004 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A072 to A078 A101 A071 01 or 02 A102 A111 to A114 C044 C052 C053 C081 to C083 and C121 to C123 A076 10 A094 01 or 02 A097 01 02 03 or 04 A098 01 02 03 or 04 b013 b213 and or b313 02 b021 01 02 or 03 b024 01 02 or 03 b050 01 b095 01 or 02 b098 01 or 02 b120 01 Oo ine A 15 oO 6 8 9 26 26 4 79 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions No Parameter displayed when the display condition is met 27 A028 to A035 8 A038 and A039 9 A053 to A055 and A059 F202 F203 A203 A204 A220 A244 A246 A247 A261 30 One of C001 to C008 08 A262 A292 A293 A294 b212 B213 H203 H204 and H206 One of C001 to C008 08 and A041 01 A246 and A247 32 nig of C001 to C008 08 and A244 00 or A241 A242 and A243 33 ie of C001 to C008 08 and A244 03 or H202 H205 H250 H251 and H252 34 One of C001 to C008 08 and A244 04 H260 and H261 One of C001 to C008 08 A244 03 or 04 I ere mee H220 to H224 One of C001 to C008 08 A244 03 or 04 36 and H202 01 or 02 este Hest 37 i of C00
144. 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o g Easy sequence user parameter U BI g P124 oy 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o no gt amp P125 D Sequence User parameter y 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o 0 P126 ea sequence user parameter U to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P127 By Sequence user parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P128 oa Sequence user parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P129 pa Sequence user parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P130 E sequence user parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o 0 P131 an Sequence userparameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o 0 Setting Change i Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed or not or not U001 User selected function 1 no d001 to P131 no O O U002 User selected function 2 no d001 to P131 no O O U003 User selected function 3 no d001 to P131 no e O a U004 User selected function 4 no d001 to P131 no O O g U005 User selected function 5 no d001 to P131 no O O 5 U006 User selected function 6 no d001 to P131 no O O Ee Z U007 User selected function 7 no d001 to P131 no O O 2 U008 User selected function 8 no d001 to P131 no O O U009 User selected function 9 no d001 to P131 no O O U010 User selected function 10 no d001 to P131 no O O U011 Us
145. 101 7 x s Qa e EF a F 7 y 00 tripping 01 tripping after decelerating and stopping the motor P048 M action on DeviceNet idle 02 ignoring errors 03 stopping the motor after free running 01 x x 04 decelerating and stopping the motor Poag DeviceNet motor poles setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 poles o x x PO55 Pulse string frequency scale 1 0 to 50 0 KHz 25 0 x Oo Time constant of pulse string P056 frequency filter 0 01 to 2 00 s 0 10 x O 4 66 P057 Pulse string frequency bias 100 to 100 0 O P058 Pulse string frequency limit 0 to 100 100 O P100 TA pee hater 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P101 Te ee User Parameter 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P102 ee Nort Petar 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 0 O P103 io Sr RAAS 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O O P104 nen peek Pate 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O O P105 i ues user tas baal 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o S P106 Oe Sar Paramerer 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o i va P107 Gop aa asta cts 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O O S 4 97 o g P108 ro Rg User parameler 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O O N gt g P109 TO PAPALAR 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O O P110 Ua VR UserParamerer 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P111 Tone V
146. 12 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings petal Sore Renae Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page _FF_ allowed allowed or not or not A041 Torque boost method selection 00 manual torque boost 01 automatic torque boost 00 x x A241 bad boost method selection 00 manual torque boost 01 automatic torque boost 00 x x nd motor A042 Manual torque boost value 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 oO O A242 Manual torque boost value 2nd motor 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 Oo O A342 Manual torque boost value 3rd motor 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 O O 4 18 aoga M n boost frequency 0 0 to 50 0 50 o o A243 Sasi ea e 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 o o g A343 Si ERA e 0 0 to 50 0 50 o o 3 A044 V F characteristic curve selection 00 VC 01 VP 02 free V f 03 sensorless vector control 00 x 5 1st motor 04 OHz range sensorless vector 05 vector with sensor 5 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 00 VC 01 VP 02 free V f 03 sensorless vector control 00 As x 4 16 gt 2nd motor 04 OHz range sensorless vector A344 y ig eristic curve selection 00 VC 01 VP 00 y S A045 V f gain setting 20 to 100 100 4 15 a 10 A246 utomatc torque boost 2nd motor
147. 2 89 Optimum accel decal operation function A044 A085 b021 D022 sr tsrrrrrtttereettteeeees 4 83 4 2 90 Deceleration and stopping at power failure nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure b050 to D054 srestsesetseseteeseteeteee essen teneeseesnseeeetenseeeesetenseseeseesenenseteesetonas 4 84 4 2 91 Offline auto tuning function H001 to H004 H030 to H034 A003 A051 A082 4 86 4 2 92 Online auto tuning function PO PCLELR TELLER PLETE CRC PTE Pee CELE RLM TEEPE CCCEP CCRC CLE T Ter CE TCR eer A ATTE 4 Ey 88 4 2 93 Secondary resistance compensation temperature compensation function P025 b098 a a A A A A A A a a a a T A a I T 4 89 4 2 94 Motor constants selection E E a a T E r a ETE 4 a 89 4 2 95 Sensorless vector control A001 A044 F001 b040 to b044 H002 to H005 H020 to H024 H050 to H052 E r a E T A A E E E S 4 91 4 2 96 Torque monitoring function A044 C027 to C029 H003 HOO4 rrrrrreterretetttteetttteteees 4 92 4 2 97 Forcing function FOC A044 C001 to C008 doaaduutascvavascesdsustcnddasevseuuteassdvendvaucedencvanee 4 92 4 2 98 Torque limitation function A044 b040 to b044 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 4 93 4 2 99 Reverse Run protection function A044 D046 verstseeteseseteeteteeeeteeteeteteeeeteeteeeeeetenteennees 4 94 4 2 100 Torque LAD stop function A044 6040 to b045 veseretrtsessteetetetsetetteteteteetetenteeeetenentees 4 95 4 2 101 Easy sequence function A017 P100 to P131 s eretsesstseteseesete
148. 3 Analog input mode In this mode a torque limit value is set by a voltage applied to the control circuit terminal O2 The voltage range 0 to 10 V corresponds to the torque limit value range 0 to 200 A single selected torque limit is valid in all operating states of the inverter 4 Option option 1 2 mode This mode is valid when the option board SJ DG is used For details on this mode refer to the instruction manual for the option board If function 40 TL whether to enable torque limitation has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal the torque limitation mode selected by the setting of b040 is enabled only when the TL terminal is turned on When the TL terminal is off torque limit settings are invalid and the maximum torque setting is applied as a torque limit If the TL function has not been assigned to any intelligent input terminal the torque limitation mode selected by the setting of b040 is always enabled Each torque limit value used for this function is expressed as a ratio of the maximum torque generated when the inverter outputs its maximum current on the assumption that the maximum torque is 200 Note that each torque limit value does not represent an absolute value of torque The actual output torque varies depending on the motor If the torque limited TRQ signal function is assigned to an intelligent output terminal the TRQ signal will turn on when the torque limitation function operates Data or range of data
149. 3 Communication trip limit time C077 communication wait time C078 i reception timeout occurs the inverter will operate according to the setting of the operation selection after communication error CO76 1 Query frame that is sent from the external control system to the inverter 2 Response frame that is sent from the inverter to the external control system 3 Communication trip limit time C077 If the inverter cannot complete the reception of a query from the master system external control system within the communication trip limit time after having sent a response to the preceding query the inverter enters the status in which to receive the query from the beginning Subsequently the inverter returns no response to the master system After reception timeout occurs the inverter operates according to the setting of the selection of operation after communication error C076 For details see the table below Monitoring of reception timeout begins when the first communication is performed after the inverter power has been turned on or the inverter has been reset Reception timeout is monitored only when the inverter communicates with the master system The inverter trips E41 after reception timeout The inverter decelerates and stops the or Tripping after motor and then trips E41 after reception stopping the motor timieo t The inverter ignores the error without tripping Selection of operation C076 02 Ign
150. 30 01 Overvoltage suppression Overvoltage suppression integral time integral time pies 9 10 69933 setting valid when b130 01 Example 1 When b130 is 01 Example 2 When b130 is 02 Voltage of the main circuit DC section V Overvoltage suppression level b131 J Voltage of the main circuit DC section V Overvoltag suppression level b131 Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Time s Time s i Stop of i Start of deceleration Stop of decelerate deceleration Restart of deceleration Time s Acceleration according j6 the setting of b132 Time s Note 1 When this function is enabled the actual acceleration time may be prolonged over the set time Note particularly that the motor may not be decelerated if the setting of b131 is too small when 02 is specified for the overvoltage suppression enable b130 Note 2 This overcurrent restraint function does not maintain the DC voltage at a constant level Therefore inverter trips due to overvoltage may be caused by the setting of the deceleration rate or by a specific load condition Note 3 When this function is enabled the inverter may requires a long time to decelerate and stop the motor if the load on the motor or the moment of inertia on the motor is under a specific condition Note 4 If a voltage lower than the input voltage is specified for b131 the motor cannot be stopped Note 5 W
151. 4 10 Updating data 2 upper digit 93 11 Updating data 2 lower digit EO 12 CRC 16 code upper digit 9E 13 CRC 16 code lower digit 9F 1_If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return any response 2 Note that the starting register address is 1 less than the actual address of the register to which the data is to be written first 3 As the number of bytes do not specify the number of registers but the number of bytes to be actually updated If the function to write data to multiple registers cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response viii Exception response The master system requests the inverter slave to return a response upon reception of a query other than broadcasted queries The inverter must return the response that matches the query it has received However if an error is found in a query the inverter will return an exception response The exception response consists of the following fields Field configuration Slave address Exception code CRC 16 code Details of the field configuration are described below The exception response in reply to a query includes a function code that is the sum of 80h and the function code specified by the query The exception code in the exception response indicates the content of the error Function codes Exception codes An unsupported function is specified 2h The specified address is
152. 438h Maximum PID feedback data Co52 RW Oto 1000 0 1 1439h_ Minimum PID feedback data C053 RW Oto 1000 0 1 143Ah_ Reserved R W 143Bh eee forward driving level C055 iw fo to 150 143Ch Over torque reverse regenerating C056 Raw fo to 150 level setting 143Dh aaa reverse driving level C057 Raw fo to 150 443Eh Over torque forward regenerating C058 iw fo to 150 1 level setting 143Fh_ Reserved 1440h_ Reserved 44th Electronic thermal warning level Cost iw fo to 100 setting 1442h Alarm code output C062 R W _ 0 disabling alarm output 1 3 bits 2 4 bits 1443h Zero speed detection level C063 R W_ 0 to 10000 0 01 Hz 1444h Heat sink overheat warning level C064 0 to 200 THEM Reserved oo o eese OOOO TAA 2 loopback test 3 2 400 bps 4 4 800 bps 5 2 7 144Bh Communication speed selection C071 rw Aor bps 6 19 200 bps 144Ch Node allocation C072 1 to 32 ea ye 2 144Dh COMmunication data length C073 iw 7 7 bits 8 8 bits selection 00 no parity 01 even parity 02 odd parity 144Fh C075 R W 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 0 tripping 1 tripping after decelerating and Selection of the operation after stopping the motor 2 ignoring errors 3 communication error stopping the motor after free running 4 decelerating and stopping the motor 1451h C077 R W 01 sec 1452h C078 msec 1453h C079 W_ O ASCII 1 Modbus RTU 1454h 1455h
153. 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Free V f characteristic setting The free V f characteristic setting function allows you to set an arbitrary V f characteristic by specifying the voltages and frequencies b100 to b113 for the seven points on the V f characteristic curve The free V f frequencies 1 to 7 set by this function must always be in the collating sequence of 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4 lt s5 lt 6 lt 7 Since all free V f frequencies are set to 0 Hz as default factory setting specify their arbitrary values begin setting with free setting V f frequency 7 The inverter cannot operate with the free V f characteristic in the factory setting Enabling the free V f characteristic setting function disables the torque boost selection A041 A241 base frequency setting A003 A203 A303 and maximum frequency setting A004 A204 A304 The inverter assumes the value of free setting V f frequency 7 as the maximum frequency 0 to 400 Hz Setting of the output frequency at each breakpoint of the V f characteristic curve Setting of the output voltage at each breakpoint of the V f characteristic curve 1 0 0 to 800 0 V Example Output voltage V V7 o f f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 Output frequency Hz 1 Even if 800 V is set as a free setting V f voltage 1 to 7 the inverter output voltage cannot exceed the inverter input voltage or that specified by the AVR
154. 5 Terminal 5 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O 4 48 C016 Terminal 6 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x Q C017 Terminal 7 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C018 Terminal 8 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C019 Terminal FW active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O 2 When the emergency stop function is enabled SW1 ON 18 RS and 64 EMR are forcibly written to parameters C001 and C003 respectively You cannot arbitrarily write 64 to C001 If the SW1 signal is turned off and then turned on no no assignment is set in parameter C003 8 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed allowed SFF or not or not Default RUN running 01 FA1 constant speed reached FA2 set frequency overreached OL overload notice advance signal 1 01 x o OD output deviation for PID control 05 AL alarm signal FA3 set frequency reached 07 OTQ over torque IP instantaneous power failure 09 UV undervoltage TRQ torque limited 11 RNT operation time over ONT plug in time over 13 THM thermal alarm signal ZS 0 Hz detection signal 24 FA4 set frequency overreached 2 FA5 set frequency reached 2 OL2 overload notice advance signal 2 Odc Analog O dis
155. 6 _ M03 General output 6 Easy sequence function 47 M04 General output 4 48 MO5 General output 5 49 MO6 General output 6 50 __ IRDY Inverter ready Inverter ready signal 4 72 51 FWR Forward rotation Forward rotation signal 4 72 52 RVR Reverse rotation Reverse rotation signal 4 73 4 62 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 54 WCO Window comparators function 4 74 4 2 59 Intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection The intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection function C031 to ean to 15 active state allows you to specify a contact or b contact output for each of C036 Alarm relay active state the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 and the alarm relay terminal The intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 are used for open collector output and the alarm relay terminal is used for relay output Item Function code Data Description ae o acontact NO 1 pees pees b contact NC o acontact NO Al l Za Sai b contact NC An a contact turns on the output signal when closed and turns it off when opened A b contact turns on the output signal when opened and turns it off when closed 1 Specifications of intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 Intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 have the following specifications erat inverter Settin
156. 62 2 1 Hysteresis width of window 1341h b062 0 to 10 lower limit b061 b062 2 1 M level of 1342h Soe ool of window b063 0 to 100 lower limit b064 b066 2 1 Minimum limit level of window 1343h b064 0 to 100 lower limit b063 b066 2 1 2 Hyst idth of wind 1344h Beier Ol ok window b065 0 to 10 lower limit b063 b064 2 1 M level of 7 1345h Sa AH of window b066 100 to 100 lower limit b067 b068 2 Minimum limit level of window 1346h comparators 0 01 02 b067 100 to 100 lower limit b066 b068 2 1 Hysteresis width of window 1347h a 0 01 02 b068 0 to 10 lower limit b066 b067 2 1348h_ Reserved J inaccessibe o i So 100 to 100 or no ignore 1 ogee A ee reen amne marr oeo a oeaan O 4 135 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions re 1354h __ Reserved a 1355h Start frequency adjustment b082 10 to 999 1356h Carrier frequency setting b083 5to 120 5 to 80 90 to 160kW Initialization mode parameters 0 clearing the trip history 1 initializing the data 2 1857h or trip histor b084 R W I clearing the trip history and initializing the data 1358h Country code for initialization b085 R W_ 0 Japan 1 EU 2 Tai Zz e D a Fon oO Za 95 pad N 2 Ol a 2 gt
157. 7 2 120 160 Ratio to the rated current of inverter Base frequency b Constant torque characteristic Make this setting when driving a constant torque motor with the inverter Example Setting on the L700 185LFF rated current 73A When b012 is 73 A and output frequency is 2 5 Hz Reduction Trip time s scale Xid X0 9 denny X0 8 Wo 60 0 5 Age f Inverter output i 025 5 60 frequency Hz dr aes gees Motor current A 6 Ratio to the rated 98 1 108 135 X J139 current of inverter c Free setting of electronic thermal characteristic To protect the motor against overheating you can set the electronic thermal characteristic freely according to the load on the motor The range of setting is shown in the figures below Range of data Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 2 Pa a 3 b016 b018 0 0 A Disabling the electronic thermal protection b020 0 1 to rated current A Setting of the current at each breakpoint 0 to 400 Hz Setting of frequency at each breakpoint Free setting electronic thermal current 1 2 3 4 38 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Output current A b020 ange of nore setting b016 Inverter output 0 5 40 frequency Hz 0 bot b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Example When the output frequency is equal Maximum frequency Hz to t
158. 8 0 kHz gt Carrier frequency setting b083 NOTE lt gt applied for 90 to 160kW Reduce the setting to stabilize the motor 4 2 88 Selection of operation at option board error You can select how the inverter operates when an error results from a built in option board between two modes In one mode the inverter trips In the other mode the inverter ignores the error and continues the operation When you use the feedback option board SJ FB as option board 1 specify 01 for P001 When you use the SU FB as option board 2 specify 01 for P002 ltem Functioncode Data Description Operation mode on 00 TRP Alarm output Related code P001 Operation mode on expansion card 1 error P002 Operation mode on expansion card 2 error expansion card 1 and 2 P001 P002 RUN Continuation of operation errors 4 82 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 89 Optimum accel decel operation function The optimum accel decel operation function eliminates the need for acceleration time and deceleration time settings for the motor operation by the inverter Conventional inverters required you to adjust the acceleration and deceleration time according to the status of the load Based on fuzzy logic this function automatically adjusts the acceleration and deceleration time to minimize the inverter performance This fun
159. 8 Program number monitoring easy sequence function Related code When the program number monitoring function d024 is selected the d024 Program number monitoring inverter displays the program number of the downloaded easy sequence program Note that you must describe a program number in the program you create For details refer to the Programming Software EzSQ manual Related code d025 user monitor 0 d026 user monitor 1 d027 user monitor 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 19 User Monitors 0 to 2 easy sequence function The user monitor function allows you to monitor the results of operations in an easy sequence program For details refer to the Programming Software EzSQ Instruction Manual Related code 4 1 20 Pulse counter monitor d028 Pulse counter monitor Pulse counter monitor allows you to monitor the accumulated pulse of intelligent input terminals pulse counter 74 PCNT 4 1 21 Trip Counter Related code When the trip counter function d080 is selected the inverter displays the 4080 Trip Counter number of times the inverter has tripped Display 0 to 9999 in units of 1 trip 1000 to 6553 in units of 10 trips Related code d081 Trip monitoring 1 d082 Trip monitoring 2 d083 Trip monitoring 3 d084 Trip monitoring 4 d085 Trip monitoring 5 d086 Trip monitoring 6 4 1 22 Trip moni
160. 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 8 Torque monitoring Related code When the torque monitoring function d012 is selected the inverter d012 Torque monitoring l displays the estimated value of the torque output from the inverter AOE characteristie curve selecteign The monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the estimated output torque Display 300 to 300 in steps of 1 Note This monitoring function is effective only when you have selected the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor as the control mode Displayed value is not accurate when the other control method is selected 4 1 9 Output voltage monitoring Related code When the output voltage monitoring function d013 is selected the d013 Output voltage monitoring inverter displays the voltage output from the inverter The V monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the output voltage Display 0 0 to 600 0 in steps of 0 1 V remark Displayed value may not be accurate when the output voltage is differ from input voltage 4 1 10 Power monitoring R elated code When the power monitoring function d014 is selected the inverter d014 Power monitoring displays the electric power momentary value input to the inverter The kW monitor lamps V and A lamps light up while the inverter is displaying the input power
161. 9 6 87 6 109 5 Motor current A o 168 T92 240 Motor current A O 109 X150 150 Ratio to the rated 105 120 150 Ratio to the rated current of inverter current of inverter 2 Electronic thermal characteristic The frequency characteristic set as the electronic thermal characteristic is integrated with the value of b012 b212 or b312 The cooling fan performance of a general purpose motor lowers when the motor speed is low So load current is decreased The reduced torque characteristic is designed to match the heat generation by Hitachi s general purpose motors 00 Reduced torque characteristic Seer one inermal b013 b213 b313 Constant torque characteristic characteristic a Free setting of electronic thermal characteristic 4 37 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions a Reduced torque characteristic The time limit characteristic determined by the value of b012 0212 or b312 is integrated with each frequency multiplied by reduction scales Example Setting on the L700 185LFF rated current 73 A When b012 is 64 A the base frequency is 60 Hz and output frequency is 20 Hz Reduction Trip time s scale Trip time s Motor current A Ratio to the rated current of inverter 60 h 0 5 eee i i Inverter output a 0 5 16 50 frequency Hz 0 63 7 70 1 876 Motor current A 0 6 20 60 8
162. 99 10 00 to 65 53 s 0 060 Note lt gt indicate the setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Default Setting Change during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed allowed FF or not or not 01 RV Reverse RUN 02 CF1 Multispeed 1 setting 18 C001 Terminal 1 function 2 03 CF2 Multispeed 2 setting 04 CF3 Multispeed 3 setting 9 x O 05 CF4 Multispeed 4 setting 06 JG Jogging C2 07 DB external DC braking ME ec na SET Set 2nd motor data 09 2CH 2 stage acceleration deceleration C002 erminal 2 function 1 FRS free run stop 12 EXT external trip 16 x O i5 USP unattended start protection 14 CS commercial power source enable 15 SFT software lock 16 AT analog input voltage current select RETS 3rd motor control 18 RS reset 03 C003 Terminal 3 function 2 20 STA starting by 3 wire input 21 STP stopping by 3 wire input C2 x O 22 F R forward reverse switching by 3 wire input 23 PID PID disable 24 PIDC PID reset 26 CAS control gain setting 27 UP remote control UP function C004 Terminal 4 function 28 DWN remote co
163. AC reactor between the inverter and motor to lessen the pulsation of motor Also connect this AC reactor between the inverter and motor when the cable length between them is long 10 m or more to prevent thermal relay malfunction due to the harmonic waves that are generated by the switching operation on the inverter Note that the thermal relay can be replaced with a current sensor to avoid the malfunction 2 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 4 Recommended cable gauges wiring accessories and crimp terminals Note For compliance with CE and UL standards see the safety precautions concerning EMC and the compliance with UL and cUL standards under Safety Instructions The table below lists the specifications of cables crimp terminals and terminal screw tightening torques for reference amput Pteaeveomaecrrs Senay seo 2208 rapa Come ated aaa kW T U V W P PD RB mm screw ORS contactor and N MC 11 L700 110LFF 14 14 14 M5 R14 5 2 4 MAX4 0 RX100 75A HK50 15 L700 150LFF 22 22 14 me 22 6 4 0 MAX4 4 RX100 100A H65 18 5 L700 185LFF 30 22 22 M6 38 6 4 5 MAX4 9 RX100 100A H80 g 22 L700 220LFF 38 30 22 me 38 6 4 5 MAX4 9 RX225B 150A H100 oO S 30 L700 300LFF 60 22x 2 30
164. ECCEC TP er ECR CET ert TerreR er eee eee rer cre 6 us 1 6 1 1 Daily INSPECTION Ma 6 1 6 1 2 Cleaning TP ETLELT EEE EEO A O ree CCEE Tre rrr eTe rele ree eee eee r er eeeCeeCerre ire ree rceC reer errr etree er rere rer ror rre 6 1 6 1 lt 3 Periodic inspection CEC TETPTEEPCEE CCE TEE ECECEE TEE PELEP TEPC PLETE eLE eC Cr TEP CE eLETR CEC CECE CRTC rere rien Cre rrr 6 1 6 2 Daily and Periodic Inspections E Weuice bev E Sele usinu a E tiie ceccutuebeeCusueteewesteaeueeceeeeeuuee sees 6 2 6 3 Replacing I oY U1 Rca eo 6 3 6 4 Ground Resistance Test with a Megger eater cee 6 3 6 5 Withstand Voltage Test Gubisls Seige eee Wciue Souci cijecbisle Se subbeG E a E T N a E E 6 x 4 6 6 Method of Checking the Inverter and Converter Circuits E T E N E E A E E E 6 4 6 7 DC Bus Capacitor Life Curve se cide Sees ta cut bees Case A cue ieevees See teusetees Gu auteuesuCreesviesneravudessetcuasteusstseutues 6 A 5 6 8 Output of Life Warning eeeeeeeeeetererererertetersrstsrsreeesesesteteteteutsuneenenenenenteteneneunenenenenunnunenneneerennnnent 6 5 6 9 Methods of Measuring the Input Output Voltages Current and Power sssssesseeresssreressreesseeee 6 6 Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Specifications E a ERE Pe a er ELEC TereLEPreer Per eerere rere ere re ee rCe CCl er rere rreerrerr reece a Cee o rer 7 1 7 2 External dimensions SPIER ETRE T TEE CRITTER CELE EPEC PCE Eee EEEE PEE M EE EE E rCL Cee ree TEE Ce Pelee EEE rier r rere Terr re Ceo tr 7 4 Chapter 8 List of Da
165. ELELELELELETELELLLLELELELELELELELELE 2e 6 2 2 1 Terminal connection diagram and explanation of terminals and switch settings 2 7 2 2 2 Wiring of the main circuit Peer eee Cee ree eer errr ere eer errr reer errr er errr tree rere reer eter reer e teeter eter eerie 2 11 2 2 3 Wiring of the control circuit eee eee reer ere ee ere ere eee reer er eee rere reer ere er er eter eee tree e ere ere titre 2 20 2 2 4 Wiring of the digital operator Pere eee eter errr errr eer errr ere ere eer errr etree terete rete rere treet etree rer rte t er 2 21 2 2 5 Selection and wiring of regenerative braking resistor on 11 kW to 30 kW models 2 22 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 3 2 ao 3 Operating Methods A 3 1 How To Operate the Digital Operator a A cudsestararducwaadaadaaveacaes 3 4 3 2 1 Names and functions of COMpONEN S eee 3 4 3 2 2 Code display system and key operations veteeeeetettstrttetrettstereetertererrtterentetenneretentenennnt 3 5 How To Make a Test Run ctreteretetetetereseseseseenensneneneanaeanaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeauaeaeaeaesauauanauauauauauanauanauananansaeges 3 11 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions A Monitor Mode crreteteteteteeeeseseseeeseeneeenenenananananananananananauaeauaananauanauauauauanauauanauanauanenauauanauanausueaeaenenenes 4 1 4 1 Output frequency monitoring d001 IETITITITITTTTTT TTT Tir ririritiiiitititit itt rie te eit te 4 a 1 4 1 2 Output current monitoring d002 OER e PETE eee eee eee eee ere eee eee eee eee eee eee e
166. F HFF 5 Cable hole 25 PX PX P P RR 00000 g ao L700 450 550 LFF HFF 750 HFF 2 612 pce Rs f rN e 0008 ee il oS ol jo O O e A 2 12 3 OC 3 90 l 5 Cable hole 041 ANANA Cl Ri J JJ me opoopo i L IL iL IL IL IL f L JL JL JL JL JL J I JL JL I JL i pa 7 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications L700 750 LFF i 6 Cable hole 041 A A A A A C fi J Mtl J UK J Q Z Z AZ AZ V 7 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications L700 900 to 1100HFF ine O ja D i 70 7 00
167. G MEEA EA E E ET A 1 counterrotation prevention seses 4 92 CS E EE E E aiiivs 4 54 cumulative power MONnItOrINg ssec 4 3 cumulative power on time monitoring 4 4 4 66 Cumulative running time 0 00 eee ee eeeeeeeeeneeeees 4 3 2CH AA EA han at arn eee 4 30 D data comparison display esceeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 80 B ELP ete eter ct orien ce Seta 4 20 Index 1 DG braking EEPE EE E ETE 4 20 DC voltage monitoring seseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 5 deceleration 2 time setting eee 4 30 deceleration and stopping at power e A e EEFE EE E E EEES 4 84 deceleration curve constant 4 31 deceleration overvoltage restraint 4 42 deceleration time deratihg ea e a aa tae eden nas detection of terminal disconnection 4 74 digital Operator 2 21 3 4 display of trip MOnItOrINg ssec 4 5 5 8 DWN a iets eet aoe nt 4 57 easy SCGUENCES 2 ccsieiii rinie 4 5 4 96 electronic thermal eseeeeeesseeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees 4 37 electronic thermal overload monitoring 4 6 electronic thermal warning level setting 4 39 EMG crunn ia e ee safety instructions emergency SLOP eess ci cceh sei es lee leccdechevascendcnaeneeeute 4 148 EMR aaea ae a tet ete 4 148 end FrEQUENCY cesecceeeesceeteseeeeeseeesetetseeeetees 4 14 end frequency rate 00 eeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees 4 15 energy Saver Operation 4 32 excessive SPCC eeceeeeseceecesseceee
168. H terminal 1 switching by setting a 1279h _ Acc1 to Acc2 frequency A095 high RW Joto 40000 0 01 Hz transition point A095 low 127Bh _ Dec1 to Dec2 frequency A096 high RW to 40000 0 01 Hz 127Ch___ transition point A096 low Acceleration curve 0 linear 1 S curve 2 U curve 3 inverted U aa 1270h moor RW foure a ES cure 0 linear 1 S curve 2 U curve 3 inverted U ea c a 127Fh __ Reserved Inaccessible i ooo i 1280h __ Reserved Inaccessible o i Sooo i i 1281h _ Ol L input active range A101 high 1282h _ start frequency A101 low R w_ t 40000 0 01 Hz 1283h __ OI L input active range A102 high RW fo to 40000 0 01 Hz 1284h Jend frequency A102 low i Ol L input active range ONTT g 1285h start currant A103 R W _ 0 to Ol L input active range end current 1 1286h lon lay active range A104 OI L input active range start current to 100 1 1287h ON IL input start A105 R w 0 external start frequency 1 0 Hz o frequency enable 128Dh _ O2 L input active range A111 high Rw 128Eh ATH low foe een peli 128Fh _ O2 L input active range A112 high i 1290h end frequency A112 low 40000 1040000 0 01 Hz O2 L input active range i ALII a 1291h A113 R W _ 100 to O2 L input active range end voltage 1 1292h Erde active range A114 O2 L input active range start voltage to 100 1 Lari Res
169. HITACHI INVERTER L700 SERIES INSTRUCTION MANUAL Read through this Instruction Manual and keep it handy for future reference NT221X HITACHI Phone 8 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi L700 Series Inverter This Instruction Manual describes how to handle and maintain the Hitachi L700 Series Inverter Read this Instruction Manual carefully before using the inverter and then keep it handy for those who operate maintain and inspect the inverter Before and during the installation operation inspection and maintenance of the inverter always refer to this Instruction Manual to obtain the necessary related knowledge and ensure you understand and follow all safety information precautions and operating and handling instructions for the correct use of the inverter Always use the inverter strictly within the range of the specifications described in this Instruction Manual and correctly implement maintenance and inspections to prevent faults occurring When using the inverter together with optional products also read the manuals for those products Note that this Instruction Manual and the manual for each optional product to be used should be delivered to the end user of the inverter Handling of this Instruction Manual The contents of this Instruction Manual are subject to change without prior notice Even if you lose this In
170. ING 0 eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 4 3 PPI rr eee tein del ee ay 4 59 process variable PV PID feedback Monitoring aiee eeaeee e 4 1 4 29 Program COUMEN nuiis sidi aitain in iaria 4 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com program number monitoring ceeeeeeeeeee 4 4 programming error Monitoring eee eee 4 5 programmable controller protective function pulse counter eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeteneeetees reduced torque characteristic electronic thermal eesseeeesteeeeeeneeeees 4 37 reduced torque characteristic VP 4 16 reduced voltage start eceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeees 4 43 remote Operation 4 57 t mote Operati yeiio a A 1 reSt nnt aat te an 2 9 3 4 4 9 4 55 restart with input frequency eee 4 33 4 36 retry after tripsen n 4 33 retry SCIOCTION cceseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeneeneeneees 4 33 reverse rotation Signal csceeee 4 62 4 73 reversibles a a oai 4 13 4 28 ANT oia e teaa ie ere 4 66 rotation direction MInitoring eeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 1 rotational direction restriction cece eeee 4 7 RS seit E E A ETET eaten 2 9 4 55 OIN ARAE AEE 3 4 4 3 4 62 running time over power on time over 4 62 4 66 run command source Setting 4 8 r nning signal aein e aara E a E 4 64 PAM AEE AE T E A EE 4 47 RVR 4 tnd anand 4 62 4 73 scaled output frequency monitoring
171. Monitor display 2 F001 Output frequency setting 3 F002 Acceleration 1 time setting 4 F003 Deceleration 1 time setting 5 F004 Operation direction setting 6 A001 Frequency source setting 7 A002 Run command source setting 8 A003 Base frequency setting 9 A004 Maximum frequency setting 10 A005 AT selection 11 A020 Multispeed frequency setting 12 A021 Multispeed 1 setting 13 A022 Multispeed 2 setting 14 A023 Multispeed 3 setting 15 A044 1st control method 16 A045 V f gain setting 17 A085 Operation mode selection 18 b001 Selection of restart mode 19 b002 Allowable under voltage power failure time 20 b008 Retry after trip selection 21 b011 Retry wait time after trip 22 b037 Function code display restriction 23 b083 Carrier frequency setting 24 b084 Initialization mode selection Selection of overvol ression 25 b130 ee of overvoltage suppressio 26 b131 Setting of overvoltage suppression level 27 C021 Setting of intelligent output terminal 11 28 C022 Setting of intelligent output terminal 12 29 C036 Alarm relay active state 3 6 Note If a desired parameter is not displayed check the setting of function b037 function code display restriction To display all parameters specify 00 for b037 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation Key operation and transition of the Key operation and
172. Motor speed constant 1st 2nd 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 HO50 H250 0 0 to 999 9 1000 H051 H251 0 0 to 999 9 1000 9 OOo O 9 Po P proportional gain H052 H252 0 01 to 10 00 PO Terminal selection PI proportional Terminal selection P proportional Gain switching time H073 0 to 9999 ms Taper time at gain switching 4 59 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 55 P PI switching function PPI The P PI switching function allows you to switch the control compensation mode of the speed control system between the proportional integrated compensation and proportional compensation modes when the V F characteristic curve selection is the sensorless vector control To use this function assign function 43 PPI P PI mode selection to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the PPI terminal is turned off the proportional integrated compensation mode is selected When the PPI terminal is turned on the proportional compensation mode is selected If function 43 PPI P PI mode selection is not assigned to any intelligent input terminal the proportional integrated compensation mode is selected Data or range of data V F characteristic curve Sensorless vector control not available selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors A044 A244 for A344 Terminal function C001 to C008 PPI P PI mode selection Motor speed constant 1st 2
173. O L input active range end A012 high 20ER ROT qom PW ote 40000 001 Hz O L input active range OLT 120Fh A013 R W 0 to O L input active range end voltage ee active range end O L input active range start voltage to 100 O L input active range 1211h start frequency selection A015 R W 0 external start frequency 1 0 Hz 1212h a frequency filter time A946 aw hi to 30 or 31 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz with hysteresis Easy sequence function i 12an nor aw ocasabing 1 enabing al al 1214n_ Reserved S CRW Multispeed operation 1216h Multispeed frequency setting A020 high RW Jo or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1217h A020 low 1218h A021 high F ar i 1219h Multispeed 1 setting A021 low raw or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 121Ah F A022 high A mA R 121Bh Multispeed 2 setting A022 low r Rw or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 121Ch A A023 high n TA a 121DA Multispeed 3 setting A023 low Rw start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 121Eh A024 high 3 S i 121Fh Multispeed 4 setting A024 low Rw or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1220h A025 high ied 7 1221h Multispeed 5 setting A025 low raw or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1222h A026 high area f n Multispeed 6 setting A026 low Pw or start frequency to maximum frequency
174. Operator Deviation 4 26 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 PID operation 1 P operation The proportional P operation stands for the operation in which the change in operation quantity is in proportion to the change in target value Change in steps Linear change UN A072 v Operation quantity Small 2 operation The integral 1 operation stands for the operation in which the operation quantity increases linearly over time Target value SS Small ee Small a a A073 A073 i NV Vv Operation quantity Large Large 3 D operation The derivative D operation stands for the operation in which the operation quantity changes in proportion to the rate of change in the target value Large i Large N A074 v Small The PI operation is a combination of the P operation 1 and operation 2 The PD operation is a combination of the P operation 1 and D operation 3 The PDI operation is a combination of the P operation 1 operation 2 and D operation 3 Operation quantity 3 PV source setting Select the terminal to be used for the feedback signal with the PV source setting function A076 The terminal to input the target value follows the frequency source setting A001 The terminal selected by the PV source setting A076 is excluded If the control circuit terminal block 01 has been specified for frequency
175. R fo f 149Eh Logical output signal 5 selection 1 C154 rw pane Toa to C026 except EA 149Fh Logical output signal 5 selection 2 C155 aoe EA CA to C026 except ih ee 14A0h Logical output signal 5 operator selection C156 R W_ 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR 0o o o 14A1h Logical output signal 6 selection 1 C157 rat N to C026 except o C158 R W Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 lt 14A2h _ Logical output signal 6 selection 2 14A3h _ Logical output signal 6 operator selection C159 R W _ 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR 14A4h Response time of intelligent input terminal 1 C160 RW fo to 200 14A5h Response time of intelligent inputterminal2 C161 R W Oto200 S S O 14A6h __ Response time o putterminai3 C162 RW 0to200 S S O 14A7h__ Response time o eminal4 C163 R W 0to200 S S O 14A8h __ Response time of i erminal5 C164 RW 0to200 S S 14A9h __ Response time o eminal6 C165 R W 0to200 S S O 14AAh _ Response time o eminaiz C166 RW 0to200 S S 14ABh _ Response time o putterminals C167 R W Oto200 S S O 14ACh creas ime of in put termina C168 Rw lo to 200 oo TEP een Ooo l pe D SS jo WS S Se ligen ligen 3 oO 5 ligent i ligen 3 lt j SS jo WS S rom ke IS ligen ligen 5 5 D ligent i 5 4 140 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 W
176. R reverse rotation 0049h Data writing in progress 004Ah 0048 riting in progress 0 Normal status Error detected 0 No error 2 Error detected 0 No error Error detected 0 No error Error detected 0 No error Error detected 0 No error 004Ch 004Dh 004Eh 004Fh 0050h 0051h WCO window comparator Ol 0052h WCO window comparator O2 ajo POLY WS J Re EN N ON 0 FF ON 0 FF ON 0 FF 1 Normally this coil is turned on when the corresponding intelligent input terminal on the control circuit terminal block is turned on or the coil itself is set to on In this regard the operation of the intelligent input terminal has priority over the operation of the coil If disconnection of the communication train has disabled the master system from turning off the coil turn the corresponding intelligent input terminal on the control circuit block on and off This operation turns off the coil 2 Communication error data is retained until an error reset command is input The data can be reset during the inverter operation 4 125 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions ii List of registers frequency settings and trip monitoring Register A Function ar TS Data Function name cod Monitoring and setting items r solution 0001h f F001 high 0 to 40000 valid
177. S cnb a ats 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O o P112 OAN P On RA ATRI 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O O P113 T a PAARIS 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O O P114 U a gh satis 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 0 O P115 T Ser cont 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o Note lt gt indicate the setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed or not or not P116 aa Seguence User parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o 0 P117 aa sequence user parameter U to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o Oo P118 a sequence User parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P119 Rae Sequence User parametet U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 O o P120 eae Sequence user parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P121 any Sequence user parameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P122 Pa Sequence userparameter U 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o e o P123 oe sequence user parameter 0 to 9999
178. See Note 13 code BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 13 When the read parameter is an selection item the Data part contains the code data corresponding to the selection The code data corresponding to H003 or H203 motor capacity selection is as follows Code data 00 J 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity 0 2 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 Code data J O S O 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity 5 5kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 pte OUI 22 j 23 24 235 2 Jo po odoo Motor capacity 90kW 110 132 150 160 For the value contained in the Data part when the read parameter is a numerical item see the list of function codes Example When the setting of the acceleration 1 time F002 is 30 00 seconds the Data part contains 3000 Negative response See ltem 2 ii of this section 4 108 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions viii 07 command This command writes data to a specified setting item in the inverter Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter Data Bcc CR Description Data size Setting
179. W12 OFF Slide lever 1 factory setting ON O zZ ON Logic board 2 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 2 Wiring of the main circuit 1 Wiring instructions Before wiring be sure to confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off When the inverter power has been turned on once a dangerous high voltage remains in the internal capacitors for some time after power off regardless of whether the inverter has been operated When rewiring after power off always wait 10 minutes or more after power off and check with a multimeter that the residual voltage across terminals P and N is zero to ensure safety during rewiring work 1 Main power input terminals R S and T Connect an earth leakage breaker for circuit wiring protection between the power supply and main power input terminals R S and T Use an earth leakage breaker with a high rating of a high frequency sensitive current to prevent the breaker from malfunctioning under the influence of high frequency When the protective function of the inverter operates a fault or accident may occur in your system Therefore you are recommended to connect a magnetic contactor that interrupts the power supply to the inverter Do not use the magnetic contactor connected to the power input terminal primary side or power output terminal Secondary side
180. WWNNNMNNNMHFHOO0RD9RD0CO OANHTFWHOONDMTAWNHH ODONDAH NOWDAWNO C026 Alarm relay terminal function 00 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque digital output frequency 04 output voltage 05 input power electronic thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 00 x O 4 76 digital current monitoring 09 motor temperature 03 C027 FM siginal selection 06 08 10 heat sink temperature 12 general purpose output YAO 00 04 07 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic thermal overload 00 LAD frequency 09 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature 11 output torque signed value 13 general purpose output YA1 C028 AM siginal selection 4 77 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic thermal overload LAD frequency 09 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature general purpose output YA2 C029 AMI siginal selection 00 x O Analog monitoring Rated C030 Digital current monitor reference 0 20 x rated current to 1 50 x rated current A current o o value Current with digital current monitor output at 1 440 Hz of inverter 4 75 C031 Terminal 11 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x oO C032 Terminal 12 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x Q C033 Terminal 13 active state 00
181. Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C027 FM siginal selection C028 AM siginal selection C029 AMI siginal selection H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motor H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors 4 2 96 Torque monitoring function The torque monitoring function allows you to monitor the estimated motor output torque when the V F characteristic curve selection is the sensorless vector control To monitor the output torque on the digital operator select code d012 on the digital operator To monitor the output torque as a signal output from the control circuit terminal block see Section 4 2 77 FM terminal or 4 2 78 AM and AMI terminals If the constant torque characteristic VC reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power of VP or free V f characteristic is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 this function is disabled and the display on the digital operator and the signal output from the control circuit terminal block are unpredictable The torque monitored by this function is displayed as a ratio to the torque the motor outputs when rotating in synchronization with the frequency corresponding to the motor s rated output The latter torque is 100 Since this function estimates the output torque from the motor current the accuracy of monitoring is ab
182. _ 4 143 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vi List of registers 2nd control settings Register Function name Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Be lag Zz e 2103h i i i F202 high R W Acceleration 1 time setting 2nd high 1 to 360000 0 01 sec 2104h motor F202 low RW 2105h Deceleration time 2nd motor F203 high RW 1 to 360000 0 01 sec 2106h F203 low 2107h to 2002h _ Reserved bee ae Inaccessible vii List of registers function modes for the 2nd control settings peda Monitoring and setting items Data resolution 2203h 30 to maximum frequency 2nd motor BEE omnes it ioe 2216h _ Multispeed frequency setting A220 high 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 2217h 2nd motor A220 low 2nd motor 2218h to azaan Eeserveen o feessie 223Bh Torque boost method selection A241 R W 0 manual torque boost 1 automatic torque 2nd motor boost Manual torque boost value 5 Manual torque boost frequency 5 223Dh adjustment 2nd motor A243 R W 0 to 500 0 1 V F characteristic curve 0 VC 1 VP 2 free V f 3 Sensorless vector Ea selection 2nd motor pene control 4 OHz range sensorless vector 223Fh_ Reserved Inaccessible o o T S Voltage compensation gain 2240h setting for automatic torque A246 R W 0 to 255 1 boost 2n
183. a remote operator You cannot copy the user parameter codes P either If necessary download the user parameter codes from your personal computer Personal computer Windows system Programming debugging support software Inverter Special cable Compilation JL User program Download Upload 4 96 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 102 Pulse train frequency input The pulse train frequency input function allows you to use the pulse train input via the SAP or SAN terminal as a frequency command or PID feedback data in each control mode You can use this function in every control mode Specify the input frequency corresponding to the allowable maximum frequency as the pulse train frequency scale P055 You cannot use the start end frequency setting function for external analog input together with this function To limit the input frequency specify the desired values for the pulse train frequency bias P057 and pulse train frequency limit P058 Related code P055 Pulse string frequency scale P056 Time constant of pulse string frequency filter P057 Pulse string frequency bias P058 Pulse string frequency limit A002 Frequency source setting A076 PV source setting A141 Operation target frequency selection 1 A142 Operation target frequency selection 2 Data or range of data
184. after free running 4 decelerating and stopping the motor R 4631h DeviceNet polled 1 0 Input instance P047 Rw 70 74 101 number 0 tripping 1 tripping after decelerating and stopping the Inverter action on DeviceNet idle motor tegen mode FOIS RAN 2 ignoring errors 3 stopping the motor after free running 4 decelerating and stopping the motor 4 142 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 0 0 pole 1 2 poles 2 4 poles 3 6 poles 4 8 poles 5 10 poles 6 12 poles 7 14 poles 8 16 poles 9 18 1633h Motor poles setting for RPM P049 R W poles 10 20 poles 11 22 poles 12 24 poles 13 26 poles 14 28 poles 15 30 poles 16 32 poles 17 34 poles 18 36 poles 19 38 poles 1634h to 10 to 500 input frequency corresponding 1639h Pulse train frequency scale P055 Rw the allowable maximum frequency 0 1 kHz 163Ah a constant of pulse train frequency P056 Raw hi to 200 0 01 sec 163Bh_ Pulse train frequency bias P057 R W 100 to 100 1 163Ch_ Pulse train frequency limit P058 R W 0 to 100 1 163Dh__ Reserved SC hnaccessibie o J penes E q 1666h Easy sequence user parameter U 00 asy sequence user parameter U 01 asy sequence user parameter U 02 asy sequence user parameter U 03 asy sequence user parameter U 04 asy sequence user parameter U
185. al No input ON No input Nonreversible OFF No input ON No input Reversible sinon tne AT 00 OFF Input a ON inp Nonreversibe er Heat OFF input intelligent input pu terminal ON No input Reversible 00 OFF Input ON Input 01 oo OFF O L terminal input Reversible ON O2 L terminal No input oo O2tterminal Noinput Reversible ef a e freeen se When the AT function is not 4 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Example 1 When Example 1 When the motor operation the motor operation is not reversible is reversible wif wif R pe oe Main frequency command via the Ol Main frequency command via the Ol or O terminal or O terminal Auxiliary Auxiliary frequency 0 frequency command via the O2 terminal command via the O2 terminal fa Fe fO f fa we Actual frequency command fo f Actual frequency command 4 2 12 Frequency operation function The frequency operation function allows you to use the result of an arithmetic operation on two frequency commands as the actual frequency command or PID feedback data To use the operation result as the actual frequency command specify 10 for the frequency source setting A001 To use the operation result as the PID feedback data specify 10 for the PV source setting A076 Valid only when the OPE SR is connected
186. also an optional digital operator OPE S OPE SR SRW Ou or SRW OEX When you intend to remove the standard digital operator from the inverter and use it as remote equipment request your local Hitachi Distributor to supply a connection cable ICS 1 1 meter cable or ICS 3 3 meter cable If you prepare the cable by yourself the following product is recommended HUTP5 PC 4P X X Straight cable equipped with connector at both ends made by Hitachi Cable Lid The length of the connection cable must be 3 m or less If a cable over 3 m is used the inverter may malfunction 2 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 5 Selection and wiring of regenerative braking resistor on 11 kW to 30 kW models The L700 series inverter models with capacities of 11 to 30 kW have an internal regenerative braking circuit Connecting an optional regenerative braking resistor to RB and P terminals increases the regenerative torque Without a resistor nee Minimum eonnected Minimum connectable resistor resistance Moge W Regenerative Resistance E TA eeiier torque Q 08 96 operation Q L700 110LFF 11 10 10 110 10 50 L700 150LFF 15 10 10 80 10 50 L700 185LFF 18 5 10 7 5 90 10 35 L700 220LFF 22 10 7 5 70 10 35 L700 300LFF 30 10 5 80 10 35 L700 110HFF 11 10 35 120 over 10 150
187. and This command reads the trip history data from the inverter Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 05 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data Bcc CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Data Data monitored at tripping 440 bytes See Note 9 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 11 The inverter stores the data trip history on the last six times of tripping together with the total trip count 8 bytes Total trip count Trip 1 data Trip 6 data Monitoring item Unit Magnification Data size Remarks Trip factor 2 8 bytes Factor code 2 A z nverter status 8 bytes 6a command 3 Inverter status B 8 bytes a See Note 7 al Inverter status C 8 bytes 3 Output frequency Hz x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code
188. and keys were pressed in step 1 4 When changing data be sure to press the key first Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 3 3 How To Make a Test Run This section describes how to make a test run of the inverter that is wired and connected to external devices in a general way as shown below For the detailed method of using the digital operator see Section 3 2 How To Operate the Digital Operator 1 When entering operation and frequency setting commands from the digital operator The operating procedure below is common to the standard and optional digital operators ELB 3 phase R 91 power supply S 91 T o 0 3 O0QO PD c zzzz DC reactor Digital operator Braking unit Alarm output contacts Default jumper position for sinking type inputs Altanatively CM1 PLC for souricing tiype C L Re grounding 200 V class model Operating procedure 9 Type C grounding 400 V class model 1 Confirm that all wirings are correct 2 Turn on the earth leakage breaker ELB to supply power to the inverter The POWER lamp red LED of the digital operator goes on When using an inverter with the factory setting proceed to step 5 3 Select the digital operator as the operating device via the frequency source setting function Display the function code A001 on the monitor screen and then press the D key once The monitor sh
189. andard supply voltage Note2 This nonstop deceleration function cannot be canceled until the nonstop deceleration operation is completed To restart the inverter operation after power recovery wait until the inverter stops enter a stop command and then enter an operation command Note3 Setting higher initial out put frequency decrease during powerloss b054 results in over current trip due to sudden deceleration Setting lower b054 orlonger deceleration time during powerloss b053 results in undervoltage trip due to less regeneration power 4 84 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Voltage across main circuit terminals P and N VPN V b052 z Seeeererereeersesy iio a b051 Undervoltage level Output frequency Hz Time lt 2 gt DC voltage constant control during nonstop operation at momentary power failure 0050 02 no restoration b050 03 restoration to be done If momentary power failure occurs or the main circuit DC voltage drops during inverter operation the inverter decelerates the motor while maintaining the main circuit DC voltage at the level specified as the target nonstop operation voltage at momentary power failure OV LAD stop level b052 This function starts operating when all the following conditions are met 02 or 03 has been specified for b050 The inverter is running This function does
190. ately after the setting of A020 has been changed the monitor will display A as the initial screen after the next power on NINIMINM M MIN MY MfH l lAl f tles 4locloels 4 81 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 86 Automatic user parameter setting The automatic user parameter setting function allows you to make the inverter automatically store the parameters you readjusted sequentially as user parameters U001 to U012 You can use the stored data as a readjustment history To enable this function select 01 enabling automatic user parameter setting for the automatic user parameter setting function enable b039 The setting data entered in displayed on the digital operator is stored when the STR key is pressed Also the monitor screen code d is stored at the same time User parameter U001 retains the latest update of setting user parameter U012 the oldest update A functional parameter can be stored as only a single user parameter After all the 12 user parameters have been used to store functional parameter settings new functional parameter settings will be stored as user parameters on a first in first out basis that is the next parameter will be written to U012 storing the oldest update first Related code b039 Automatic user parameter setting function enable U001 to U012 User parameters
191. ation is reversed A095 Acci to Acc2 frequency transition point 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x wo Aags Acc to Acc frequency transition 4 49 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x point 2nd motor 5 aoge oi to Dec frequency transition 9 99 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x wo 5 amp azg6 Dect to Dec frequency transition 4 49 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x point 2nd motor A097 Acceleration curve selection 00 linear 01 S curve 02 U curve 03 inverted U curve 04 EL S curve 00 x x yey A098 Deceleration curve setting 00 linear 01 S curve 02 U curve 03 inverted U curve 04 EL S curve 00 x x A101 eee active Tange stan 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o S ato2 TOMLI input active range end 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o requency 2 A103 Olj L input active range start current 0 to Ol L input active range end current 20 Oo gt A104 Olj L input active range end current Ol L input active range start current to 100 100 x O amp A105 Olj L input start frequency enable 00 external start frequency 01 0 Hz 00 x O 4 14 Sie F TET arty TOZHLI input active range start 400 to 100 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o requency E amp Ane 02110 input active range end 400 to 100 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o 5 requency A113 O2 L input active rang
192. ay must be 1 1 times as high as the rated current of the motor The thermal relay may go off too early depending on the cable length If this occurs connect an AC reactor to the output of the inverter 3 DC reactor connection terminals PD and P Use these terminals to connect the optional DC power factor reactor DCL As the factory setting terminals P and PD are connected by a jumper Remove this to connect the DCL The cable length between the inverter and DCL must be 5 m or less Remove the jumper only when connecting the DCL If the jumper is removed and the DCL is not connected power is not supplied to the main circuit of the inverter and the inverter cannot operate 4 External braking resistor connection terminals P and RB and regenerative braking unit connection terminals P and N Inverter models with 30 kW or less capacity have a built in regenerative braking BRD circuit If you need increased braking performance connect an optional external braking resistor to terminals P and RB Do not connect an external braking resistor with resistance less than the specified value Such a resistor may cause damage to the regenerative braking BRD circuit Inverter models with capacity of 37 kW or more do not have a built in regenerative braking BRD circuit Increasing the braking performance of these models requires an optional regenerative braking unit and an external braking resistor Connect the P and N terminals of the
193. bytes 02 Data Data to be transmitted 16 bytes See Note 5 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 5 The table below lists the functions of the intelligent input terminals and corresponding hexadecimal data For details see the explanation of the intelligent input terminal functions Data Description Pata Description hexadecimal hexadecimal 0000000000000001 FW Forward rotation 0000000100000000 SF1 Multispeed bit 1 0000000000000002 RV Reverse rotation 0000000200000000 SF2 Multispeed bit 2 0000000000000004 CF1 Multispeed 1 setting 0000000400000000 SF3 Multispeed bit 3 0000000000000008 CF2 Multispeed 2 setting 0000000800000000 SF4 Multispeed bit 4 0000000000000010 CF3 Multispeed 3 setting 0000001000000000 SF5 Multispeed bit 5 0000000000000020 CF4 Multispeed 4 setting 0000002000000000 SF6 Multispeed bit 6 0000000000000040 JG Jogging 0000004000000000 SF7 Multispeed bit 7 0000000000000080 DB External DC braking 0000008000000000 OLR Overload restriction selection 0000000000000100 SET Set 2nd motor data 0000010000000000 TL Enabling disabling torque limitation 0000000000000200 2CH 2 stage acceleration deceleration 0000020000000000 TRQ1 Torque limit selection bit 1 0000000000000400 0000040000000000 TRQ2 Torque limit selection bit 2 0000000000000800 FRS Free run stop
194. c parts When carrying the inverter handle it carefully to prevent damage to the parts Do not carry the inverter by holding the front or terminal block cover Doing so may cause the inverter to fall Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or its parts are missing 2 Surface on which to install the inverter The inverter will reach a high temperature up to about 150 C during operation Install the inverter on a vertical wall surface made of nonflammable material e g metal to avoid the risk of fire Leave sufficient space around the inverter In particular keep sufficient distance between the inverter and other heat sources e g braking resistors and reactors if they are installed in the vicinity Keep enough clearance between the inverter and the wiring ducts located above and below the inverter to prevent the latter from obstructing the ventilation of the inverter Air flow 1 10 cm or more for 11 to 75kW 30cm or more for 90 to 160kW 2 10 cm or more for 11 to 75kW 30cm or more for 90 to 160kW But for exchanging the DC bus capacitor take a distance 22cm or more for 18 5 to 75kW Wall 30cm or more for 90 to 160kW 5 cmor more 5 cm or more l lt Sao ee 3 Ambient temperature Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the ambient temperature goes above or below the allowable range 10 C to 40 C as defined by the standard inverter specification Measure the temperature
195. cannot reach the target frequency try to make the following adjustments Increase the acceleration time See Section 4 2 8 Increase the torque boost setting See Section 4 2 19 Increase the overload restriction setting b022 b025 Data or Pata or range of data of data OC Disabling the overload restriction __ Disabling the overload restriction lt restriction 1 geor and eonan speet opetan acceleration and constant speed operation restriction b021 b024 constant speed operation operation mode Enabling the overload restriction during acceleration and constant speed operation increasing the frequency during regenerative operation restriction setting rated current x 1 5 A Deceleration rate Deceleration time to be applied when the overload at overload b023 b026 0 1 to 30 0 s restriction operates restriction Terminal function C001 to C008 Terminal to switch the overload restriction setting Related code b021 Overload restriction operation mode b022 Overload restriction setting b023 Deceleration rate at overload restriction b024 Overload restriction operation mode 2 b025 Overload restriction setting 2 b026 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 2 C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C040 Overload signal output mode C041 Overload level setting C111 Overload setting 2
196. ce for periods other than starting by using the DC braking force setting A054 Set the output frequency at which to start DC braking by using the DC braking frequency setting A052 When you set the DC braking wait time A053 the inverter output will be shut off when the output frequency reaches the setting of A052 after the operation command FW signal is turned off and the motor will run freely for the delay time set by A053 DC braking will be started after the delay A053 The internal DC braking operation to be performed when the operation command is switched from the stop command to the start command varies depending on the braking mode edge or level mode Edge mode The DC braking time setting A055 is given priority over operation commands and the inverter performs DC braking according to the setting of A055 When the output frequency reaches the setting of A052 the inverter performs DC braking for the time set for A055 Even if the stop command is input during DC braking DC braking continues until the time set for A055 elapses See examples 5 a and 6 a Level mode Operation commands are given priority over the DC braking time setting The inverter follows operation commands regardless of the DC braking time setting A055 If the start command is input during DC braking the inverter starts the normal motor operation regardless of the DC braking time setting A055 See examples 5 b and 6 b
197. center frequency setting 2 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O 3 A066 Jump hysteresis frequency width 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 50 x o setting 2 4 25 fex A067 Jump center frequency setting 3 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O E Aces aE ERS frequency width f0 90 to 10 00 Hz 0 50 x o z A069 Acceleration stop frequency setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O 5 A070 Acceleration stop time frequency setting 0 0 to 60 0 s 0 0 x Oo A071 PID Function Enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 enabling inverted data output 00 x O A072 PID proportional gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 O O A073 PID integral time constant 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 1 0 O O 5 A074 _ PID derivative gain 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 s 0 00 O O 5 A075 PV scale conversion 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 x O 4 26 2 aore PV sourco setina TE E eran i I A077 Output of inverted PID deviation 00 OFF 01 ON 00 x O A078 PID variation range 0 0 to 100 0 0 00 O A079 PID feed forward selection 00 disabled 01 O input 02 Ol input 03 O2 input 00 O Note lt gt indicate the setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Default Setting Change during during Cod
198. change the inverter output 101 Up Down memory mode selection frequency by operating the UP and DWN terminals intelligent input C001 t C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions terminals To use this function assign functions 27 UP and 28 DWN to two of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 This function is only effective for multispeed operation when 01 terminal or 02 oprater has been specified for the frequency source setting A001 If 01 control circuit terminal block has been specified this function is only effective when the analog command holding function AHD is enabled see 4 2 56 This function is ineffective when the external analog input has been specified for the frequency source setting A001 This function cannot be used to set frequencies for jogging operation When the UP or DWN terminal is on the 1st 2nd and 3rd acceleration deceleration time follows the settings of F002 F003 F202 F203 F302 and F303 To switch between the 1st 2nd and 3rd controls assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals and turn on and off the SET and SET3 terminals for switching You can store the frequency settings adjusted using the remote control function UP and DWN signals Set 01 enable on C101 to store the frequency settings You can also clear the stored frequency settings Assign function 29 UDC to an intelligent input terminal and turn on or off the UDC terminal
199. circuit element If instantaneous overcurrent occurs the main circuit element temperature is abnormal or the main circuit element drive power drops the inverter will shut off its output to protect the main circuit element After tripping because of this protective function the inverter cannot retry the operation The inverter monitors the resistance of the thermistor in the motor connected to the inverter s TH terminal and will shut off the inverter output if the motor temperature rises If the EMR signal on three terminals is turned on when the slide switch SW1 on the logic board is set to ON the inverter hardware will shut off the inverter output and display the error code shown on the right Malfunction due to incoming noise in case EMR terminal is not ON If overload occurs during the motor operation at a very low speed at 0 2 Hz or less the electronic thermal protection circuit in the inverter will detect the overload and shut off the inverter output 2nd electronic thermal control Note that a high frequency may be recorded as the error history data If timeout occurs because of line disconnection during the communication in Modbus RTU mode the inverter will display the error code shown on the right The inverter will trip according to the setting of C076 The inverter detects errors in the option board mounted in the optional slot 1 For details refer to the instruction manual for the mounted opt
200. connection detection OlDc Analog OIl disconnection detection O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection detection FBV PID feedback comparison NDc communication line disconnection 03 x O LOG1 logical operation result 1 LOG2 logical operation result 2 LOG3 logical operation result 3 4 62 C021 Terminal 11 function C022 Terminal 12 function C023 Terminal 13 function LOG4 logical operation result 4 LOGS logical operation result 5 LOGE logical operation result 6 07 x O WAC capacitor life warning 40 WAF cooling fan speed drop FR starting contact signal 42 OHF heat sink overheat warning LOC low current indication signal M01 general purpose output 1 45 M02 general purpose output 46 M03 general purpose output 3 M04 general purpose output 4 40 x O M05 general purpose output 5 M06 general purpose output 6 50 IRDY inverter ready 51 FWR forward rotation 52 RVR reverse rotation 53 MJA major failure 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 05 x o When alarm code output is selected for C062 functions ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 ACn alarm code output are forcibly assigned to intelligent output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 respectively C024 Terminal 14 function Intelligent output terminals C025 Terminal 15 function BHRANMHDHRPAWWWWWWWH
201. constant speed reached FA1 set frequency overreached FA2 overload notice advance signal 1 OL output deviation for PID control OD alarm signal AL set frequency reached FA3 over torque OTQ instantaneous power failure IP undervoltage UV torque limited TRQ operation time over RNT plug in time over ONT thermal alarm signal THM 0 Hz detection signal ZS set frequency overreached 2 FA4 set frequency reached 2 FA5 overload notice advance signal 2 OL2 PID feedback comparison FBV communication line disconnection NDc logical operation result 1 LOG1 logical operation result 2 LOG2 logical operation result 3 LOG3 logical operation result 4 LOG4 logical operation result 5 LOG5 logical operation result 6 LOG6 capacitor life warning WAC cooling fan speed drop WAF starting contact signal FR heat sink overheat warning OHF low current indication signal LOC general purpose output 1 M01 general purpose output 2 M02 general purpose output 3 M03 general purpose output 4 M04 general purpose output 5 M05 general purpose output 6 M06 inverter ready IRDY forward rotation FWR reverse rotation RVR major failure MJA alarm code 0 to 3 ACO to AC3 Intelligent monitor output terminals Analog voltage output Note7 analog current output Note7 pulse string output e g A F D F n fold pulse output only A T V P Monitoring on display Output fr
202. control mode oe Rotation speed Momentary speed variation The following formula generally represents the relation between the momentary speed variation and speed error Speed error at rated torque A 100 Synchronous rotation speed at base frequency Momentary speed variation 4 60 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 56 Analog command holding function AHD Related code The analog command holding function allows you to make the inverter hold C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions the analog command input via the external analog input terminal when the C101 UP DWN holding function AHD terminal is on While the AHD terminal is on the up down function can be used based on the analog signal held by this function as reference data When 01 is specified for Up Down memory mode selection C101 the result of up down processing can be stored in memory If the inverter power is turned on or the RS terminal turned off with the AHD terminal left turned on the data held immediately before power on or turning off the RS terminal will be used ltem Functioncode Data Description Terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 AHD Analog command holding Remark Set frequency remains when inverter is switched with SET SET3 terminal with AHD on Turn AHD terminal off to re hold the set frequency
203. ct your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor 1 Check the product for damage including falling of parts and dents in the inverter body caused during transportation 2 Check that the product package contains an inverter set and this Instruction Manual 3 Check the specification label to confirm that the product is the one you ordered Specification label Figure 1 1 Location of the specifications label HITACHI INVERTEE Inverter model gt isl L700 150HFF Input ratings gt liput 50Hz 60H V_iPh 50Hz 60Hz 380 480 32h Output ratings gt Output 0 100Hy 380 4807 3Ph 9 A i s MFGNo 03AATI2345 A 001 Date 100 Serial number HitachiindustrialEquipment rapa NE18028 L Systems Co Ltd MADE IN JAPAN ereo o Figure 1 2 Contents of the specifications label 1 1 2 Instruction manual this manual This Instruction Manual describes how to operate the Hitachi L700 Series Inverter Read this Instruction Manual thoroughly before using the inverter and then keep it handy for future reference When using the inverter together with optional products for the inverter also refer to the manuals supplied with the optional products Note that this Instruction Manual and the manual for each optional product to be used should be delivered to the end user of the inverter 1 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Ema
204. ction adjusts the acceleration time so that during acceleration the inverter output current does not exceed the current level specified by the deceleration rate at overload restriction when the overload restriction is enabled or about 150 of the inverter s rated current when the overload restriction is disabled This function adjusts the deceleration time so that during deceleration the output current does not exceed about 150 of the inverter s rated current or the DC voltage in the inverter circuits does not exceed about 370 V in the case of 200 V class models or about 740 V in the case of 400 V class models Thus this function automatically adjusts the acceleration and deceleration time appropriately on a real time basis even when the motor load or the motor s moment of inertia changes 00 Normal operation Related code A044 A244 A344 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors A085 Operation mode selection b021 b024 Overload restriction operation mode 1 2 b022 b025 Overload restriction setting 1 2 Operation mode selection A085 Energy saving operation Fuzzy operation Observe the following precautions and instructions when using this function Note 1 This function is not suited for machines that require fixed acceleration and deceleration times This function varies the acceleration and deceleration time according to the changes in the load and the moment of inertia Note 2 If the inertia
205. current at which to output the current A OL2 signal overload notice advance signal 2 Overload restriction setting b022 b025 Overload level setting C041 C111 Output current OL OL2 output _ 4 2 31 Overcurrent restraint Related code The overcurrent restraint function allows you to restrain the b027 Overcurrent suppression enable overcurrent that can occur when the output current sharply increases because of rapid acceleration You can enable or disable the function by setting the overcurrent suppression enable b027 Data or range of data Overcurrent 00 Disabling the overcurrent restraint b027 7 z suppression enable Enabling the overcurrent restraint Note When using the inverter for a lift disable the overcurrent restraint function If the overcurrent restraint functions during the lift operation the lift may slide down because of insufficient torque 4 41 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 32 Over voltage supression during deceleration The over voltage supression function allows you to prevent the inverter from tripping because of the overvoltage that can be caused by the energy regenerated by the motor during deceleration You can enable or disable the function by setting the overvoltage suppression enable b130 When 01 enabling the over voltage supression with deceleration st
206. d examination and repairs of faults subject to the above scope of the warranty disclaimer will be available at charge To request a repair at your charge contact your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor The Hitachi Distributors are listed on the back cover of this Instruction Manual 1 2 3 Warranty Terms The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions shall be two 2 years from the date of manufacture DATE on product nameplate or one 1 year from the date of installation whichever occurs first The warranty shall cover the repair or replacement at Hitachi s sole discretion of ONLY the inverter that was installed 1 Service in the following cases even within the warranty period shall be charged to the purchaser a Malfunction or damage caused by mis operation or modification or improper repair b Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and transportation c Malfunction or damage caused by fire earthquake flood lightening abnormal input voltage contamination or other natural disasters 2 When service is required for the product at your work site all expenses associated with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser 3 Always keep this manual handy please do not loose it Please contact your Hitachi distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals 1 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 1 Overview
207. d motor Slippage compensation gain 2241h setting for automatic torque A247 R W 0 to 255 boost 2nd motor EA o Inaccessible aa 0 2242h to 224Eh Reserved 224Fh Frequency upper limit setting A261 high 00 or 2nd minimum frequency limit to 0 01 Hz 2250h 2nd motor A261 low 2251h Frequency lower limit setting A262 high 2252h 2nd motor A262 low 2253h to 226Eh Reserved R W maximum frequency 2nd motor 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency 9 94 Hz 2nd motor limit B Inaccessible e 4 1 to 360000 0 01 sec 226Fh Acceleration 2 time setting A292 high 2270h 2nd motor A292 low 2271h Deceleration 2 time setting A293 high 2272h 2nd motor A293 low 1110 300000 0 01 sec D 2273h 0 switching by 2CH terminal 1 switching by Select method to switch to A294 R W setting 2 switching only when the rotation is Acc2 Dec2 2nd motor reversed 2274h_ Acci to Acc2 frequency A295 high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 2275h_ transition point 2nd motor A295 low 2276h Dect to Dec2 frequency A296 high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 2277h _ transition point 2nd motor A296 low 2 toes i A 4 144 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions ars a Monitoring and setting items Data resolution ba Electronic thermal setting 200 to 1000 230Ch calculated within the inverter
208. d output current A 44 58 73 85 113 140 169 210 270 gt Regenerative braking Internal BRD circuit external discharge resistor External regenerative braking unit Minimum connectable a resistance Q 19 K oe ifs Approx weight kg 6 6 14 47 14 22 30 30 43 2 Specifications of the 400 V class model Moce pame type nams 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320 1600 Max applicable motor capacity 4 pole kW 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 Rated capacity 400V 15 2 20 9 25 6 30 4 39 4 48 4 58 8 72 7 93 5 110 8 135 159 3 200 9 kVA 480V 18 2 24 1 30 7 36 5 47 3 58 1 70 6 87 2 112 2 133 162 1 191 2 241 1 Rated input AC voltage Three phase 3 wire 380 to 480 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage Three phase 3 wire 380 to 480 V corresponding to the input voltage Rated output current A 22 29 37 43 57 70 85 105 135 160 195 230 290 Regenerative braking Internal BRD circuit i 2 external discharge resistor External regenerative braking unit 5 Minimum connectable 35 35 24 24 20 i resistance Q Approx weight kg 6 6 14 14 14 22 30 30 30 55 55 70 70 3 Common specifications of 200 V class and 400 V class models Model name type name 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320 1600 L700 XXXFF LH UH UH uH uH uH UH WH LH H H H H Protective structure IP20 IP00 Control system Sine wave PWM cont
209. d rotation 02 enabling only reverse rotation o0 ah b036 Reduced voltage start selection 0 minimum reduced voltage start time to 255 maximum reduced 6 x o 4 43 y voltage start time o 7 7 ine 00 full display 01 function specific display 02 user setting 5 fo b037 Function code display restriction 03 data comparison display 04 basic display 04 x O 4 79 iai A 00 screen displayed when the STR key was pressed last 01 d001 2 b038 Initial screen selection 02 d002 03 d003 04 d007 05 F001 01 x O 4 81 Automatic user parameter setting 5 F b039 function enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 x O 4 82 ost 00 quadrant specific setting 01 switching by terminal b040 Torque limit selection 02 analog input 03 option 1 04 option 2 00 x O Torque limit 1 x 7 A en b041 forward driving in 4 quadrant mode 0 to 150 no disabling torque limitation 120 x O 5 Torque limit 2 3 b042 reverse regenerating in 4 quadrant 0 to 150 no disabling torque limitation 120 x 5 4 93 mode 2 po4g Torque limit 3 0 to 150 no disabling torque limitation 120 x o fox reverse driving in 4 quadrant mode i O 5 Torque limit 4 b044 forward regenerating in 4 quadrant 0 to 150 no disabling torque limitation 120 x O mode b045 Torque limit LADSTOP enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 O 4 95 b046 Reverse Run protection enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 01 O 4 94
210. denly after a break in the tripping status Stay away from the machine controlled by the inverter when the inverter is under such circumstances Design the machine so that human safety can be ensured even when the inverter restarts suddenly Otherwise you run the risk of injury Do not select the retry mode for controlling an elevating or traveling device because output free running status occurs in retry mode Otherwise you run the risk of injury or damage to the machine controlled by the inverter If an operation command has been input to the inverter before a short term power failure the inverter may restart operation after the power recovery If such a restart may put persons in danger design a control circuit that disables the inverter from restarting after power recovery Otherwise you run the risk of injury The STOP key is effective only when its function is enabled by setting Prepare an emergency stop switch separately Otherwise you run the risk of injury If an operation command has been input to the inverter before the inverter enters alarm status the inverter will restart suddenly when the alarm status is reset Before resetting the alarm status make sure that no operation command has been input While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any internal part of the inverter or insert a bar in it Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Do not touch the heat sink which heats up during the inverter op
211. dicate that the unit shall be connected with a Listed inverse time circuit breaker rated 600 V with the current ratings as shown in the table below Model No Fuse Size Maximum A Circuit Breaker Maximum A Type Rating Type Rating L700 110L J 60A Inverse time 60A L700 150L J 100A Inverse time 100A L700 185L J 100A Inverse time 100A L700 220L J 100A Inverse time 100A L700 300L J 125A Inverse time 125A L700 370L J 175A Inverse time 175A L700 450L J 225A Inverse time 225A L700 550L J 250A Inverse time 250A L700 750L J 300A Inverse time 300A L700 110H J 30A Inverse time 30A L700 150H J 40A Inverse time 40A L700 185H J 50A Inverse time 50A L700 220H J 50A Inverse time 50A L700 300H J 75A Inverse time 75A L700 370H J 80A Inverse time 80A L700 450H J 100A Inverse time 100A L700 550H J 125A Inverse time 125A L700 750H J 150A Inverse time 150A L700 900H J 225A Inverse time 225A L700 1100H J 225A Inverse time 225A L700 1320H J 300A Inverse time 300A L700 1600H J 350A Inverse time 350A 12 Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified ring lug terminal connector sized for the wire gauge being used The connector must be fixed using the crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer vii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Contents Chapter 1 Overview es N o Inspection of the Purchased Product PPPTETTTITITITITITTTTTTirit rit Titi titi titi
212. e 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320 1600 L700 XXXFF L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H H H H H Standard o operator Setting with and W keys oes External f ios signal 0 to 10 VDC 10 to 10 VDC input impedance 10kQ 4 to 20 mA input impedance 100Q aon External port Setting via RS485 communication D standard Start stop commands forward reverse switching by parameter setting oo 0 w operator 2 v 3 amp E Forward operation start stop commands reverse operation start stop possible when relevant commands SESE xternal are assigned to intelligent input terminals As g 5 signal 3 wire input possible when relevant commands are assigned to control circuit terminals External port Setting via RS485 communication Input Intelligent input terminals 8 terminals NO NC switchable sink logic source logic switchable Terminal functions Select eight of 69 functions Reverse operation RV Multispeed 1 setting CF1 Multispeed 2 setting CF2 Multispeed 3 setting CF3 Multispeed 4 setting CF4 Jogging JG external DC braking DB 2nd motor control SET 2 stage acceleration deceleration 2CH free run stop FRS external trip EXT unattended start protection USP commercial power supply switching CS software lock SFT analog input switching AT 3rd motor control SET3 reset RS starting by 3 wire input STA
213. e 4 4 Operation based on V f characteristic control The motor rotates at a speed up to 80 of the base frequency 5 Operation based on SLV control The motor rotates at a speed up to x of the base frequency 6 Second DC excitation The motor does not rotate 7 Display of auto tuning result Note 1 Steps 4 and 5 are skipped when the auto tuning without motor rotation H001 01 has been selected Note 2 The motor speed x in step 5 is as follows Assume that T is the acceleration or deceleration time in step 4 whichever is largest When Os lt T lt 50 s x 40 When 50 s lt T lt 100 s x 20 When 100 s lt T x 10 Note 3 The tuning result is displayed as follows Abnormal end l l lo AEB If the auto tuning has ended abnormally retry it To clear the result display press the STOP RESET key 4 87 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Note 4 If the inverter trips during the auto tuning the auto tuning is terminated forcibly In A cases the monitor does not display the abnormal end code but displays a trip indication code In such cases remove the cause of tripping and then set H001 01 again to retry the auto tuning after turning off power source for the inverter and turn on Note 5 If you cancel the auto tuning midway with a stop command by pressing the STOP RESET key or tur
214. e you run the risk of injury or fire Do not connect a resistor directly to any of the DC terminals PD P and N Otherwise you run the risk of fire Connect an earth leakage breaker to the power input circuit Otherwise you run the risk of fire Use only the power cables earth leakage breaker and magnetic contactors that have the specified capacity ratings Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not use the magnetic contactor installed on the primary and secondary sides of the inverter to stop its operation Tighten each screw to the specified torque No screws must be left loose Otherwise you run the risk of fire Before operating slide switch SW1 in the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Since the inverter supports two modes of cooling fan operation the inverter power is not always off even when the cooling fan is stopped Therefore be sure to confirm that the power supply is off before wiring Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety Instructions 3 Operation While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any terminal or internal part of the inverter check signals or connect or disconnect any wire or connector Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Be sure to close the terminal block cover before turning on the
215. e Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page _FF allowed allowed or not or not A081 AVR function select 00 always on 01 always off 02 off during deceleration 02 x x z 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 V 4 11 lt X A092 AVE voltage select 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 V 200 400 x A085 Operation mode selection 00 normal operation 01 energy saving operation 00 x x fon A086 Energy saving mode tuning 0 1 to 100 0 50 0 G O S A092 Acceleration 2 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 O O 5 A292 Acceleration 2 time setting 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 O O z A392 Acceleration 2 time setting 3rd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 O O 2 A093 Deceleration 2 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 Oo Oo 2 A293 Deceleration 2 time setting 2ndmotor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 O O 8 A393 Deceleration 2 time setting 3rd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 Oo Oo 5 A094 Select method to switch to 00 switching by 2CH terminal 01 switching by setting 00 x se w Acc2 Dec2 profile 02 switching only when rotation is reversed 430 3 A294 Select method to switch to 00 switching by 2CH terminal 01 switching by setting 00 amp x 2 Acc2 Dec2 2nd motor 02 switching only when rot
216. e Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format StationNo Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Data Data 8 bytes See Note 8 BCC Bi ckcheck code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 10 The data indicating the status of the inverter consists of the following three status elements A B and C Data Status A Status B Status C 00 reserved Inverter status A Inverter status B Inverter status C Code Status Code Status Code Status 00 Initial status 00 Stopping 00 z 01 01 Running 01 Stopping 02 Stopping 02 Tripping 02 Decelerating 03 Running 03 Constant speed operation 04 Free run stop FRS in progress 04 Accelerating 05 Jogging JG in progress 05 Forward operation 06 DC braking DB in progress 06 Reverse operation 07 Retry in progress 07 Switching forward operation 08 Tripping to reverse operation 09 Undervoltage UV status 08 Switching reverse operation to forward operation 09 Starting forward operation 10 Starting reverse operation 4 106 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vi 05 comm
217. e digital option board SJ DG DIP switch Rotary Fiosuanoy eatin Acceleration orque limit Position switch q y 9 deceleration time setting setting setting Data resolution Switch No seung 00e 0 ee e OFF BIN binary input ON BCD BCD input ON DIV divided inp ut mode Input mode specified by switch settings Note For details refer to the instruction manual for the option board 5 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes 2 Error indications by protective functions with the DeviceNet option board S DN mounted Display on Display on If the disconnection due to the Bus Off Check whether the communication speed Refer to the signal or timeout occurs during the setting is correct instruction DeviceNet joperation using DeviceNet commands ft x Check whether the wiring distance is manual for communicatio the inverter will shut off its output and Ez appropriate the SJ DN n error display the error code shown on the right a 3 Check the connections The inverter will trip according to the if settings of p45 and P048 If two or more devices having the same Check whether duplicate MAC IDs are MAC ID are detected in the same HE used network the inverter will display the error code shown on the right Duplicate MAC ID If the Force Fault Trip bit o
218. e exclusive for program based operation Therefore you can arbitrarily select the devices to input frequency and operation commands to the inverter On the other hand the FW terminal must be used exclusively to run the program If the control circuit terminal block is specified as the device to input operation commands the FW terminal must be turned on by an instruction in the program The intelligent input output terminals of the inverter include general purpose input output terminals dedicated to the easy sequence function Those terminals can be used to freely write and read data to and from the inverter with instructions in the program You can assign the parameters e g frequency setting and acceleration deceleration time parameters that require adjustments on the actual inverter to user parameters P130 to P131 If you do so you can readjust the parameter data by using the digital operator without having to connect your personal computer to the inverter If you specify a program number in each program you created you will be able to check the program number on the monitor of the digital operator Each user program is compiled and stored as an intermediate code in the internal EEPROM of the inverter Data can be stored in EEPROM Even if the user data is initialized via the digital operator downloaded programs and user parameters P100 to P131 are not cleared You cannot copy the downloaded program by an operation from
219. e fa ee eee pe ee ee See eh eee pe ee MONM OTOL 2 Carry out a sequential Short circuit or open the protective protection operation test and o circuit outputs as a simulation An error must be detected check the protective and display according to the sequence circuits for any abnormality Cooling Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal vibrations o Turn the fan manually during the The fan must rotate smoothly system and noise inverter power off status There must be no abnormality PERRETE REP IE ERENT can EEA ome ERGER PE EG ee E EE a ee found 4 2 Check the joints for loosening Check visually foune ea operating life until O replacement 10 years 2 3 Heat sink Check for clogging o Check visually The heat sink must not be clogged Display Monitor 1 Check that all LEDs light up o Check visually The LEDs must light up normally normally 2 Clean the monitor e Clean the monitor with a rag Meter Check that meter readings are o Check the meter readings on the The readings must meet the Voltmeter and normal panel standard and control values ammeter Motor General 1 Check for abnormal vibrations Check vibrations and noise visually P and noise O by listening and with physical Thore must be no abnormality senses i 2 Check for unusual smells o Check for any unusual smells There must be no abnormality caused by overheating or damage found Insulation Check the ground resistance Remove the cables from the 500 VDC class res
220. e following table to register 0900h Data to be written 0000 Recalculating the motor constants 0001 Storing the register data Other than the above Recalculating the motor constants and storing the register data Notes Execution of the Enter command requires considerable time To check whether data writing is in progress monitor the status of the signal coil No 001Ah that indicates whether data writing is in progress The internal memory device of the inverter is subject to a limitation on the number of rewriting operations about 100 000 times Frequent use of the Enter command may shorten the inverter life 4 123 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 6 List of registers The R W column of the list indicates whether the coils and registers are read only or readable and writable R indicates a read only coil or register R W indicates a readable and writable coil or register i List of coils 0000h_ Reserved S oo l E 0005h _ Reserved S o e 0006h_ Reserved S o o S ef 000Fh_ Operation status R 1 Run 0 Stop interlocked to d003 0010h Rotation directon R 1 Reverse rotation 0 Forward rotation interlocked to d003 001ih Inverter ready R f1 Ready 0 Notready i y 0012h_ Unused S T RS Oek RUN running R 1 Tripping 0 Normal 0014h FA1 constant speed reached R f 1 ON
221. e layout so that the inverter ambient temperature will remain within the allowable range Ventilation fan Ventilation fan f a tz Inverter Inverter p Acceptable Unacceptable Position of ventilation fan 2 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 9 Reduction of enclosure size If you mount the inverter inside an enclosure such that the heat sink of the inverter is positioned outside the enclosure the amount of heat produced inside the enclosure can be reduced and likewise the size of the enclosure Mounting the inverter in an enclosure with the heat sink positioned outside requires an optional dedicated special metal fitting To mount the inverter in an enclosure with the heat sink positioned outside cut out the enclosure panel according to the specified cutting dimensions The cooling section including the heat sink positioned outside the enclosure has a cooling fan Therefore do not place the enclosure in any environment where it is exposed to waterdrops oil mist or dust 10 Approximate loss by inverter capacity inverter capacity Kw 1 15 185 2 30 7 45 55 75 90 110 192 160 Loss with 100 load W 1900 2300 2800 3800 4800 5550 6650 8060 2 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 2 Backing plate
222. e setting F003 low R W 1 to 360000 0 01 sec 1107h Keypad Run key routing F004 R W _ 0 forward rotation 1 reverse rotation Oo f 1108h to 4 129 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions v List of registers function modes Register a Poa Data 0 keypad potentiometer 1 control circuit terminal block 2 digital operator 3 RS485 4 option 1 5 1201h Frequency source setting A001 R W option 2 6 pulse train input 7 easy sequence operation function result 1 control circuit terminal block 2 digital operator 3 1202h Run command source setting A002 RS485 4 option 1 5 option 2 1203h__ Base frequency setting A003 R W_ 30 to maximum frequency 1 Hz 1204h Maximum frequency setting A004 R W_ 30 to 400 1 Hz 0 switching between O and Ol terminals 1 switching between O and O2 terminals 2 switching between O terminal and keypad potentiometer 3 LAT selection AWS RON switching between Ol terminal and keypad potentiometer 4 switching between O2 and keypad potentiometer 0 single 1 auxiliary frequency input via O and Ol terminals nonreversible 2 auxiliary frequency 1206h 02 selection A006 RA input via O and Ol terminals reversible 3 disabling O2 terminal 1207h to 120Bh _ O L input active range A011 high 20T AOTT on FY Pt 400 001 hA 120Dh _
223. e setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed ml or not or not pk R 00 disabling auto tuning 01 auto tuning without rotation pout Auto tuning Setting 02 auto tuning with rotation 00 x x n 00 Hitachi standard data 01 auto tuned data se x H002 Motor data selection 1st motor 02 auto tuned data with online auto tuning function 00 00 Hitachi standard data 01 auto tuned data Haga Motor dalaselection ang motar 02 auto tuned data with online auto tuning function o0 x us 4 86 H003 Motor capacity 1st motor 0 20 to 90 00 kW lt 0 20 to 160 kW gt Factory setting x x H203 Motor capacity 2nd motor 0 20 to 90 00 kW lt 0 20 to 160 kW gt Factory setting x x H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor 2 4 6 8 10 poles 4 x x H204 Motor poles setting 2nd motor 2 4 6 8 10 poles 4 x x H005 Motor speed constant 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 10 000 to 80 000 1 590 O O Eg H205 Motor speed constant 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 0
224. e start voltage 100 to 02 end frequency rate 100 x O A114 O2 L input active range end voltage 02 start frequency rate to 100 100 x Oo d g A131 Acceleration curve constants setting 01 smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling 02 x Q wai z A132 Deceleration curve constants setting 01 smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling 02 x O x 00 digital operator 01 keypad potentiometer 02 input via O 2 A141 Operation target frequency selection 1 03 input via Ol 04 external communication 05 option 1 06 option 2 02 x O g 07 pulse string frequency input O 2 00 digital operator 01 keypad potentiometer 02 input via O 4 13 w A142 Operation target frequency selection 2 03 input via Ol 04 external communication 05 option 1 06 option 2 03 x O 2 07 pulse string frequency input t 00 addition A141 A142 01 subtraction A141 A142 ANAS Operator selection 02 multiplication A141 x A142 00 x 2 3 A145 Frequency to be added 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 O fo 4 14 A146 Sign of the frequency to be added 00 frequency command A145 01 frequency command A145 00 O EL S curve acceleration g A150 ratio 1 0 to 50 25 x x oc Q s g A151 oN acceleration 0 to 50 25 y N FE EL S d ti uii og S curve deceleration 5 E Q A152 ratio 1 0 to 50 25 x x O me 2 ET 7 A153 EL S curve deceleration 0 to 50 25 x ratio 2 1 This setting is
225. eb www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions irra Monitoring and setting items Data resolution ee ial auto tuning 1 auto ion ie ea 1501h Auto tuning Setting Hoo1 Raw tation 2 auto tuning A oa EA N data 1 e data 2 1502h Motor data selection 1st motor H002 R W auto tuned data with online auto tuning m 1503h Motor capacity 1st motor H003 Raw 1504h Motor poles setting 1st motor H004 Rw TATAE 1 4 poles 2 6 poles 3 8 poles ea 1505h H005 high R W 1505h _ Motor speed constant 1st motor high RW to 80000 0 001 1506h H005 low 1507h Motor stabilization constant 1st H006 0 to 255 motor 1508h to f 1515h H020 high R W Rea ee constant R1 1st motor high Rw to 65530 0 001 Q 1516h H020 low 1517h H021 high R W EZETA constant R2 1st motor high RW to 65530 0 001 Q 1518h H021 low 1519h H022 high R W ea eee constant L 1st motor high ew to 65530 0 01 mH 151Ah H022 low 151Bh H023 high R W Motor constant lo high RAW to 65530 0 01 A 151Ch H023 low 151Dh H024 high R W Motor constant J high ew to 9999000 0 001 151Eh H024 low TIER es O ee 1524h H030 high R W 52an to constant R1 1st motor high RAW to 65530 0 001 Q 1525h H030 low 1526h H031 high R W 1526n constant R2 1st motor high Rw to 65530 0 001 Q 1527h H031 low 1528h H032 high R W Auto constant L 1st motor high RAW to 65530 0 0
226. ectable Output signal 1 Output signal 2 LOGx AND LOGx OR LOGx XOR l l j The necessary parameters depend on the logical output signal to be operated The following table lists the parameters to be set for each logical output signal selection selection selection Example To output the AND of the running signal 00 RUN and set the frequency overreached signal 02 FA2 as the logical output signal 1 LOG1 to the intelligent output terminal 2 Intelligent output terminal 2 C002 33 LOG1 Logical output signal 1 selection 1 C142 00 RUN Logical output signal 1 selection 2 C143 02 FA2 Logical output signal 1 operator C143 00 AND C142 C143 and C144 OC oa e result 2 B C021 to C025 148 C149 and C150 C151 C152 and C153 terminal function C154 C155 and C156 E e A operation result 6 e oe C158 and C159 Selection of 00 to 56 from the Selection of operation target 1 Logical output C142 C145 C148 data except LOG1 to LOG6 output ene to intelligent output terminals Logical output C143 C146 C149 Selection of 00 to 56 from the Selection of operation target 2 signal selection 2 C152 C155 C158 Pata except LOG1 to LOG6 output to intelligent output terminals Po AND Logical output C144 C147 C150 signal operator selection C153 C156 C159 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr co
227. ection C038 In one mode the LOC signal output is always enabled during the inverter operation In the other mode the LOC signal output is enabled only while the inverter is driving the motor for constant speed operation Data or range of data Terminal function C021 o Cues LOC Low current indication signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 g E Low current indication signal operation during constant speed operation 1 i Setting of the threshold current level Z a i signal C039 Ero ak at which to output the low current indication signal When 01 control circuit terminal is selected as frequency source setting A001 there is a case that ae does not recognize the speed as constant value due to sampling In this case adjusting is to be made by setting CO38 00 valid during operation or increasing analogue input filter A016 Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C038 Low current indication signal output mode selection C039 Low current indication signal detection level Output current A Low current indication signal detection level C039 Low current ON indication signal i 4 2 73 Inverter ready signal IRDY Rosa ede The inverter outputs the inverter ready IRDY signal when it is ready C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions for operation i e when it can receive an operation command C026 Alarm relay terminal function
228. ed In such cases the inverter status at tripping may not correspond to the apparent operation of the motor 5 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 2 Warning Codes The following table lists the warning codes and the contents of parameter readjustments Warning code Target function code Condition Basic function code 1001 1201 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 gt 1002 1202 Frequency lower limit setting A062 A262 gt 1004 i1204 1304 Base frequency setting A003 A203 A303 1 gt 1 005 Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 Maximum freguency setting 11005 1205 1305 A202 A220 A320 2 gt A004 A204 A304 H006 1206 1306 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 gt 1 1009 Home search speed setting P015 gt 1012 1212 Fequency lower limit setting A062 A262 gt 1015 41215 Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 s__ Frequency upper limit setting A202 A220 A320 2 A061 A261 1016 1216 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 gt 11019 _ lt Home search speed setting me Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 P015 1021 1221 lt e N 1025 1225 Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 E PORR eons A202 A220 A320 2 1031 1231 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 lt B 1032 2 232 Fequency lower limit setting A062 A262 lt 11035 1235
229. ed to control circuit terminals must be 20 m or less If the cable length exceeds 20 m unavoidably use a VX compatible controller CVD E insulated signal converter Separate the control circuit wiring from the main circuit wiring power line and relay control circuit wiring If these wirings intersect with each other unavoidably square them with each other Otherwise the inverter may malfunction Twist the cables connected from a thermistor to the thermistor input terminal TH and terminal CM1 and separate the twisted cables from other cables connected to other common terminals Since very low current flows through the cables connected to the thermistor separate the cables from those power line cables connected to the main circuit The length of the cables connected to the thermistor must be 20 m or less PLC When connecting a contact to a control circuit terminal e g an intelligent input terminal use a relay contact e g crossbar twin contact in which even a very low current or voltage will not trigger any contact fault When connecting a relay to an intelligent output terminal also connect a surge absorbing diode in parallel with the relay Do not connect analog power supply terminals H and L or interface power supply terminals P24 and CM1 to each other Otherwise the inverter may fail 2 Layout of control circuit terminals H O2 AM FM TH FW 8 CM1 5 3 1 14 13 11 AL1
230. ee 4 a 1 4 1 3 Rotation direction minitoring d003 Pee eee Tete eee rete ete eee eee eee eet eee eee eee eee eee 4 2 1 4 1 4 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring d004 A071 A075 vevenerenens 4 1 4 1 5 Intelligent input terminal status d005 eee cecceccccceccceceneeceueeecucuccccecccececucuaceuecscceucususcusuanene 4 4 2 4 1 6 Intelligent output terminal status d006 cence eecececceccccccceccceeecucuccucccuaceccceceeucusuecucuaceueceaees 4 4 2 4 1 7 Scaled output frequency monitoring d007 b086 ee cececccccccccccccccccucuccucuaccuccccecucusueseceaues 4 i 2 4 1 8 Torque command monitoring d009 P033 P034 sssssuouusussusunsssssosuosusussssssossssosusuunusnssnn 4 3 4 1 9 Output voltage monitoring d013 ETTTTTITITITITITTT TT TTeTriTiirititiitrit ii iitititit itt tt eee ete 4 3 4 1 10 Power monitoring d014 PPPETITITITETETTTTiriTiiritititirietriiritititit ii rie iti ii iit tite teeter 4 3 viii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Contents 4 1 11 Cumulative power monitoring d015 b078 b079 PPP Eee eee eee eee eee 4 N 3 4 1 12 Cumulative operation RUN time monitoring d016 EEE e eee eee en eee en eeee een een en eeaaeseneea een eeenaae 4 3 4 1 13 Cumulative power on time monitoring d017 sn cnuccccccccccccccucccccucccccccccccccccuucccuccccuusssecess 4 4 4 1 14 Heat sink temperature monitoring d018 Pree eee eee T et eee rete ete eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 4 4 1 15 Motor tempe
231. eeeeeeeteeteeenteeeeteeenteesenneaes 4 96 4 2 102 Pulse Train frequency input streets teeteeseteeeete erste eteeee rete etee teen eeetenteeeeeenenneceeseteeteneneneaeey 4 97 4 3 Communication Functions PRRs PEU URES AGGRGNECUREST A CCAP eS E r a T T L A 4 98 4 3 1 Communication in ASCII mode r A T E A T A T 4 A 101 4 3 2 Communication in Modbus RTU mode CPL eT PETE E CELL TREE CEER Tre LE CR Tee CER CECE OCC Lr 4 a 114 4 4 About the emergency stop FUNCTION sertttetteete test eect tte ee ne eeeeee ae eeeeeeeeee ana eeeeeeeeeaeaceseeeeeeeeanneeneenenes 4 147 5 1 Error Codes and Troubleshooting E dais diss Slale See Geielele deus SeusenieeenleWecivaslauseuusileesssuebises suisse tule E 5 A 1 5 1 1 Error codes Sede ee bee A E T RA Ce eeeeVeeneecusrcessctveanneesdeceteeeCsestuedesnuuseestucetersduuuteeesucruddvveeusbareaues 5 eS 1 5 1 2 Option boards error codes See EAEE E es Wen eeee te ENE EAE EE Deus SusesGestbeubeautecreesteuturseesesbenueedn cus 5 S 5 5 1 3 Trip conditions monitoring CU eee eee eee ee eet een seweGedseusenueetecrersuCeenSebesuvetneuseuweuereGseuteeuveuseecucnnets 5 9 5 2 Warning Codes Peer e ee eee eee ee Puce teers nce eeeeCeeueeeeSeuebeettuasterteusceeeeeeentueseChucteecsuvctesteuccteustecrsdsvuutuessvenuws 5 10 xi Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Contents Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection PLETE TELE L ELC LETECEE LTE TTT RE
232. een 4 8 frequency to be added 4 14 frequency Upper limit nsee 4 24 GRO wee A e E Seated 4 53 function code display restriction 3 4 4 79 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com TUNCTION MOGE wi 22 5 24 stisct tie eet viattetagicsastisehases 4 7 TUZZYs2cditeteeetiie de eee ie eee 4 32 4 83 AA AE RE E E E ener ous 2 7 4 8 n EEE EE dha 4 72 m EE E E AT 2 8 2 22 heat sink overheat warning 4 62 4 71 heat sink temperature monitoring eeeeeeeeees 4 4 high torque multi motor operation 4 95 INitial SCPEQN cccecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeetaee 4 81 HAITIAN ZATION siese eree iaire Ereann 4 78 input terminal a b selection 0 4 48 4 63 input terminal response time 4 71 MspectoM e e a a a a eet ass 1 1 6 1 instantaneous power failure under voltage trip alarm enable 4 33 4 35 instantaneous power failure or undervoltage eceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeseeeenenees 4 33 intelligent input terminal 2 8 4 47 intelligent input terminal status 00 0 0 eee 4 2 intelligent output terminal 2 9 4 62 intelligent output terminal status eee 4 2 internal DC braking ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 4 20 inverter ready signal eeen 4 72 EE EE AEE AEA AAT 4 35 IRDY x ean tend ee an ee ea ores 4 72 cd Gresser reece hee ee ee 4 50 JOQQING PEE ETET Seedit 4 50 jump Center frequency 4 25 JIQ nan tie
233. egral time setting for nonstop operation at momentary power failure Data or range of data Disabling the nonstop deceleration function Enabling the nonstop Controller deceleration and stop on power loss b050 deceleration function Oooo o a DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss bost 0 0to1000 V y E Over voltage threshold during power loss 1 bosz 0 0to1000 V y Deceleration time setting during power loss bosa 0 01to3600 9 y OE Initial output frequency decrease during power loss b054 0 00to 10 00 Hz Proportional gain at DC voltage Proportional gain setting for nonstop operation at b055 0 00 to 2 55 constan control Only when momentary power failure 02 or 03 is specified for b050 Integral time at DC voltage Integral time setting for nonstop operation at b056 0 0 to 9 999 constant control Only when momentary power failure 10 00 to 65 53 02 or 03 is specified for b050 lt 1 gt nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure 0050 01 The nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure is the function making the inverter decelerate and stop the motor while maintaining the voltage below the overvoltage level over voltage threshold during power loss b052 when an instantaneous power failure occurs during the inverter operation To use this function remove the J51 connector cables from terminals RO and TO connect the main circuit terminals P and RO to each oth
234. en this status continues for 40 seconds If a problem occurs in the communication between the digital Communica operator and inverter the inverter will tion error display the code shown on the right When the retry after instantaneous power failure or tripping has been Waiting for enabled the inverter displays the code retry shown on the right while awaiting retry after an instantaneous power failure or tripping The inverter displays the code shown Power off jon the right when the inverter power is turned off When an operation direction has been restricted by the setting of b035 the inverter will display the error code shown on the right if the operation command specifying the restricted operation direction is input If the inverter has not tripped before the inverter displays a Restricted operation command Empty trip history R ERROR COMM lt 1 R ERROR COMM lt 2 RESTART absust _ 5 4 Check whether the option board is mounted correctly Refer to the Check the board mounting instruction Check whether the option board is used manual for correctly the SJ DG Check the instruction manual for the or SJ DN option board Check whether the power supply voltage has fallen Recover the power supply Check the MCB and magnetic contactors for poor contacts Replace the MCB and magnetic contactors Check whether the voltage across the P and N terminals
235. ensor When using the inverter to perform the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control and vector control with sensor for a motor of which the motor constants are unknown measure the motor constants with the offline tuning function When 00 Hitachi general purpose motor data is specified for the motor constant selection HO02 H202 the motor constants of Hitachi s general purpose motors are set as defaults When you drive a Hitachi s general purpose motor with the inverter you can usually obtain the desired motor characteristics without problems If you cannot obtain the desired characteristics adjust the motor constant settings as described in Section 4 2 92 or 4 2 93 If you intend to use the online tuning function described later be sure to perform offline auto tuning beforehand The offline auto tuning function applies only to the 1st motor and 2nd motor controls Do not apply this function to the 3rd motor control The motor constant data corresponding to the date of one phase of y connection at 50 Hz You should use off line auto tuning first by using factory default settings as long as you can There are some unusable functions and settings when using off line auto tuning Please see the following notices in detail Data or range of data po Disabling the auto tuning 01 Enabling the auto tuning without Auto tuning Setting motor rotation Enabling the auto tuning with motor rotation 5 Hitach
236. equency output current output torque frequency conversion data trip history input output terminal status electric power and others Other functions Free V f setting 7 breakpoints frequency upper lower limit jump center frequency acceleration deceleration according to characteristic curve manual torque boost level breakpoint energy saving operation analog meter adjustment start frequency setting carrier frequency adjustment electronic thermal function available also for free setting external start end frequency frequency rate analog input selection retry after trip restart after instantaneous power failure output of various signals starting with reduced voltage overload restriction initial value setting automatic deceleration at power failure AVR function fuzzy acceleration deceleration online offline auto tuning high torque multi motor operation sensorless vector control of two motors by one inverter Carrier frequency variation 0 5 to 12 kHz 0 5 to 8 kHz Protective functions Overcurrent protection overvoltage protection undervoltage protection electronic thermal protection temperature error protection instantaneous power failure protection phase loss input protection braking resistor overload protection ground fault current detection at power on USP error external trip emergency stop trip CT error communication error option board error and others Phone 800 894 7 2
237. equency enable A112 02 L input active range end frequency i i A101 Ol L input active range start frequency A113 02 L input active range start voltage following terminals A102 Ol L input active range end frequency A114 O2 L input active range end voltage O L terminal 0 to 10 V OI L terminal 4 to 20 mA O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V 1 Start end frequency settings for the O L and OI L terminals Item Function code Range of data Description O Ol L input active A011 A101 0 00 to Setting of the start frequency range start frequenc 400 0 Hz O Ol L input active 0 00 to Setting of the end frequency range end frequency BO Tein 02 400 0 Hz O Ol L input active Setting of the rate of the start frequency to the range start voltage A013 A103 0 to 100 external frequency command 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA O Ol L input active 3 Setting of the rate of the end frequency to the SONOS 0 to 100 external frequency command 0 to 10 V O to 20 mA Externally input start frequency The frequency set as A011 or A101 is output as the output frequency while the start frequency rate is OV Ol L input start A015 A105 0 to the value set as A013 or A103 frequency enable 0 Hz 01 0 Hz is output as the output frequency while the start frequency rate is 0 to the value set as A013 or A103 If the voltage of the signal to be input to the O L terminal is 0 to 5 V specify 50 for A014
238. er This protective function is enabled when the USP function is enabled When the inverter power is turned on this protective function detects the ground fault between the inverter output circuit and the motor to protect the inverter This function does not operate when a residual voltage remains in the motor Ground fault protection 3 This protective function determines an error if the input voltage is kept above the specification level for 100 seconds Input while the inverter is stopped overvoltage The inverter will trip if the DC voltage of protection the main circuit is kept above about 390 VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 780 VDC in case of the 400 V class models If an instantaneous power failure lasts 15 ms or more the inverter will shut off its output When the power failure duration is long the inverter assumes a normal power off If a restart mode has been selected and an operation command remains in the inverter the inverter will restart after the power is recovered Temperature The inverter will display the error code error due to shown on the right if the lowering of low cooling fan speed is detected at the cooling fan joccurrence of the temperature error speed described below If the main circuit temperature rises Temperature because of a high ambient temperature error or for other reasons the inverter will shut off its output Instanta neous power failure protection
239. er and connect the main circuit terminals N and TO to each other Use 0 75 mm2 or heavier wires for the connections If an instantaneous power failure has occurred while the inverter is operating the motor and the output voltage falls to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b051 or less the inverter reduces the output frequency by the initial output frequency decrease during power loss b054 once and then decelerates the motor for the deceleration time setting during power loss b053 If the voltage increases to an overvoltage level exceeding the over voltage threshold during power loss b052 because of regeneration the inverter enters the LAD stop state until the voltage falls below the overvoltage level Note1 If the over voltage threshold during power loss b052 is less than the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b051 the over voltage threshold during power loss will be increased to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss when the stop level is applied However the stored setting will not be changed And in case b052 is less than the supply voltage equivalent to rectified DC voltage which is square root 2 times supply AC voltage when power recovers while this function is activated inverter will be in the LAD stop status and cannot decelerate Stop command and frequency change command are not accepted until deceleration is completed Be sure to set b052 more than the st
240. er connected to the FM terminal Range of data FM terminal analog meter C105 50 to 200 Setting of the gain for adjustment FM monitoring 4 76 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 82 AM and AMI terminals You can monitor the inverter output frequency and output current via the AM and AMI terminals on the control circuit block The AM terminal outputs an analog voltage signal 0 to 10 V The AMI terminal outputs an analog current signal 4 to 20 mA Related code C028 AM siginal selection C029 AMI siginal selection C106 AM gain adjustment C109 AM offset adjustment C108 AMI gain adjustment C110 AMI offset adjustment 1 AM siginal selection AMI signal selection Select the signals to be output from the AM and AMI terminals among those shown below Full scale value Output frequency 0 to maximum frequency Hz 3 Output current 0 to 200 00 Output torque 1 0 to 200 0 to 133 75 of full scale is Output voltage equivalent to 100 Input power 0 to 200 Electronic thermal 5 selection LAD frequency 0 to maximum frequency Hz Sn C028 C029 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the AMI eae 09 Motor temperature motor temperature is 0 C or less General analog YA 2 4 Output only from the AMI terminal 0 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the Heatsink temperature motor temperature i
241. er selected function 11 no d001 to P131 no O O U012 User selected function 12 no d001 to P131 no O O 8 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Appendix Upgrading from the L300P Series The SJ300 series inverter is upwardly compatible with the L700 series inverter Therefore you can mount the control circuit terminal block board of the L300P series in the L700 series without removing the connected cables copy the parameter settings from the L300P series into the L700 series and use the option boards mounted in the L300P series for the L700 series without removing the connected cables 1 Control circuit terminal block board You can mount the control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal block board mounted in the block board of the L300P series into the L300P L700 series front view L700 series Note however that the backing plate is incompatible Procedure for replacing the control circuit terminal block board As shown in the figure on the right the Fixing screw e Fixing screw fixing screw locations on the control circuit terminal block board are common to the TE L300P and L700 series f Aeee To remove and install the control circuit EEEE terminal block board follow the steps 1 to 5 described below Fixing screw M3 x 2 Board guide pin x 2 Board guide pin Board guide pin
242. eration Otherwise you run the risk of burn injury The inverter allows you to easily control the speed of motor or machine operations Before operating the inverter confirm the capacity and ratings of the motor or machine controlled by the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury and damage to machine Install an external brake system if needed Otherwise you run the risk of injury When using the inverter to operate a standard motor at a frequency of over 60 Hz check the allowable motor speeds with the manufacturers of the motor and the machine to be driven and obtain their consent before starting inverter operation Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the motor and machine and injury During inverter operation check the motor for the direction of rotation abnormal sound and vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the machine driven by the motor 3 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation You can operate the inverter in different ways depending on how to input the operation and frequency setting commands as described below This section describes the features of operating methods and the items required for operation 1 Entering operation and frequency setting commands from the digital operator This operating method allows you to operate the inverter through key operations on the standard digital operator mounted in the inverter or an op
243. ercial power supply switching as shown on the right The inverter can be set up so that it will automatically retry operation at power on In such cases the CS terminal signal shown in the figures below is not required For details see the explanation of the reset RS function 4 2 29 Related code b003 Retry wait time before motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Sample connection diagram and timing charts for commercial power supply switching T EE 4 54 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Timing chart for switching from the inverter to the Timing chart for switching from the commercial power commercial power supply supply to the inverter a aw __ a ck of MC2 and Duration of the interlo o wS I MC3 0 5 to 1 second Inverter output Inverter output lt gt R Retry wait time b003 frequency Operation frequency 0 5 to 1 second a N Operation 4 2 49 Reset RS function The reset function allows you to recover the inverter from a tripped state To perform resetting press the STOP RESET key of the digital operator or turn the RS terminal off To use the control circuit terminal for resetting assign function 18 RS to an intelligent input terminal You can select the restart mode to apply after resetting with the restart mode
244. ernal DC braking Edge mode See examples 1 a to 6 a Level mode See examples 1 b to 6 b This setting is valid for the internal DC braking DC braking is started when the motor start command is input Unit kHz NOTE lt gt applied for 90 to 160kW 1 Carrier frequency for DC braking Use the DC braking carrier frequency setting A059 to specify the carrier frequency for DC braking But the raking power reduced is reduced when 3kHz up to 75kW or 5kHz 90 160kW are set as shown below For detailed decreasing ratio DC braking limiter is to be referred Maximum 70 braking 60 force 50 3 5 7 9 11 12 DC braking carrier frequency kHz DC braking force limiter 11 75kW 4 20 Maximum 0 braking 60 force 50 40 30 20 10 3456 7 8 DC braking carrier frequency kHz DC braking force limiter 90 160kW 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 External DC braking Assign function 07 DB to terminal function C001 to C008 Direct braking control by ON OFF of DB terminal when the setting of DC braking enable A051 is 00 Invalid and 01 Valid Adjust the braking force by adjusting the DC braking force setting A054 When you set the DC braking wait time A053 the inverter output will be shut off for the set period of delay and the motor will run freely during the period DC braking will be resta
245. erved i ve i Inaccessible Acceleration curve 12A5h A131 Rw hi smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling Deceleration curve i 12A6h A132 Rw hi smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling Reserved Inaccessible nna 0 digital operator 1 keypad potentiometer 2 input aa frequency 4141 R W via O 3 input via Ol 4 external communication 5 option 1 6 option 2 7 pulse train frequency input 4 132 BS SISHRENICIS wp Oo ou 128Dh_ 128Eh_ 128Fh_ hey T2A7ht Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions av Monitoring and setting items Data resolution AAT 0 digital TA keypad Paree Operation target frequency A142 R W input via O 3 input via Ol 4 external selection 2 communication 5 option 1 6 option 2 7 pulse train frequency input i 0 addition A141 A142 1 subtraction A141 12B1h as Peen oome Pw rw a acc 2 multiplication A141 x A142 12B2h e E E Aetna 12BSh A145 high RW To to 40000 0 01 Hz 12B4h F to be added A145 low Sign of the frequency to be 00 frequency command A145 01 frequency eem o o s EL S curve 12B9h acceleration deceleration ratio 1 A150 aw fo 10 50 EL S curve acceleration deceleration ratio 2 R W 0 to 50 EL S curve 12BBh deceleration deceleration ratio 1 Alae rw Jo 10 50 EL S curve 12BGh deceleratio
246. esenereeseesenenees 5 5 extended function MOE eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeee 3 9 external analog iNPUt 0 00 2 eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeees 4 12 external DC braking cceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 4 20 external thermistor 4 75 external Tripa erias n aera eiea 4 58 F Rycistatsin tii inet ae 4 58 BTM es chat oats teat deeohe E E EE Dead 4 52 factory default Setting ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeereneeees 4 78 FA1 FA2 FA3 FA4 FAS eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 64 FBV Acie ean Sane eens feedback serv keel eee So ee ethene feed forward selection FM eaae Recto ete Sec tect athe bat Ss FOGS erste E E aac feisiahlasessutenieeeadieaas forcible operation forcible terminal operation eee 4 52 TOP CIG ieee es sue E EA cucures cascateadh ahleene 4 92 forward rotation signal 4 72 aE EEA T gene edd age 4 71 free setting of electronic thermal CharacteristiC cccceeececesecceeeeseeeeeesieeeess 4 38 free V f CharacteristiC eeceeeesseeeeeneeereneees 4 17 free r n SUOP irca a ian e eaaa 4 9 4 53 frequency addition eeeeeeeeeeeeeererenee 4 14 frequency arrival setting for accel ee 4 64 frequency arrival setting for decel ee 4 64 TrEQUGMGY IMT eesi ox sesyoteneeceeverse peedeuetete atecess 4 24 frequency lower limit 4 24 frequency matching ec 4 33 4 53 4 55 frequency operation 4 13 frequency reached signal n e 4 64 frequency scaling conversion factor 4 2 frequency source setting se
247. etung 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 o o 4 10 2nd motor Fade Acoeleraton 1 time settng 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 o o 4 10 3rd motor F003 Deceleration 1 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 O Oo 4 10 F203 Deceleration time setting 4 10 ond motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 O O F803 Deceleration ime setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 o o ai 3rd motor F004 Keypad Run key routing 00 forward rotation 01 reverse rotation 00 x x 4 7 8 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings 8 4 Extended Function Mode Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed or not or not 00 keypad potentiometer 1 01 control circuit terminal block A001 Frequency source setting 02 digital operator 03 RS485 04 option 1 05 option 2 02 x x 4 8 06 pulse string input 07 easy sequence 10 operation function result A 01 control circuit terminal block 02 digital operator 03 RS485 y 7 A002 Run command source setting 04 option 1 05 op
248. f Attribute 17 in pss r Check whether the Attribute 17 in the the Instance 1 of the Control Supervisory it gi Instance 1 of Class 29 is 1 If so clear External trip jobject is set to 1 the inverter will shut Sa the bit to 0 off its output and display the error code shown on the right If timeout occurs during the Check whether the option board has been Inverter communication between the inverter and id z disconnected from the inverter communicatio DeviceNet option board the inverter will n error shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right Note If the option board does not operate normally confirm the DIP switch settings on the option board Functions of the DIP switches on the DeviceNet option board SJ DN Setting of DeviceNet baud rate DIP switches No 1 and No 2 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps DIP switch setting Setting of MAC ID DIP switches No 3 to No 8 Dip switch setting The left most switch indicates the highest order bit of MAC ID Therefore the s MAC ID example of switch settings shown on the left indicates the following MAC ID 1 0 9 9 0 2 0 2 E y 9 hexadecimal 41 decimal NA32 NA6 NAS NAS NA2 NAI NA32 NAI6 NA8 NA4 NA2 NAI Note For details refer to the instruction manual for the option board 5 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes
249. f the change in the output frequency Output voltage 100 Output frequency Hz 0 Base Maximum frequency frequency 2 Reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power of VP This control system is suited when the inverter is used with equipment e g fan or pump that does not require a large torque at a low speed Since this control system reduces the output voltage at low frequencies you can use it to increase the efficiency of equipment operation and reduce the noise and vibrations generated from the equipment The V f characteristic curve for this control system is shown below Output voltage 100 0 Output frequency Hz 10 of base Base Maximum frequency frequency frequency UY r Period While the output frequency increases from 0 Hz to the 10 of the base frequency the output voltage follows the constant torque characteristic Example If the base frequency is 60 Hz the constant torque characteristic is maintained within the output frequency range of 0 to 60 Hz Period 6 While the output frequency increases from the 10 of base frequency to the base frequency the output voltage follows the reduced torque characteristic In other words the output voltage increases according to the 1 7th power of the output frequency Period While the output frequency increases from the base frequency to the maximum frequency the output voltage is constant 4 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723
250. f the motor The inverter will trip for b013 b213 b313 Electronic thermal characteristic overheat protection according fo he setings DO15 0017 0019 Free setting electronic thermal This function provides optimum overheat protection that is also frequency 1 2 3 designed with the lowering of the motor s cooling performance b016 b018 b020 Free setting electronic thermal at low speeds in mind corrent CUA 3 You can configure this function so that the inverter outputs a warning signal before it trips for electronic thermal protection C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C061 Electronic thermal warning level setting 1 Electronic thermal level Range of data Electronic thermal setting calculated within b012 b212 b312 ue x rated current to See the example below the inverter from current 1 0 x rated current output Example Setting on the L700 185LFF 11 75kW Example Setting on the L700 900HFF 90 160kW Rated current 73 A Rated current 160 A Range of setting 14 6 A 20 to 73 0 A 100 Range or setting 32 0 A 20 10 160 A110076 i ic th i When 73 A is set as the electronic thermal setting b012 eens ae nes Saronio erma setting or oer a b012 the time limit characteristic is as shown on the the time limit characteristic is as shown on the right right Trip time s Trip time s 60 60 0 5 0 5 0 7
251. frequency This function restricts the input of frequency commands that specify any frequencies outside the upper and lower limits Always set the upper limit before setting the lower limit Also be sure to keep the frequency upper limit A061 A261 larger than the frequency lower limit A062 A262 Be sure that upper limit lower limit does not exceed Maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 Be sure to set output frequency F001 and multiple speed 1 to 15 A021 to A035 in between uppelimit and lower limit If 0 Hz is set for the frequency upper and lower limits they will not operate The frequency limit setting function is disabled when the 3rd control system is selected Related code A061 A261 Frequency upper limit setting 1st 2nd motors A062 A262 Frequency lower limit setting 1st 2nd motors Range of data Frequency upper limit setting 0 00 or a frequency more than the a A061 A261 frequency lower limit setting up to the ee ees Horie maximum frequency Hz p q y 0 00 or a frequency not less than the y Ekia niak y lower A062 A262 starting frequency up to the frequency Senga oe limitiofthe 9 upper limit setting Hz p q y 1 When the O L or OI L terminal is used Output frequency Hz If O V or 4 mA is input as the frequency command when a frequency lower limit has been set for the frequency lower limit setting A062 the inverter will output the set frequency Maximum frequency A004 A204 Frequency co
252. function C021 to C025 52 RVR Reverse rotation signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 Output frequency Hz Forward rotation signal Reverse rotation signal 4 2 76 Major failure signal MJA Related code The inverter outputs the major failure MJA signal in addition to C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions an alarm signal when it trips because of one of the errors listed C26 Alarm relay terminal function below This signal function applies to the tripping caused by hardware No Error code Description 1 E10 CT error 2 E11 CPU error 3 E14 Ground fault protection 4 E20 Temperature error due to cooling fan fault 5 E23 Gate array communication error 6 E25 Main circuit error Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 53 MJA Major failure signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 4 73 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 77 Window comparators WCO WCOI WCO2 detection of terminal disconnection ODc OIDc O2Dc Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to terminal 15 tunctions The window comparator function outputs C026 Alarm relay terminal function h h i f logi p O b060 b063 b066 Maximum limit level of window comparators O Ol O2 signals when the values of analog inputs O b061 b064 b067 Minimum limit level of window comparat
253. g D092 eeereeerererersrsrerererererrrererersrsrsrenrernrereterererersnntnt 4 46 4 2 39 Intelligent input terminal setting SET SET3 C001 to C008 verreesen 4 47 4 2 40 Input terminal a b NO NC selection C011 to CO18 CO19 rrrrrrtreterterttreteettetteetteees 4 48 4 2 41 Multispeed select setting CF1 to CF4 and SF1 to SF7 A019 A020 to A035 C001 toC008 PPPTTTTTITITITITTTiTTTTirititiiTititii iit eii ii iititititit ii iii itt iii iii i tiie 4 z 48 4 2 42 Jogging JG command setting A038 A039 C001 to C008 srt tttttstettttttettttteetees 4 50 4 2 43 2nd 3rd motor control function SET and SETS srssesesesesesesseetitstettetateteateeeeentenenees 4 51 4 2 44 Software lock SFT function 6031 C001 to COO8 str stttttttttttttttttetteettetteeeteeetenees 4 52 4 2 45 Forcible operation from digital operation OPE function A001 A002 C001 to C008 E a tues acchenseueuntcuwe see baedee tub daueeee mnadceuba E AA EA 4 52 4 2 46 Forcible operation from terminal F TM function A001 A002 C001 to C008 4 52 4 2 47 Free run stop FRS function b088 b033 b007 b028 to b030 C001 to C008 4 53 4 2 48 Commercial power source switching CS function 0003 b007 C001 to C008 4 54 4 2 49 Reset RS function b003 b007 C102 C103 C001 to C008 vrrrrrrerrtertetteteettet teres 4 55 4 2 50 Unattended start protection USP function C001 to C008 ereeeeseeseereerrersrerrereeeseen 4 57 4 2 51 Remote control function UP and DWN C101 C001 to
254. g for deceleration 2 The signal hysteresis at acceleration with function 06 FA3 or 25 FA5 set is as follows When the signal is on set frequency 1 of maximum frequency Hz When the signal is off set frequency 2 of maximum frequency Hz The signal hysteresis at deceleration with function 06 FA3 or 25 FA5 set is as follows When the signal is on set frequency 1 of maximum frequency Hz When the signal is off set frequency 2 of maximum frequency Hz Range of data Frequency arrival setting for 0 0 Hz Disabling the output of frequency accel Frequency arrival setting C042 C045 for acceleration 2 0 01 to 400 0 Hz Enabling the output of frequency Frequency arrival setting for 0 0 Hz Disabling the output of frequency decel Frequency arrival setting C043 C046 0 01 to 400 0 Hz Enabling the output of frequency for deceleration 2 4 64 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 1 Signal output when the constant speed frequency is reached 01 FA1 The inverter outputs the signal when the output frequency reaches the frequency specified by a frequency setting F001 A020 A220 or A320 or multispeed setting A021 to A035 fon 1 of maximum frequency Set frequency foff 2 of maximum frequency ie 5 und Output frequency was Example Maximum frequency fmax
255. g machine that limits the motor shaft rotation the allowable rotation limit may be exceeded during auto tuning and the machine may be damaged To avoid this problem specify 01 auto tuning without motor rotation for the Auto tuning Setting H001 f If the no load current is unknown operate the motor at 50 Hz in a V f characteristic control mode to measure the motor current with current monitor Then set the measured current as the control constant H023 or H223 before auto tuning 5 Even when 01 auto tuning without motor rotation is specified for the Auto tuning Setting H001 the motor may rotate slightly during auto tuning 6 When performing the auto tuning for a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than that of the inverter enable the overload restriction function and set the overload restriction level to 1 5 times as high as the rated current of the motor Operating procedure 1 Specify 01 or 02 for the Auto tuning Setting H001 It is recommended to use keypad as a source of run command A002 If you turn on the run command or turn off during auto tuning auto tuning will get terminated abnormally See note 5 2 Input an operation command When the operation command is input the inverter performs an automatic operation in the following steps 1 First AC excitation The motor does not rotate 2 Second AC excitation The motor does not rotate 2 3 First DC excitation The motor does not rotat
256. g of C031 to C035 Power supply Output signal 00 ON ON Electric characteristics a contact OFF Between each terminal and CM2 OFF Voltage drop when turned on 4 V or less ON Allowable maximum voltage 27 VDC 01 ON b contact OFF Allowable maximum current 50 mA OFF 2 Specifications of alarm relay terminal The alarm relay terminal uses a normally closed NC contact that operates as described below Ps is cee inverter Example of operation as an alarm output terminal Setting Power Inverter Output terminal state Resistance load Inductive load of C036 supply status AL1 ALO AL2 ALO Maximum contact 250 VAC 2A 250 VAC 2A i VD A VDC 8A SN Error Closed Open AL1 ALO capacity 30 VDC 3 30 VDC 8 00 Normal Open Closed Minimum contact 100 V AC 10 mA OFF Open Closed capacity 5 VDC 100 mA Error Open Closed Maximum contact 250 VAC 1A 250 VAC 0 2 A ON 01 Normal Closed Open het capacity 30 VDC 1A 30 VDC 0 2A default OFF Open Closed Minimum contact 100 VAC 10 mA capacity 5 VDC 100 mA 4 63 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 60 Running signal RUN Related code While the inverter is operating it outputs the running RUN C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions signal via an intelligent output terminal 11 to 15 or the alar
257. g of the thermal resistance level p b099 0 to 9999 Q according to the thermistor specifications at setting a which to trigger tripping Thermistor input tuning C085 0 0 to 1000 Setting for gain adjustment Note Specifying 01 for the thermistor for thermal protection control b098 without an external thermistor connected makes the inverter trip 4 75 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 81 FM terminal You can monitor the inverter output frequency and output current via the FM terminal on the control circuit terminal block The FM terminal is a pulse output terminal ios IFM terminal anal 1 FM siginal selection ne Select the signal to be output from the FM terminal among those shown below Related code C027 FM siginal selection b081 FM terminal analog meter adjustment C030 Digital current monitor reference value If you select 03 digital output frequency connect a digital frequency counter to the FM terminal To monitor other output signals use an analog meter Full scale value 0 0 0 0 0 0 Output frequency See example 1 0 to maximum frequency Output current See example 1 0 to 200 1 Hz Output torque 1 See example 1 0 to 200 Digital output frequency See example 2 0 to maximum frequency Hz 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the motor temperature is 0 C or les
258. g the data on tle one display ey after changing the data ONO a OTO Data display l re ii 3 0 0 0 Data display ore an Ho Er ang ONO O T Extended function mode B Extended function mode C Extended function mode H Extended function mode P RN 431 For the display and key tox mos ent mm eco Operation in extended function mode U see the next page O es Se Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 3 Code data display and key operation in extended function mode U The extended function mode U differs in operation from other extended function modes because the extended function mode U is used to register or automatically record other extended function codes as user specified U parameters Key operation and Key operation and Key operation ana transition Key operation and transition of codes on transition of codes on of codes on display when transition of codes on z z displaying extended function h i display in monitor or display in extended Taide paravicters from the display in monitor function mode function mode U extended function mode U function or extended
259. h This function rewrites data in sequential coils Example When updating the status of the intelligent input terminals 1 to 6 of the inverter at slave address 5 The status of the intelligent input terminals is updated to the status shown in the following table Intelligentinputterminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coilnumber_ 7 8 9 10 n 12 Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample hexadecimal setting 1 Slave address 1 05 Xe Cimal 2 Function code OF 1 Slave address 05 3 Starting coil number 00 2 Function code OF upper digit 2 3 Starting coil number upper digit 00 4 Starting coil number 06 4 Starting coil number lower digit 06 lower digit 2 5 Number of coils upper digit 00 5 Number of coils upper digit 00 6 Number of coils lower digit 06 6 Number of coils lower digit 06 7__CRC 16 code upper digit 34 7 Number of data bytes 3 02 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 4C 8 Updating data upper digit 3 17 9 Updating data lower digit 3 00 10 CRC 16 code upper digit DB 11 CRC 16 code lower digit 3E 1_If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return any response 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to which the data is to be written first 3 The updating data consists of the upper and lower digits Even when updating an odd number of data bytes add 1 to the number of data bytes to make it an even
260. has fully discharged electricity Note 2 When the measured terminal is nonconductive the tester reads a nearly infinite resistance The tester may not read the infinite resistance if the measured terminal flows a current momentarily under the influence of the smoothing capacitor When the measured terminal is conductive the tester reading is several ohms to several tens of ohms The measured values may vary slightly depending on the types of circuit devices and tester However if the values measured at the terminals are almost the same the inverter and converter circuits have adequate quality Note 3 Only inverter models with capacity of 30 kW or less have the BRD circuit Tester polarity Measurement result red black D1 R PD Nonconductive PD R Conductive S PD Nonconductive BRD circuit D2 PD S Conducti gt _ PDP RB 1 Seed onductive Converter circuit 1 Inverter circuit 3 Se E Oo O 1 2 D3 T PD Nonconductive PD T Conductive H 5 D R N Conductive N R Nonconductive i o DE S N Conductive i N S Nonconductive i D6 T N Conductive N T Nonconductive TRI U P Nonconductive P U Conductive 1 l V P Nonconductive 1 TR2 E P V Conductive i 8 TR3 Ww P Norniconductive 9 P Ww Condiictive 4 fae erat ie Beetle oe ee aa oO z N tra U Conductive 2 N U Nonconductive V N Conductive TR 5 N V Nonconductive W
261. he motor current reaches the overload restriction level This function prevents the moment of inertia from excessively increasing during motor acceleration and prevents the inverter from tripping because of overcurrent even when the load changes suddenly during the constant speed operation of the motor You can specify two types of overload restriction operation by setting functional items b021 0022 and b023 and functional items b024 b025 and b026 separately To switch the overload restriction operation between the two settings setting with b021 b022 and b023 and setting with b024 b025 and b026 assign function 39 OLR to an intelligent input terminal Turn the OLR signal on and off to switch between the two settings The overload restriction level specifies the current at which to trigger the overload restriction function The deceleration rate at overload restriction specifies the length of time to decelerate the motor from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz When this function operates during deceleration the acceleration time is prolonged over the set time If the value set as the deceleration rate at overload restriction b023 b026 is too small the inverter automatically decelerates the motor even during acceleration because of the overload restriction and may trip because of the overvoltage caused by the energy regenerated by the motor If this function operates during acceleration and the output frequency
262. he setting of b017 When 11 to 75kW Trip time s x setting of b018 rated current x 109 y setting of b018 rated current x 120 z setting of b018 rated current x 150 3 Thermal warning You can configure this function so that the inverter outputs a warning signal before the electronic thermal protection operates against motor overheat You can also set the threshold level to output a warning signal with the electronic thermal warning level setting C061 To output the warning signal assign function 13 THM to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 Disabling the warning output Electronic thermal r warning level setting C061 1 to 100 1 rout ibs aut level to output IS 1 Set the ratio of the warning level to the integrated value of the electronic thermal characteristic A setting of 100 corresponds to the inverter trip due to overload error code E05 4 39 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 30 Overload restriction overload notice 1 Overload restriction function The overload restriction function allows you to make the inverter monitor the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation and automatically reduce the output frequency according to the deceleration rate at overload restriction when t
263. he voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly 4 53 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Example 3 Restarting with active matching frequency wooo y y d n a es b028 Output current Ta Deceleration according to the setting of b029 Inverter output frequency Frequency selected as the setting of b030 After the retry wait time 6003 the inverter restarts the motor with the frequency set as b030 The inverter subsequently decelerates the motor according to the setting of b029 while maintaining the output current at the level specified for b029 When the output voltage matches the frequency the inverter re accelerates the motor up to the frequency that was set when the inverter shut off the output to the motor before the restart If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it restarts the motor with input frequency reduce Motor speed the setting of b028 003 os 4 2 48 Commercial power source switching CS function The commercial power source switching function allows you to switch the power supply between the inverter and commercial power supply to your system of which the load causes a considerable moment of inertia You can use the inverter to accelerate and decelerate the motor in the system and the commercial power supply to drive the motor for constant speed operation To use t
264. hen 01 enabling PID operation or 02 enabling inverted data output has been specified for function A071 PID Function Enable and the process variable PV PID feedback monitoring function d004 is selected the inverter displays the PID feedback data You can also convert the PID feedback to gain data by setting a PV scale conversion with function A075 Value displayed by function d004 feedback quantity x PV scale conversion A075 The PV scale conversion can be set by function A075 within the range 0 01 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 Display 0 00 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 1000 to 9999 in steps of 1 100 to T999 in units of 10 Related code d004 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring A071 PID Function Enable A075 PV scale conversion 4 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 5 Intelligent input terminal status Related code When the intelligent input terminal status function d005 is selected the do05 Intelligent input terminal status inverter displays the states of the inputs to the intelligent input terminals The internal CPU of the inverter checks each intelligent input for significance and the inverter displays active inputs as those in the ON state 1 Intelligent input terminal status is independent of the a b contact selection for the intelligent input
265. hen 01 is specified for b130 PI control is performed so that internal DC voltage is maintained at a constant level Setting a higher proportional gain b133 results in a faster response However an excessively high proportional gain causes control to diverge and results in the inverter easily tripping Setting a shorter integral time 6134 results in a faster response However an excessively short integral time results in the inverter easily tripping 4 42 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 33 Start frequency setting EREE The start frequency setting function allows you to specify the inverter pogai MALBE OROS D es Start frequency adjustment output frequency that the inverter initially outputs when an operation command is input Use this function mainly to adjust the start torque If the start frequency b082 is set too high the inverter will start the motor with a full voltage which will increase the start current Such status may trigger the overload restriction operation or make the inverter prone to easily tripping because of the overcurrent protection Range of data ul frequency b082 0 10 to 9 99 Hz Setting of the start frequency adjustment Output frequency Output voltage 4 2 34 Reduced voltage start function Related code The reduced voltage start function enables you to make the inverter b
266. her 2 Change to the extended function mode HiTacH sfe yZ Oz RUNO s PREO ox x Jf N LEEN MAQA Character d in the leftmost digit fourth digit from the right starts blinking y Press the A A001 is displayed key twice HITACHI SOR v RUNO oW PRGO og M 3 JN o ORO Character A is blinking Pressing the STR key determines the ae character Press the key to determine character A 3 Change the third digit of the code HMACHI ORO Character 0 in the third digit is blinking Since the third digit need not be changed press the STR key to determine the character 0 V7 AOD Damar PRGO kW key 7 Character 0 is determined A029 is displayed HITACHI ZETA PRGO key Character 9 in the first digit is blinking Press the amp key eight times or the key twice 5 Change the first digit of the code HITACHI Toe GTA PRGO OK Ky JO Ci 1 JO Character 1 in the first digit is blinking 2 Ot Press the key A021 is displayed HITACHI Age De PRGO 2 7N of Character 2 in the second digit is blinking A Press the ANG twice 4 Change the second digit of the code HITACHI RUNO otiz PREO Woo 13 BOG Ven i 8090 Character 0 in the second digit is blinking
267. his function assign function 14 CS to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the CS terminal is turned off with an operation command being input the inverter waits for the retry wait time before motor restart b003 adjusts the output frequency to the speed of the free running motor and then accelerates the motor with the adjusted frequency The start mode is the starting with matching frequency However the inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the motor speed is no more than half the base frequency or 2 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly 3 If the motor speed falls to the restart frequency threshold b007 the inverter will start the motor with 0 Hz See Section 4 2 27 Remark Mechanically interlock the MC3 and MC2 contacts with each other Otherwise you may damage the drive If the earth leakage breaker ELB trips because of a ground fault the commercial power will be disabled Therefore connect a backup power supply from the commercial power line circuit ELBC to your system if needed Use weak current type relays for FWY RVY and CSY The figures below show the sequence and timing of operations for reference If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it starts the motor with matching frequency increase the retry wait time before motor restart b003 For circuit connections and switching operations see the sample connection diagram and timing charts for comm
268. i general purpose motor data Motor data selection H002 H202 Automatically tuned data 02 Automatically tuned data online auto tuning enabled 7216 90 0 KW lt 02 16 TOOKW s Motor poles setting HoowHo04 _2 4 6 8 or10 poes Auto constam Ri Hosomeso _0 000 06558 0 SSCS Auto constat R2 Hosimas1 ooo0we5530 O o o Auto constam Hoszmes2 0 0010 655 3 mH o o Auto constato Hossmess ooowess SSS Auto constat J Hosamasa 0 00 to 9999 tom O OoOO S Base frequency 30 to maximum frequency setting 00 E 66 braking ero or nabing DC braking 200 215 220 230 or 240 Selectable only for 200 V class models POs Selectable only for 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 models When using this function follow the instructions below 1 Adjust the settings of base frequency A003 and AVR voltage select A082 to the motor specifications When motor voltage is other than the altanatives set as motor voltage A082 outputr voltage gain A045 motor rated voltage Please set 00 constant torque characteristic VC to V F control mode A044 and do not set free V F setting 02 If you set free V F setting A044 auto tuning function does not work see note 6 2 This function can properly apply to only the motors in the maximum applicable capacity class of your inverter or one class lower than the capacity class of your inverter If this function is used for motors w
269. ible terminal operation function 4 52 53 KHC Cumulative power clearance Cumulative power monitoring function 4 4 55 FOC Forcing forcing function 4 92 56 MI1 General purpose input 1 57 Ml2 General purpose input 2 58 MI3 General purpose input 3 59 MI4 General purpose input 4 C001 to C008 60 MI5 General purpose input 5 61 MI6 General purpose input 6 62 MI7 General purpose input 7 63 MI8 General purpose input 8 65 AHD Analog command holding Analog command holding function 4 61 74 PCNT Pulse counter 75 PCC Pulse counter clear no NO Allocation none 1 Refer to programing software Ez SQ user manual 4 2 40 Input terminal a b NO NC selection Related code The input terminal a b NO NC selection function allows you to C011 to C018 Terminal 1 to 8 active state f s C019 Terminal FW active state specify a contact or b contact input for each of the intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 and the FW terminal An a contact turns on the input signal when closed and turns it off when opened An b contact turns on the input signal when opened and turns it off when closed The terminal to which the reset RS function is assigned functions only as an a contact 00 a contact NO ee ORTS b contact NC 00 a contact NO ike b contact NC 4 2 41 Multispeed select setting CF1 to CF4 and SF1 to SF7 The multispeed select setting function allows you to set multiple motor speeds and switch among them by way of s
270. igent input terminal assign function 09 2CH to one of the terminal functions C001 to C008 Acceleration 2 time A092 A292 0 01 to setting A392 3600 s See examples 1 and 2 Deceleration 2 time A093 A293 0 01 to setting A393 3600 s _ See examples 1 and 2 Changing the time by the signal input to the 2CH terminal See example 1 Select method to switch A094 A294 Chewing the time at the two stage acceleration deceleration frequency to Acc2 Decz2 profile See example 2 Valid only while the inverter is switching the motor between forward and reverse operations See example 3 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency A095 A295 0 00 to Valid when 01 is specified for the select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 transition point 400 0 Hz profile A094 A294 See example 2 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency A096 A296 0 00 to Valid when 01 is specified for the Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 transition point 400 0 Hz profile A094 A294 See example 2 Example 1 When 00 is specified for A094 or A294 Example 2 When 01 is specified for A094 or A294 A095 A295 o Output a A0967A296 frequency Output i frequency f Deceleration i time 2 time2 Acceleration i Deceleration Deceler Acceleration A celeration i time 2 time i Acceleration i i time1 i i time 1 i i time 1 i lt gt d gt lt j A F002 A092 A093 F003 F002 A092 A093 F0
271. ignal input via specified terminals Multispeed operation can be performed in two modes binary operation mode with up to 16 speeds using four input terminals and bit operation mode with up to eight speeds using seven input terminals Multispeed Adis 00 Binary operation mode with up to 16 speeds operation selection Bit operation mode with up to 8 speeds 0 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency Hz Easy sequence function 1 a Intelligent pulse counter 4 61 Related code A019 Multispeed operation selection A020 A220 A320 Multispeed frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A021 to A035 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C169 Multistage speed position determination time A020 A220 A320 A021 to A035 Multispeed 0 to 15 settings Setting of the frequency as each speed Carefully note that during multispeed operation the rotation direction specified in an operation command is reversed if the sum of the frequencies specified by the main frequency and auxiliary frequency commands is less than 0 Hz when the following settings have been made The control circuit terminal block 01 is specified for the frequency source setting A001 The external analog input 0 02 01 mode set by a combination of AT selection A005 02 selection A006 and AT terminal On Off state allows reversible motor
272. iiiirititii iti eie itt tii tiie ie 1 A 1 1 1 1 Inspecting the product PPTETITITITETITTTTTTTiTiT eT Tet Tiitititit iii iri titi iiiiee eet iii ieee 1 1 1 1 2 Instruction manual this manual PPPETITITITETTTTTe TT TTTiTiTitit iii ete ei iititit iret eie tet ii iti ete 1 w 1 Method of Inquiry and Product Warranty PPPTETETITITITIT PTET TTe Tr itiiTitititit rei iirititir iit e tee i iit 1 2 1 2 1 Method of inquiry PPPPETTTT TTP TTTTeririiririritiiriririt irri ritititit iti ti titi titi ieie ttle ti tite 1 z 2 1 2 2 Product warranty PPPTeTTTITITITITITETriTiritiiiititititit ii rirititititii etree iititit ett et eee tiie ee 1 A 2 1 2 3 Warranty Terms PPPTETETITITITITET ETT TTT Titi Titre iiiiiirititii iii rie tele litititit iii ttt Ti titi eee eee 1 x 2 Exterior Views and Names of Parts PPPTETTTITITITITTET TT TTrit tii ii ri iteit tii iititit iii ei rite tii tiie et eee 1 s 3 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring N N ho Installation eee ee ere Reet eee e reer errr rere ee rere er errr er errr er eer errr ere eeer errr er eee terete rere eter t rere teeter etree treet 2 1 2 1 1 Precautions for installation Peete teeter errr reer ere tere reer eee etree terete rere er ere rere rer er reer reer rere terre 2 2 2 1 2 Backing plate eee ere eter eee e reer eee errr eter er eee rere ere rere rer er ere eer errr ere rere terre eter eee e teeter eer eter re 2 5 Wiring OETETEEEEETETETETELELTLELELELELELELELELETELELELEELELLLELELELELELTLELELELELELELLLETELELELELLLELELLET
273. il info clrwtr com Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 Method of Inquiry and Product Warranty 1 2 1 Method of inquiry For an inquiry about product damage or faults or a question about the product notify your supplier of the following information 1 Model of your inverter 2 Serial number MFG No 3 Date of purchase 4 Content of inquiry Location and condition of damage Content of your question 1 2 2 Product warranty The product will be warranted for one year after the date of purchase Even within the warranty period repair of a product fault will not be covered by the warranty but the repair will be at your own cost if 1 the fault has resulted from incorrect usage not conforming to the instructions given in this Instruction Manual or the repair or modification of the product carried out by an unqualified person 2 the fault has resulted from a cause not attributable to the delivered product 3 the fault has resulted from use beyond the limits of the product specifications or 4 the fault has resulted from disaster or other unavoidable events The warranty will only apply to the delivered inverter and excludes all damage to other equipment and facilities induced by any fault of the inverter The warranty is effective only in Japan Repair at the user s charge Following the one year warranty period any examination and repair of the product will be accepted at your charge Even during the warranty perio
274. il info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 9 Base frequency setting 1 Base frequency and motor voltage With the base frequency setting and AVR voltage select functions adjust the inverter outputs frequency and voltage to the motor ratings Related code A003 A203 A303 Base frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A081 AVR function select A082 AVR voltaae select The base frequency is the nominal frequency of the motor Output Set a base frequency that meets the motor specification voltage Carefully note that setting the base frequency to less than AVR voltage 50 Hz may result in motor burnout select A special motor requires a base frequency of 60 Hz or 100 more Your inverter model may not be suitable for such a special motor and one with a larger capacity may be required Select the motor voltage that meets the motor specification Selecting a motor voltage exceeding the motor specification A Output frequency may result in motor burnout Base frequency Hz To switch the base frequency among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals see Section 4 2 38 Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching Item Range of data Base frequency A003 A203 30 to maximum frequency setting A303 1st 2nd 3rd motors Hz AVR volt lect A082 200 215 220 230 240 Selectable on 200 V class inverter models Cue ee 380 400 415 440 46
275. in a position about 5 cm distant from the bottom center point of the inverter and check that the measured temperature is within the allowable range Operating the inverter at a temperature outside this range will shorten the inverter life especially the capacitor life 4 Humidity Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the relative humidity goes above or below the allowable range 20 to 90 RH as defined by the standard inverter specification Avoid a place where the inverter is subject to condensation Condensation inside the inverter will result in short circuits and malfunctioning of electronic parts Also avoid places where the inverter is exposed to direct sunlight 5 Ambient air Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the inverter is subject to dust corrosive gases combustible gases flammable gases grinding fluid mist or salt water Foreign particles or dust entering the inverter will cause it to fail If you use the inverter in a considerably dusty environment install the inverter inside a totally enclosed panel 2 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 6 Installation method and position Install the inverter vertically and securely with screws or bolts on a surface that is free from vibrations and that can bear the inverter weight If the inverter is not installed vertically its cooling performance may be degraded and tr
276. inal selection PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 o o setting 4 59 H072 Terminal selection P proportional gain 0 00 to 10 00 1 00 setting H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 ms 100 Note lt gt indicate the setting range of 90 to 160kW 8 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed iq or not or not P001 eae mode on expansion card 00 tripping 01 continuing operation 00 x O 4 82 P002 ee mode on expansion card 00 tripping 01 continuing operation 00 x O P025 emperane compensator 00 no compensation 01 compensation 00 x Q 4 89 P031 Accel decel time input selection 00 digital operator 01 option 1 02 option 2 03 easy sequence 00 4 10 P044 DeviceNet comm watchdog timer 0 00 to 99 99 s 1 00 i 00 tripping 01 tripping after decelerating and stopping the motor ay P045 Baki action on DeviceNet comm 02 ignoring errors 03 stopping the motor after free running 01 x x 5 04 decelerating and stopping the motor 2 DeviceNet polled I O Output 2 EDAS instance number 20 21 100 21 X e x 7 A 5 P047 nesldho is polled I O Input instance 70 71
277. ing 27 UP remote control UP function C004 R W 28 DWN remote control DOWN function 29 DWN remote control data clearing 31 OPE forcible operation 32 SF1 multispeed bit 1 33 SF2 multispeed bit 2 34 SF3 multispeed bit 3 35 SF4 multispeed bit 4 36 SF5 multispeed bit 5 C005 R W 37 SF6 multispeed bit 6 38 SF7 multispeed bit 7 39 OLR overload restriction selection 40 TL torque limit enable 41 TRQ1 torque limit selection bit 1 co0o1 ONAA C002 Terminal 3 function 42 TRQ2 torque limit selection bit 2 C006 R w_ 43 PPI P PI mode selection 46 LAC LAD cancellation 50 ADD trigger for frequency addition A145 51 F TM forcible terminal operation 53 KHC cumulative power clearance 55 FOC forcing general purpose input 1 general purpose input 2 C007 R W 58 MI3 general purpose input 3 general purpose input 4 general purpose input 5 MI6 general purpose input 6 MI7 general purpose input 7 63 MI8 general purpose input 8 Goos PUNY 65 AHD analog command holding 74 PCNT pulse counter 75 PCC pulse counter clear 255 no no assignment 61 SSS Se 1409h__ Reserved 140Ah_ Reserved fo NO 1 NC C011 _ RW coi2 Rw C013 R W C014 R W Cois R W C016 RW aw fowo 1414n Reserveo oO ojojo 222 22 Ojoooo 2 2222 Slll o
278. ing 400 V class model Operating procedure 1 Confirm that all wirings are correct 2 Turn on the earth leakage breaker ELB to supply power to the inverter The POWER lamp red LED of the digital operator goes on 3 Select the control circuit terminal block as the device to input frequency setting commands by the frequency source setting function Display the function code A001 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a 2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 01 and then press the key once to specify the control circuit terminal block as the device to input frequency setting commands The display reverts to A001 4 Select the control circuit terminal block as the device to input operation commands by the run command source setting function Display the function code A002 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a 2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 01 and then press the key once to specify the digital operator as the device to input operation commands The display reverts to A002 5 Set the monitor mode To monitor the output frequency display the function code d001 and then press the SC key once The monitor shows the output frequency To monitor the operation direction display the function code d003 and then press the E key once The mo
279. ing of the restart mode after FRS b088 See Section 4 2 47 Stop mode bosi 00 Normal stopping stopping after deceleration selection Free running until stopping Related code b091 Stop mode selection F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors b003 Retry wait time before motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold b008 Restart mode after FRS Restart mode after pane 00 Starting with 0 Hz FRS Starting with matching frequency Restart frequency b007 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Starting with 0 Hz if the frequency matching result is threshold less than the set lower limit Retry wait time Time to wait until the restart of the motor after b003 0 3 to 100 s before motor restart free running ends 4 2 7 STOP key enable Related code When the control circuit terminal block is selected as the device to input b087 STOP key enable operation commands the STOP key enable function allows you to enable or disable the motor stopping and trip reset functions of the STOP key of the digital operator This function is effective only when the digital operator 02 is not specified for the run command source setting A002 see Section 4 2 5 If the digital operator 02 is specified for A002 the motor stopping and trip reset functions of the STOP key are enabled regardless of this setting STOP key enable Stop command with STOP key Trip reset command with STOP key Enabled Enabled 00 b
280. ion Ol input zero calibration O2 input zero calibration Output 11 on delay time Output 11 off delay time Output 12 on delay time Output 12 off delay time Output 13 on delay time Output 13 off delay time Output 14 on delay time Output 14 off delay time Output 15 on delay time Output 15 off delay time 1490h Output RY on delay time 1491h Output RY off delay time 1492h Logical output signal 1 selection 1 C142 rw Pane eA oes C021 to C026 except EEn 1493h Logical output signal 1 selection 2 C143 rw eame ATA C021 to C026 except EE 1494h Logical output signal 1 operator selection C144 R W_ 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR Ms i 1495h Logical output signal 2 selection 1 C145 rw ane E A to C026 except a 1496h Logical output signal 2 selection 2 C146 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except ee those of LOG1 to LOG6 1497h Logical output signal 2 operator selection C147 R W_ 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR e 1498h Logical output signal 3 selection 1 C148 oe ace C021 to C026 except ew 1499h Logical output signal 3 selection 2 C149 Rw pane e orct aii to C026 except if es ol 149Ah Logical output signal 3 operator selection C150 R W_ 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR a ee f 149Bh Logical output signal 4 selection 1 C151 rw pane ooa to C026 except iT 2 I 149Ch _ Logical output signal 4 selection 2 C152 aoe Too to C026 except EA 149Dh Logical output signal 4 operator selection C153 R W_ 0 AND 1 OR 2 XO
281. ion board Check for the noise sources located near the inverter Remove noise sources Check whether the communication cable has been disconnected Check the connectors Check for the phase loss power input Check the power supply input wiring Check the MCB and magnetic contactors for PH fail poor contacts Replace the MCB and magnetic contactors Check for the noise sources located near the inverter Remove noise sources Check the main circuit element for damage Check the output circuit for a short circuit Check the IGBT Check the inverter for abnormality Repair the inverter Check the output circuit for a short circuit Check the output cables Check for the ground fault Check the output cables and motor Check the main circuit element for damage Check the IGBT Check the heat sink for clogging Clean the heat sink Check whether the motor temperature is high Check the motor temperature Check whether the internal thermistor of the motor has been damaged TH Check the thermistor Check whether noise has been mixed in the thermistor signal Separate the thermistor wiring from other wirings Check whether an error has occurred in the external equipment since the emergency stop function was enabled Recover the external equipment from the error Check for the noise sources located near the inverter Rem
282. ipping or inverter damage may result Pee 7 Mounting in an enclosure Heat in the inverter rises from the under to the upper part of the inverter up with the fan built into the inverter and make it to the one without the obstacle even if the influence of heat is received please when you arrange apparatus up Moreover please usually arrange it sideways like the left side of the figure below when you store two or more inverters in the same enclosure The temperature in an upper inverter rises because of the heat of a lower inverter when it places one behind another unavoidably to reduce the space of the enclosure it causes the inverter breakdown and set it up please so that the heat of a lower inverter should not influence an upper inverter Please note it enough as ventilation ventilation and the size of the board are enlarged so that the ambient temperature of the inverter should not exceed the permissible value when two or more inverters are stored on the enclosure Inverter Plate Inverter Inverter Inverter Enclosure Enclosure Sideways Behind another 8 When mounting multiple inverters in an enclosure with a ventilation fan carefully design the layout of the ventilation fan air intake port and inverters An inappropriate layout will reduce the inverter cooling effect and raise the ambient temperature Plan th
283. ircuit power is on Lights to indicate that the inverter has tripped Lights to indicate that the inverter is operating Lights when the monitor shows a value set for a function This lamp starts blinking to indicate a warning when the set value is invalid Displays a frequency output current or set value Monitor lamps Indicates the type of value and units displayed on the monitor p Hz frequency V voltage A current kW electric power and percentage Lights up when the inverter is ready to respond to the RUN key RUN key enable LED When this lamp is on you can start the inverter with the RUN key on the digital operator Starts the inverter to run the motor This key is effective only when the operating device is RUN key the digital operator To use this key confirm that the operating device indicator lamp is on STOP RESET key Decelerates and stops the motor or resets the inverter from alarm status FUNC function key Makes the inverter enter the monitor function or extended function mode STR storage key Stores each set value Always press this key after changing a set value Switches the inverter operation mode among monitor function and extended function modes or increases or decreases the value set on the monitor for a function PRG program lamp 1 up or 2 down key 3 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation
284. is normal Check the voltage across the P and N terminals Check whether the relay plug is fitted correctly Check the relay plug for connection Check whether the digital operator is connected correctly Check the digital operator for connection Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 1 2 Option boards error codes When an option board is mounted in the optional port 1 located near the operator connector the error code display format is E6 on the digital operator or OP 1 on the remote operator When it is mounted in the optional port 2 located near the control circuit terminal block the error code display format is E7 on the digital operator or OP2 on the remote operator Error indications by protective functions with the digital option board SJ DG mounted Disol digital Display on Name Description SPa On digita remote operator operator ERR1 If timeout occurs during the communication between the inverter and digital option board the D n etror inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right Note The input mode is determined by a combination of DI switch and rotary switch settings If the option board does not operate normally confirm the DIP switch and rotary switch settings on the option board Functions of the DIP and rotary switches on th
285. istance between all motor terminals and the inverter s main circuit terminals U V megger ground terminal with a megger and W connect the motor wires for O three phases with one another and Trie measured ground resistance measure the ground resistance between the motor wires and the ground terminal 1 The operating life of the smoothing capacitor is under the influence of the ambient temperature Refer to Section 6 6 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve as a standard for the operating life until replacement 2 3 life but they do not indicate the guaranteed life of any parts 4 In case fan is locked by dust or particle it takes 5 to 10 seconds to restart even after the dust is removed 6 2 The operating life of the cooling fan varies depending on environmental conditions including the ambient temperature and dust Check the status of the cooling fan operation during daily inspections The standard operating life number of years or operation cycles and the data described in Section 6 6 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve are based on the expected design Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 3 Replacing Parts The inverter consists of many parts and it functions normally only when all the parts operate normally The table below lists the parts that may be subject to changes in characteristics and malfunctions after long time
286. ith other capacities correct constant data may not be obtained In such cases the auto tuning operation may not be completed If the auto tuning operation is not completed press the STOP RESET key The operation will end with an error code displayed AVR voltage select 4 86 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 If 01 enabling is specified for the DC braking enable A051 motor constants cannot be measured by offline auto tuning Specify 00 disabling for the DC braking enable The default setting is 00 4 f 02 auto tuning with motor rotation is specified for the Auto tuning Setting H001 confirm or observe the following a No problem occurs when the motor rotates at a speed close to 80 of the base frequency b The motor is not driven by any other external power source c All brakes are released d During auto tuning insufficient torque may cause a problem in the load driven by the motor for example a lift may slide down Therefore remove the motor from the machine or other load and perform auto tuning with the motor alone The moment of inertia J measured by auto tuning is that of the motor alone To apply the data add the moment of inertia of the load machine to the measured J data after converting the moment of inertia into the motor shaft data e lf the motor is installed in a machine e g lift or borin
287. ive operation RUN time monitoring function d016 is 9016 Cumulative operation RUN time selected the inverter displays the cumulative time of the inverter monnonng operation Display 0 to 9999 in units of 1 hour 1000 to 9999 in units of 10 hours 100 to 999 in units of 1 000 hours 4 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 13 Cumulative power on time monitoring Related code When the cumulative power on time monitoring function d017 is selected 4017 Cumulative power on time the inverter displays the cumulative time throughout which the inverter monitoring power has been on Display 0 to 9999 in units of 1 hour 1000 to 9999 in units of 10 hours 100 to T999 in units of 1 000 hours 4 1 14 Heat sink temperature monitoring Related code When the heat sink temperature monitoring function d018 is selected d018 Heat sink temperature the inverter displays the temperature of the internal heat sink of the monitoring inverter Display 0 0 to 200 0 in steps of 0 1 C 4 1 15 Motor temperature monitoring When the motor temperature monitoring function is selected the inverter displays the temperature of the thermistor connected between control circuit terminals TH and CM1 Use the thermistor model PB 41E made by Shibaura Electronics Corporation Specify 02 enabling NTC for the thermistor for thermal protection control fu
288. j SP A i I i RS485 i ke i i For terminating resistor Q I Option 1 Option 2 i i 1 C i Type D grounding for 200 V class model Z Type C grounding for 400 V class model See page 2 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 1 Explanation of main circuit terminals Symbol U R S T Connect to the AC power supply L1 L2 L3 Main powerinput Leave these terminals unconnected when using a regenerative converter HS900 series V W T1 T2 T3 Inverter output Connect a 3 phase motor i K De reactor connection Re the jumper from terminals PD and P and connect the optional power factor reactor P RB External braking Connect the optional external braking resistor RB resistor connection The RB terminal is provided on models with 30 kW or less capacity P N Regenerative braking Connect the optional regenerative braking unit BRD G Inverter around Connect to ground for grounding the inverter chassis by type D grounding for 200 V class g models or type C grounding for 400 V class models 2 Explanation of control circuit terminals Symbol Terminal name Electric property Analog power This common terminal supplies power to frequency command terminals O supply O2 and Ol and analog output terminals AM and AMI Do not ground this common terminal Frequency
289. jumper shaded in the L700 370HFF figure to enable disable the When not using the DCL EMC filter function do not remove the jumper from terminals PD and P RO and T0 M4 Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function Ground terminal M6 an Re A Other terminals M6 L700 450LFF L700 450HFF l RO and TO M4 NN NX Ground terminal M8 Enabling the EMC filter Disabling the EMC filter Other terminals M8 factory setting Ground terminal with jumper shaded in the G Jumper connecting figure to enable disable the G Terminals PD and P EMC filter function When not using the DCL L700 550LFF do not remove the jumper L700 550HFF from terminals PD and P L700 750HFF Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function N RO and T0 M4 a Ground terminal M8 Other terminals M8 Enabling the EMC filter Disabling the EMC filter factory setting 2 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal layout Inverter model char ge unp CE es G Jumper connecting G Terminals PD and P Ground terminal with jumper shaded in the When not using the DCL gt figure to enable disable the do not remove the jumper EMC filter function from terminals PD and P Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function L700 750LFF RO and TO M4 Ground terminal M8 Other ter
290. k the resistance between Remove all cables from the See Section 6 5 Method of Analog tester and converter terminals inverter s main circuit terminal block Checking the Inverter and circuit including Use a tester in 10 range mode to Converter Circuits Standard resistors o measure the following operating life of power Resistance between terminals R module IGBT IPM Diode and S and T and terminals P and N Thyristor until replacement 10 Resistance between terminals U cycles of starting and stopping V and W and terminals P and N 3 Smoothing 1 Check for liquid leak O Check visually There must be no abnormality Capacitance i found meter capacitor 2 Check that the relief valve does Target operating life until not protrude or swell O replacement 10 years 1 3 Relay 1 Check that no fluttering sound is Check by listening T generated during the relay fe ala must be no abnormality operation 2 Check the contacts for damage o Check visually There must be no abnormality found Control Operation 1 While performing a unit Measure the voltage between the The inter phase voltage balance Digital and operation of the inverter check o cables connected to the main circuit must be as follows multimeter protective the balance output voltage terminals U V and W 200 V class models 4 V or less __ rectifier circuits among the individual phases 400 V class models 8 V or less instrument and Waiter a ep ee a e
291. l data without updating the data even if it has been changed on display 1 The content of the display varies depending on the parameter type 2 To update numerical data be sure to press the key after changing the data 3 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 2 Example of operation in full display mode b037 00 All parameters can be displayed in full display mode The display sequence of parameters matches their sequence shown in Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Key operation and Key operation and Key operation and Key operation and transition of codes on transition of monitored transition of codes on transition of monitored display in monitor or data on display in monitor display in extended data on display in function mode or function mode function mode extended function mode Pressing the A or we key respectively scrolls up or down the code displayed in code display mode or increases or decreases the numerical data displayed in data display mode Press the A or key until the desired code or numerical data is shown To scroll codes or increase decrease numerical data fast press and hold the key Monitor 3 f 1 The content of the display varies depending on the parameter type 32 Monitor 2 To update numerical data be sure to press the a i k ft h in
292. l force produced in the machine becomes about 20 times as high as the motor shaft capacity the inverter may trip If this occurs reduce the carrier frequency Note 3 Even when the inverter is driving the same motor the actual acceleration deceleration time always changes according to current fluctuation Note 4 The selection of the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function is valid only when the control mode is a V f characteristic control mode When a sensorless vector control mode is selected the selection of this function is ignored normal operation is performed Note 5 When the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function is enabled the jogging operation differs from the normal jogging operation because of fuzzy acceleration Note 6 When the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function is enabled the deceleration time may be prolonged if the motor load exceeds the inverter s rated load Note 7 If the inverter repeats acceleration and deceleration often the inverter may trip Note 8 Do not use the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function when the internal regenerative braking circuit of the inverter or an external braking unit is used In such cases the braking resistor disables the inverter from stopping deceleration at the end of the deceleration time set by the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function Note 9 When using the inverter for a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than that of the inverter enable the overload restric
293. l time constant A074 PID derivative gain A075 PV scale conversion A076 PV source setting A077 Output of inverted PID deviation A078 PID variation range A079 PID feed forward selection d004 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C044 PID deviation level setting C052 Off level of feedback comparison signal C053 Onlevel of feedback comparison signal 00 Disabling the PID operation _ PID Function Enable A075 err a ie ee for unit conversion of PID feedback o0 Obki4t20ma OY L ZAO 20M PV source setting RS485 communication ot ree command pe a SSS Output Of inveucas Fp aa the inverted output deviation deviation gt ae jeter inverted reference to the target value pg ia me raetvale __ tae Ot level of Ieoubacs C052 0 0 to 100 0 Level to determine the FBV signal output comparison signal Onlevelof feedback C053 0 0 to 100 0 Level to determine the FBV signal output comparison signal refer 4 2 12 Frequency operation function PID feed forward selection 1 Basic configuration of PID control Feed Forward invalid 0 10V 0 20mA 10 10V Target value Oto 10V Deviation Operation 4 to 20 mA e quanti poo opremo ormal con o Kp 1 5 aad S 30 ees the inverter Sensor Feedback A a ee Transducer Kp Proportional gain Ti Integral time Td Derivative time s
294. le 7 a When the frequency set by the frequency command increases to the setting of A052 2 Hz or more the inverter stops DC braking and restores its normal output See example 7 a If the frequency set by the frequency command is 0 Hz when the start command is input via an analog input terminal the inverter will start operation with DC braking because both the frequency set by the frequency command and current output frequency are 0 Hz See example 7 b If the operation command signal start command is turned on when the frequency command specifies a frequency larger than the DC braking frequency A052 the inverter will start operation with the normal output Example 7 a Example 7 b Operation Operation command command A052 Frequency Frequeney command command Output Output frequency frequency How the inverter returns to the normal output varies depending on the setting of the DC braking edge or level detection for DB input A054 a Edge mode b Level mode Operation Operation command command A052 A052 Frequency Frequency command command Output Output frequency frequency 4 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 20 Frequency upper limit setting The frequency upper limit setting function allows you to place upper and lower limits on the inverter output
295. learance i a In the far left digit the lighting segments move round for about 2 seconds Note 1 The initialization operation does not initialize the analog input settings C081 C082 C083 C121 C122 and C123 and thermistor coefficient setting C085 Note 2 The initialization operation does not initialize the settings of easy sequence user parameters P100 to P131 4 78 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 84 Function code display restriction ae i Related code The function code display restriction function allows you to arbitrarily b037 Function code display restriction switch the display mode or the display content on the digital operator U001 to U012 User parameters 00 Fullidisplay Function specific display Function code display restriction User setting ia __03____ Data comparison display Basic display no No assignment User parameters U001 to U012 d001 to P131 Selection of the code to be displayed All codes are selectable 1 Function specific display mode If a specific function has not been selected the monitor does not display the parameters concerning the specific function The following table lists the details of display conditions Display condition Parameter displayed when the display condition is met A001 01 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C081 to C083 and C12
296. lection A051 invalid for auto tuning Note10 Do not start auto tuning with setting servo on 54 SON and forcing function 55 FOC to the intelligent terminals You should remove these functions and start auto tuning in this case Please set these functions after normal termination of auto tuning and confirming good motor rotation Note11 If you set control mode A044 to vector control with sensor 05 you should not set V2 control mode P012 to position control mode 01 APR 02 APR2 03 HAPR Do not also use torque control torque bias control You should use these functions after normal termination of auto tuning and confirming good motor rotation Note 12 If auto tuning has finished once turn off power source of inverter and turn on 4 2 92 Online auto tuning function The online auto tuning function allows you to compensate the motor constants for alterations caused by the rise of motor temperature and other factors to ensure stable motor operation The online auto tuning function applies only to the 1st motor and 2nd motor controls Do not apply this function to the 3rd motor control 00 Hitachi general purpose motor data When using this function follow the instructions below 1 Be sure to perform the offline auto tuning before the online auto tuning 2 Since the data for online tuning is calculated by the offline auto tuning perform the offline tuning at least once even when the inverter is used to drive a Hitachi general purpo
297. less Commit only a designated person to maintenance inspection and the replacement of parts Be sure to remove wristwatches and metal accessories e g bracelets before maintenance and inspection work and to use insulated tools for the work Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Never modify the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury 6 1 1 Daily inspection Basically check your system during the inverter operation to confirm that the motor is operating according to the settings on the inverter a 2 the installation environment is normal 3 the cooling system is normal 4 no abnormal vibrations and noise are generated 5 no equipment overheating and discoloration are found and 6 there are no unusual smells While the inverter is operating measure the inverter input power voltage with a multimeter to confirm that 1 the power supply voltage does not fluctuate often and 2 the voltages between the power supply wires are balanced 6 1 2 Cleaning Always keep the inverter clean When cleaning the inverter wipe off dirt and stains on the inverter surface lightly with a soft cloth dipped in a neutral detergent solution Note Do not use solvents such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol for cleaning These solvents cause the inverter surface to dissolve or the coating on the surface to peel off In particular never use a detergent or alcohol to clean the monitor
298. lligent output terminal setting You can assign the functions described below to the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 The intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 are used for open collector output and the alarm relay terminal is used for relay output You can select the a contact or b contact output for individual output terminals by using functions C031 to C035 and C036 When 01 3 bits or 02 4 bits is specified for the alarm code output C062 see Section 4 2 65 the alarm code output is assigned to output terminals 11 to 13 or output terminals 11 to 14 ACO to AC3 respectively Subsequently the settings of C021 to C024 are invalidated Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function Data Description Reference item Page 00 IRUN Running signal Running signal RUN 4 64 01 FA1 Constant speed reached Frequency arrival signals 4 64 02 FA2 Set frequency overreached 03 JOL Overload notice advance signal 1 Overload restriction overload notice advance signal 4 40 04 OD Output deviation for PID control PID function 4 26 05 JAL Alarm signal Protective functions 06 FA3 Set frequency reached Frequency arrival signals 4 64 07 OTQ Over torque Over torque signal 4 67
299. load If the electronic thermal overload monitoring exceeds 100 the inverter will trip because of the overload protection error code E05 Display 0 0 to 100 0 in steps of 0 1 4 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 Function Mode 4 2 1 Output frequency setting The output frequency setting function allows you to set the inverter output frequency You can set the inverter output frequency with this function F001 only when you have specified 02 for the frequency source setting A001 For other methods of frequency setting see Section 4 2 4 frequency source setting A001 If the setting of function A001 is other than 02 function F001 operates as the frequency command monitoring function The frequency set with function F001 is automatically set as the Multispeed frequency setting A020 To set the second and third multispeed s use the multispeed frequency setting 2nd motor function A220 and multispeed frequency setting 3rd motor function A320 or use function F001 for the setting after turning on the SET and SETS signals For the setting using the SET and SETS signals assign the SET function 08 and SETS function 17 to intelligent input terminals If the set output frequency is used as the target data for the PID function PID feedback data will be displayed in percent 100 indicates the maxim
300. lrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 44 Software lock SFT function Related code The software lock function allows you to specify whether to disable b031 Software lock mode selection _ rewriting of the data set for functional items Use this function to ie fo C008 Termin l 1 t0 8 Tas protect the data against accidental rewriting You can select the functional items to be locked and the method of locking as described below When using an intelligent input terminal for this function assign function 15 SFT to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 Function code Data SFT terminal o onor Disabling rewriting of items other than b031 when SFT is on or enabling rewriting when SFT is off na Disabling the rewriting of items other than b031 F001 A020 01 ON OFF A220 A320 A021 to A035 and A038 when SFT is on or enabling rewriting when SFT is off 02 _ Disabling the rewriting of items other than b031 of o Disabling the rewriting of items other than b031 F001 A020 A220 A320 A021 to A035 and A038 dS a a eee el operation 4 2 45 Forcible operation from digital operator OPE function Related code The forcible operation function allows you to forcibly enable the A001 Frequency source setting inverter operation from the digital operator when the digital operator is A002 Run comma
301. lt b106 Free setting V f frequency 1 to 4 6100 b102 b104 b106 gt Free setting V f frequency 5 Free setting V f frequency 6 b110 lt b108 Free setting V f frequency 1 to 5 6100 b102 b104 b106 gt Free setting V f frequency 6 b108 b110 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 3 b017 b019 lt Ta E thermal i Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 6015 gt Free setting electronic thermal 1120 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 b019 lt frequency 2 b017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 2 b015 b017 gt r Tee seiting SIEctonIc thermal frequency 3 b019 The inverter displays a warning code when the data set as a target function code satisfies the condition specified in the Condition column in relation to the data set as the corresponding basic function code Each parameter target function code is readjusted to the data set as the basic function code by updating at the inverter start up 4 In this case the base frequency is rewritten at parameter readjustment If the base frequency is updated to an inappropriate value a motor burnout may result Therefore if the warning is displayed change the current base frequency data to an appropriate value 2 3 the Jump hysteresis frequency width minimum 5 9 These parameters are checked even when the digital operator 02 is not specified for the frequency source setting A00
302. ly decelerating the motor To use this function make the following settings Data or range of data 00 Disabling the BRD operation Setting of the dynamic braking usage ratio in units of 0 1 The inverter will trip when the set rate is exceeded ety lt Bs jes Related code b090 Dynamic braking usage ratio b095 Dynamic braking control b096 Dynamic braking activation level Dynamic braking usage ratio 0 1 to 100 0 ON ON ON lt BRD mi 100 seconds operation t1 t2 t3 Usage rate x 100 100 seconds 00 Disabling the BRD operation Enabling the BRD operation while the motor is running Dynamic braking b095 a Disabling the BRD operation while the motor is control stopped 02 Enabling the BRD operation regardless of whether the motor is running Dynamic braking b096 330 to 380 V 1 Level setting for 200 V class models activation level 660 to 760 V 1 Level setting for 400 V class models 1 The set dynamic braking activation level specifies the DC output voltage of the inverter s internal converter 2 Please refer P2 22 for minimum resistance of connectable resistor and BRD ratio 2 2 5 4 2 38 Cooling fan operation setting Related code The cooling fan operation setting function allows you to specify the b092 Cooling fan control operation mode of the inverter s internal cooling fan The cooling fan can be operated on a constant basis or only while the inverter is
303. m Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 67 Capacitor life warning signal WAC Related code The inverter checks the operating life of the capacitors on the o ae Aa a to 15 functions internal circuit boards on the basis of the internal temperature Dep Alarm relay termina tunetion and cumulative power on time You can monitor the state of the capacitor life warning WAC signal by using the life check monitoring function d022 If the WAC signal is output you are recommended to replace the main circuit and logic circuit boards Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 39 WAC Capacitor life warning signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 for on board capacitors 4 2 68 Communication line disconnection signal NDc This signal function is enabled only when ModBus RTU has been selected for the RS485 communication If a reception timeout occurs the inverter continues to output the communication line disconnection signal until it receives the next data Specify the limit time for reception timeout by setting the communication trip time C077 For details see Section 4 4 Communication Functions Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C077 Communication trip time External control equipment Inverter Monitoring timer ommunication trip time C077 Communication line l disconnection signal NDc Data or range of data Te
304. m relay terminal To use this signal function assign function 00 RUN to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 The inverter outputs the RUN signal even while operating the DC brake The following figure shows a timing chart for the signal output Output frequency i 4 2 61 Frequency arrival signals FA1 FA2 FA3 FA4 and FA5 The inverter outputs a frequency arrival signal when the inverter output frequency reaches a set frequency When using the inverter for a lift use the frequency arrival signal as a trigger to start braking Use the over torque signal as the trigger to stop braking Assign the following functions to five of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 01 FA1 constant speed reached 02 FA2 set frequency overreached 06 FA3 set frequency reached 24 FA4 set frequency overreached 2 and 25 FA5 set frequency reached 2 The hysteresis of each frequency arrival signal is as follows When the signal is on set frequency 1 of maximum frequency Hz When the signal is off set frequency 2 of maximum frequency Hz RUN Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C042 Frequency arrival setting for accel C043 Frequency arrival setting for decel C045 Frequency arrival setting for acceleration 2 C046 Frequency arrival settin
305. mail info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iv 03 command This command reads all monitored data from the inverter Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 03 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format Station No Data Bcc CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Data Data 104 bytes See Note 7 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 7 Monitored data Monitoring item Unit one Data size Description Output frequency Hz x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code a Output current A x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Rotation direction z 8 bytes 0 stopping 1 forward rotation or 2 3 reverse rotation 3 PID feedback data x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Intelligent input terminal 8 bytes See Note 7 2 Intelligent output terminal gt 3 8 bytes See Note 8 3 Frequency conversion z
306. minals M10 Enabling the EMC filter factory setting TO h Charge lump O L700 900 1600HFF R S T eee P N U Vw RO and TO M4 L1 L2 L3 41 T1 T2 T3 Ground terminal M8 Other terminal M10 H D Jumper connecting terminals PD and P 2 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Reference Leakage current by inverter with model EMC filter enabled or disabled reference data The table below lists the reference currents that may leak from the inverter when the internal EMC filter is enabled or disabled Leakage current is in proportion to the voltage and frequency of input power Note that the values listed in the table below indicate the reference currents leaking from the inverter alone The values exclude current leakage from external devices and equipment e g power cables The drive in the range from 90kW to 160kW doesn t have the switch to activate and deactivate the internal EMC filter They complies EMC directive C3 level in standard condition 200 V class model 400 V class model input power 200 VAC 50 Hz input power 400 VAC 50 Hz 11kW 18 5kW 55kW 11kW 18 5kW 55kW 90kW 15kW 45kW 75kW 15kW 45kW 75kW 160kW Internal EMC filter enabled Ca 48mA Ca23mA Ca23mA Ca 95mA Ca 56mA Ca 56mA Internal EMC filter disabled Ca
307. mit level hysteresis width 2 minimum of 100 to 100 Minimum limit level of b061 O 0 to maximum limit level hysteresis Pe b064 Ol width 2 maximum of 100 ree ee window comparators rae Setting of minimum limit level 0 01 02 b067 02 100 to maximum limit level hysteresis width 2 maximum of 100 Hysteresis width of b062 O otor lmaximurimit l vel iminim m imit Setting of hysteresis width for window comparators b065 Ol G imaximurn li ME OvO i aoe maximum limit and minimum limit level 2 maximum of 10 O OV02 b068 O2 levels b070 O 3 a Setting of the analog input value to be opan level at b071 Ol 0 to 100 or no ignore applied when WCO WCOI or WCO2 OI O2 disconnection b072 02 100 to 100 or no ignore ODe OlDe or O2De is output O Ol or 02 Max 100 Hysteresis width b062 b065 b068 Maximum limit level of window comparator b061 b064 b067 Analog operation level at disconnection b070 b071 b072 Minimum limit level of window comparator b060 b063 b066 Min O Ol 0 O2 100 WCO WCOI WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code C130 Output 11 on delay time C131 Output 11 off delay time C132 Output 12 on delay time C133 Output 12 off delay time C134 Output 13 on delay time C135 Output 13 off delay time
308. mmand OV 4 A 20 nA 2 When the O2 L terminal is used Maximum frequency A004 A204 Reverse rotation 10 V A062 Forward rotation a Maximum frequency ADO4 A204 If the frequency lower limit is used with the frequency command input via the O2 L terminal the motor speed with 0 V input will be fixed to the frequency setting of the frequency lower limit A062 for forward rotation or the frequency setting of the frequency lower limit A062 for reverse rotation as shown below a When operation commands are input via the control circuit terminal block A002 01 Terminal Motor speed with 0 V input via O2 terminal FW ON Frequency setting by A062 for forward rotation RV ON Frequency setting by A062 for reverse rotation b When operation commands are input from the digital operator A002 02 F004 Motor speed with 0 V input via O2 terminal 00 Frequency setting by A062 for forward rotation 01 Frequency setting by A062 for reverse rotation 4 24 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 21 Jump frequency function The jump frequency function allows you to operate the inverter so that it avoids the resonant frequency of the machine driven by the same Since the inverter avoids the motor operation with a constant output frequency within the specified range of the frequencies to jump when the jump freq
309. monitoring power on 03 d003 rotation direction minitoring 04 d007 Scaled output frequency monitoring 05 F001 output frequency setting Selection of automatic b039 00 Disable user parameter settings 1 01 Enable 1 Not displayed with the factory setting The following procedure enables you to turn the monitor display back to d Ht 0 or 08 Q 1 regardless of the current display mode Hold down the E key for 3 seconds or more The monitor shows d OQ fana 08 Q 1 alternately During this status press the E key The monitor will show only d Q Q or 2 0 Q 1 which is shown when the E is pressed 1 The monitor shows only when the motor driven by the inverter is stopped While the motor is running the monitor shows an output frequency 3 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 1 Example of operation in basic display mode b037 04 factory setting Only basic parameters can be displayed in basic display mode All parameters in monitor mode four parameters in function mode or 20 parameters in extended function mode Other parameters are not displayed To display all parameters select the full display mode b037 00 lt Displayable parameters and sequence of display gt No Display code Item 1 d001 to d104
310. n gereeion s e asome S 0031h Reserved Se 0032h_ FBV PID feedback comparison R 1 ON 0 OFF NDc communication train i 0933h disconnection 1 ON 0 OFF 0034h LOG1 logical operation result 1 R 1 ON 0 OFF 4 124 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 0035h LOG2 logical operation result 2 R 1 ON 0 OFF 0036h LOG3 logical operation result 3 R i OFF O O 0037h LOG4 logical operation result 4 R 1 ON 0 OFF 0038h LOGS logical operation result 5 R 4 OFF 0 0 0 003Ah WAC capacitor life warning 1 0 OFF 0 0 0 0 O O O ojojo 003Bh_ WAF cooling fan speed drop R 1 OFF 003Ch_ FR starting contact signal R 1 ON 0 OFF 003Dh O OHF heat sink overheat warning R O a T 003Eh OFF LOC low current indication signal M01 general output 1 M02 general output 2 M03 general output 3 M04 general output 4 0043h M05 general output 5 0044h MO6 general output 6 003Fh 0040h 0041h 0042h ala e O 7 T 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF eel aia R R R A as R i anes i E 0048h MJA major failure R 1 ON 0 OFF ing ER e R CR R R j EE EE Ca CR il gt 0045h IRDY inverter ready 0046h FWR forward rotation 0047h RV
311. n applying the torque limitation function to the motor operation at low speeds also use the overload restriction function 4 2 99 Reverse Run protection function The reverse Run protection function is effective when 03 sensorless vector control is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 For control reasons especially during motor operation at low speed the inverter may output a frequency that instructs the motor to rotate in the direction opposite to that specified by the operation command If the counterrotation of the motor may damage the machine driven by the motor enable the counterrotation prevention function VIF cnaracteristie ns A044 A244 03 Sensorless vector control selection Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors b046 Reverse Run protection enable Reverse Run protection 00 Disabling counterrotation prevention b046 i enable Enabling counterrotation prevention 4 94 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 100 Torque LAD stop function The torque LAD stop function is effective when 03 sensorless vector control is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 This function temporarily stops the frequency based deceleration function LAD when the torque limitation function operates Data or range of data V F characteristic
312. n deceleration ratio 2 A133 Raw Jo ore 12BDh to o 4 133 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Bie Function eae 0 tripping 1 starting with 0 Hz 2 starting with matching frequency 3 tripping after deceleration Selection of restart mode b001 and stopping with matching frequency 4 restarting with active matching frequency Allowable under voltage power 1302h failure time b002 to 250 0 1 sec 1303h iaoa Ran ee time peloremotor boos Pw 3 to 1000 0 1 tsec 1 0 1 sec Instantaneous power oa Fie i 0 disabling 1 enabling 2 disabling during 1304h falre ungar voltage trip alarm b004 ew Pigsa and decelerating to stop Number of restarts on power Phe 1305h failure under voltage trip events b005 RW 0 16 times 1 unlimited 1306h Phase loss detection enable b006 0 disabling 1 enabling aa 1308h Restart frequency threshold b007 low RW yg 40000 0 01 Hz 0 tripping 1 starting with O Hz 2 starting with i RER matching frequency 3 tripping Fr deceleration 1309h Selection of retry after tripping b008 R W and stopping with matching frequency 4 restarting with active matching frequenc Selection of retry count after Selection of retry count after 130Ch_ Retry wait time after tripping b011 R W 3 to 1000 0 1 sec Electronic thermal setting 130Dh calculated within the inverter b012
313. n degree 2 environment 6 Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature 45 or 50 C 7 CAUTION Risk of Electric Shock Capacitor discharge time is at least 10 min 8 Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the NEC and any additional local codes 9 Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model 10 Tightening torque and wire range for field wiring terminals are in the table below Model No Required torque N m Wire range AWG L700 110L 4 0 6 L700 150L 4 0 6 4 L700 185L 4 9 2 L700 220L 4 9 1 L700 300L 8 8 1 or 1 0 L700 370L 8 8 2 0 or Parallel of 1 0 L700 450L 20 0 4 0 Prepared wire only or Parallel of 1 0 L700 550L 20 0 4 0 Prepared wire only or Parallel of 1 0 L700 750L 19 6 350 kemil Prepared wire only or Parallel of 2 0 Prepared wire only Model No Required Torque N m Wire Range AWG L700 110H 4 0 8 L700 150H 4 9 6 L700 185H 4 9 6 L700 220H 4 9 6 or4 L700 300H 4 9 L700 370H 20 0 1 L700 450H 20 0 1 L700 550H 20 0 2 0 L700 750H 20 0 Parallel of 1 0 L700 900H 20 0 Parallel of 1 0 L700 1100H 35 0 Parallel of 3 0 L700 1320H 35 0 Parallel of 3 0 L700 1600H 35 0 Parallel of 3 0 vi Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety Instructions 11 Distribution fuse circuit breaker size marking is included in the manual to in
314. nals exceeds about 400 VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 800 VDC in case of the 400 V class models When an internal EEPROM is caused by Check for the noise sources located near the external noise or an abnormal inverter EEPROM temperature rise the inverter shuts off its Remove noise sources error output and displays the error code shown ny Check whether the cooling efficiency has 2 3 Jon the right id deteriorated Note An EEPROM error may result in a Check the heat sink for clogging and clean it CPU error Replace the cooling fan 1 The inverter will not accept any reset command within about 10 seconds after tripping i e after the protective function operates Check whether the inverter has decreased the motor quickly Increase the deceleration time Check for a ground fault Check the output cables and motor Check whether the motor has been rotated by the action of the load Reduce the regenerative energy Overvoltage protection K 2 The inverter will not accept any reset command after an EEPROM error occurs with error code displayed Turn off the inverter power once If error code E08 is displayed when the inverter power is turned on subsequently the internal memory device may have failed or parameters may have not been stored correctly In such cases initialize the inverter and then re set the parameters 3 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal o
315. nces that can occur Otherwise personal injury may result 1 Power supply requirements a Voltage fluctuation must be 15 to 10 or less b Voltage imbalance must be 3 or less c Frequency variation must be 4 or less d Total harmonic distortion THD of voltage must be 10 or less 2 Installation requirement a A special filter intended for the L700 series inverter must be installed 3 Wiring requirements a Ashielded wire screened cable must be used for motor wiring and the length of the cable must be according to the following table Table 1 b The carrier frequency must be set according to the following table to meet an EMC requirement Table 1 c The main circuit wiring must be separated from the control circuit wiring 4 Environmental requirements to be met when a filter is used a Ambient temperature must be within the range 10 C to 40 C b Relative humidity must be within the range 20 to 90 non condensing c Vibrations must be 5 9 m s 0 6 G 10 to 55 Hz or less 11 to 30kW 2 94 m s 0 3 G 10 to 55Hz or less 37 to 160kW d The inverter must be installed indoors not exposed to corrosive gases and dust at an altitude of 1 000 m or less model cat cable length m saunas model cat cable length m P L700 110L C3 1 1 L700 110H C3 1 2 5 L700 150L C3 1 1 L700 150H C3 1 2 5 L700 185L C3 1 1 L700 185H C3 1 2 5 L700 220L C3
316. nction b098 Display 0 0 to 200 0 in steps of 0 1 C Note If 01 enabling PTC is specified for the thermistor for thermal protection control function b098 motor temperature monitoring is disabled Related code d019 Motor temperature monitoring b098 Thermistor for thermal protection control 4 1 16 Life check monitoring Related code When the life check monitoring function d002 is selected the inverter d022 Life check monitoring displays the operating life status of two inverter parts output from corresponding intelligent output terminals by using LED segments of the monitor The two targets of life check monitoring are 1 Life of the capacitor on the main circuit board i Lite Sneck 2 Degradation of cooling fan speed 0 mi I Norral Note 1 The inverter estimates the capacitor life every 10 minutes If you turn the mveier power on and off repeatedly at intervals of less than 10 minutes the capacitor life cannot be checked correctly Note 2 If you have specified 01 for the selection of cooling fan operation function b0092 the inverter determines the cooling fan speed to be normal while the cooling fan is stopped 4 1 17 Program counter display easy sequence function Related code While the easy sequence function is operating the inverter displays the d023 Program counter program line number that is being executed For details refer to the Programming Software EzSQ manual 4 1 1
317. ncy arrival setting for decel 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 Oo 7 C044 PID deviation level setting 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 O 4 26 p z Frequency arrival setting for 5 C045 acceleration 2 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O as 5 Frequency arrival setting for A C046 deceleration 2 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O g C052 Maximum PID feedback data 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 O R D C053 Minimum PID feedback data 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 O o Over torque forward driving oj S C055 level setting 0 to 150 100 x O Over torque reverse regenerating C056 level setting 0 to 150 100 x O ies Over torque reverse driving i g C057 level setting 0 to 150 100 x O Over torque forward regenerating l C058 level setting 0 to 150 100 x O Electronic thermal warning A C061 level setting 0 to 100 80 x O 4 37 C062 Alarm code output 00 disabling 01 3 bits 02 4 bits 00 O 4 68 C063 Zero speed detection level 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 Hz 0 00 O 4 66 C064 Heat sink overheat warning level 0 to 200 0 C 120 O 4 71 fae i 02 loopback test 03 2 400 bps 04 4 800 bps 05 9 600 bps C071 Communication speed selection 06 19 200 bps 04 x Oo C072 Node allocation 1 to 32 1 x Q 5 C073 Communication data length selection 7 7 bits 8 8 bits 7 x oO o C074 Communication parity selection 00 no parity 01 even parity 02 odd parity 00 x D 5 C075 Communication st
318. nd see 4 2 12 4 2 5 Run command source settin Related code A002 Run command source setting C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C019 Terminal FW active state F004 Keypad Run key routing The run command source setting function allows you to select the method to input operation commands to start and stop the motor As the operation commands via control circuit terminals turn the FW signal for forward operation or RV signal for reverse operation on and off to start and stop the motor respectively Note that the factory setting assigns the FW signal to intelligent input terminal 8 To switch each intelligent input terminal between a and b contacts specify each terminal with function C011 to C019 and then perform input a b NO NC selection for each terminal When using the digital operation for the inverter operation specify the desired motor operation direction with function F004 and use the RUN and STOP RESET keys to start and stop the motor respectively If the start commands for both forward and reverse operations are input at the same time the inverter will assume the input of a stop command ltem Functioncode Data Description Input the start and stop commands via control circuit terminals FW and RV Run command A002 remote operator communication terminals 05 Input the start and stop commands from option board 2 coi9 00 _ a NO contact Sd active state C011 to
319. nd H005 H205 0 001 to 80 000 PI proportional gain H050 H250 0 0t0999 9 1000 esses H051 H251 0 0 to 999 9 1000 o H052 H252 0 001 to 10 00 Terminal selection PI 5 proportional gain setting H070 0 0 to 999 9 1000 The speed control normally incorporates the proportional integrated compensation PI control and the motor speed is controlled so that Torque the difference between the frequency specified by the frequency command and the actual motor speed is zero However a specific operation mode called drooping operation in which one load is driven by multiple motors sometimes requires the proportional control P control To enable the proportional P control mode LOO fein assign function 43 P PI switching function to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 and turn on the intelligent input terminal For the proportional control set the value of the P control proportional gain H052 as the KPP value The following formula generally represents the relation between the KPP value and momentary speed variation 10 Set value of KPP Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors P control mode TN PI
320. nd source setting not selected as the device to input frequency and operation C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions commands An intelligent input terminal is used to turn this function on and off When the intelligent input terminal to which the forcible operation function is assigned is off frequency and operation commands are input from the devices selected by functions A001 and A002 When the terminal is on the device to input frequency and operation commands is forcibly switched to the digital operator If the input device is switched while the inverter is operating the current operation command is canceled and the inverter stops the output When restarting the inverter operation turn off the operation command that was to be entered from each input device for safety s sake and then enter a new operation command Terminal function C001 to C008 OPE Forcible operation 4 2 46 Forcible operation from terminal F TM function The forcible operation function allows you to forcibly enable the inverter operation via control circuit terminals when the control circuit terminal block is not selected as the device to input frequency and operation commands An intelligent input terminal is used to turn this function on and off When the intelligent input terminal to which the forcible terminal operation function is assigned is off frequency and operation commands are input from the devices selected by functions A001 and A002 When the
321. nfo clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 3 Entering operation and frequency setting commands both from a digital operator and via control circuit terminals This operating method allows you to arbitrarily select the digital operator or control circuit terminals as the means to input operation commands and frequency setting commands Items required for operation 1 See the items required for the above two operating methods 4 Method for operation in Easy sequence function The inverter can be operated by downloading the user s program made with exclusive use PC software EzSQ Please refer to 4 2 101 Easy sequence function for details 5 Method for operation in Telecommunication facility It is possible to use RS485 from TM2 that exists in Control terminal board of the inverter and to operate it by the inverter and communicating with external telecommunications equipment Please refer to 4 3 Communication facility for details 3 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation 3 2 How To Operate the Digital Operator OPE SBK 3 2 1 Names and functions of components Monitor l 4 digit LED display Hace POWER lamp LS Al MAGHI ALARM RUN operation lamp ALARM lamp PRG program lamp Monitor lamps RUN key enable LED RUN key FUNC function key STR storage key 1 up key 2 down key STOP RESET key Function Lights when the control c
322. ng the inverter for a lift use the OTQ signal as the trigger to stop braking Use the frequency arrival signal as the trigger to start braking Set value Terminal function C021 to C025 OTG Over torgue signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 q 9 Over torque forward driving level 5 Threshold level to output the OTQ signal setting 6099 010150 7 during forward powering operation Over torque reverse n Threshold level to output the OTQ signal regenerating level setting C056 0 to 150 during reverse regeneration operation Over torque reverse driving level 6 Threshold level to output the OTQ signal setting Gist 0 10 150 during reverse powering operation Over torque forward Threshold level to output the OTQ signal regenerating level setting C058 O10 150 during forward regeneration operation 4 67 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 65 Alarm code output function ACO to AC3 Related code The alarm code output function allows you to make the inverter C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions output a 3 or 4 bit code signal as the trip factor when it has C062 Alarm code output tripped Specifying 01 3 bits or 02 4 bits for the alarm code output C062 forcibly assigns the alarm code output function to intelligent output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 respectively The following table lists the ala
323. ng with matching frequency 00 x Oo S 04 restarting with active matching frequency 493 i b009 Selection of retry after undervoltage 00 16 times 01 unlimited 00 x O 5 Selection of retry count after A ole overvoltage or overcurrent 1 to 3 times 2 9 b011 Retry wait time after tripping 0 3 to 100 0 s 1 0 x O Rated b012 Electronic thermal setting calculated 0 20 x rated current to 1 00 x rated current A current 7 o within the inverter from current output of inverter Electronic thermal setting calculated icon b212 within the inverter from current output 0 20 x rated current to 1 00 x rated current A of x Oo end motor inverter Electronic thermal setting calculated liana 4 37 b312 within the inverter from current output 0 20 x rated current to 1 00 x rated current A of x O 5 Srd motor inverter 2 f aie 00 reduced torque characteristic 01 constant torque characteristic b013 Electronic thermal characteristic 02 free setting 01 x O b213 Electronic thermal characteristic 00 reduced torque characteristic 01 constant torque characteristic 01 x o go 2nd motor 02 free setting 2 b313 Electronic thermal characteristic 00 reduced torque characteristic 01 constant torque characteristic 01 x o S 3rd motor 02 free setting 3 7 7 oO Free setting electronic therma iT b015 frequency 1 0 to 400 Hz 0 x O b016 S electronic thermal 0 0 to rated current A 0 0 x O Free setting electro
324. nic therma b017 frequency 2 0 to 400 Hz 0 x O oe b018 Aeon electronic therma 0 0 to rated current A 0 0 x O b019 Kreg ae lectronic thermal 0 to 400 Hz 0 S o b020 Pe electronic thermal 0 0 to rated current A 0 0 x O 00 disabling 01 enabling during acceleration and deceleration PA 5 02 enabling during constant speed x b021 Overload restriction operation mode 03 enabling during acceleration and deceleration increasing the speed during 7 Q regeneration Rated current sate i 0 20 x rated current to 1 50 x rated current A b022 Overload restriction setting lt 0 20 x rated current to1 50 x rated current A gt ener x Q 3 x 1 20 b023 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 0 10 to 30 00 s 1 00 x Oo 4 40 2 00 disabling 01 enabling during acceleration and deceleration 3 b024 Overload restriction operation mode 2 02 enabling during constant speed 03 enabling during acceleration and 0 x Oo 2 deceleration increasing the speed during regeneration 2 Rated i t n inai A 0 20 x rated current to 1 50 x rated current A ate S b025 Overload restriction setting 2 lt 0 20 x rated current to1 50 x rated current A gt vol S inverter x 1 20 2 b026 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 2 0 10 to 30 00 s 1 00 x O gel a b027 Overcurrent suppression enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 0 x O 4 41 g Rated fe Active frequency matching scan start 0 20 x rated current
325. ning off the operation command the constants set for auto tuning may remain in the inverter Before retrying the auto tuning initialize the inverter and then readjust the settings for the auto tuning Perform the same procedure also when you proceed to the normal inverter operation Before retrying the auto tuning initialize the setting parameters of inverter or turn off power source for the inverter and turn on And then readjust the settings for the auto tuning Perform the same procedure also when you proceed to the normal inverter operation Note 6 If an attempt is made to perform the auto tuning with a free V f characteristic selected as the control mode the inverter will soon terminate the operation with the abnormal end code displayed Note 7 Even if the auto tuning has ended normally you cannot operate the inverter with the tuning data left If you intend to operate the inverter with the tuning data left be sure to switch the setting of motor constant selection H002 to 01 Note8 You should not activate any functions set on intelligent terminals 1 8 during auto tuning Set normal open terminals off and set normal close terminals on The working functions on the intelligent terminals cause abnormal termination The motor might keep running without run command in this case Please restart auto tuning after turning off power source for the inverter and turn on again Note9 Do not use DC braking You should set DC braking se
326. nitor shows C for forward operation ae for reverse operation or a for stopping 6 Start the motor operation Set the FW signal at the FW terminal on the control terminal block to the ON level to start the motor The RUN lamp green LED goes on Apply a voltage across the terminals O and L on the control circuit block to output the frequency corresponding to the applied voltage from the inverter 7 Stop the motor Set the FW signal at the FW terminal on the control terminal block to the OFF level to decelerate and stop the motor When the motor stops the RUN lamp green LED goes off 3 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions This chapter describes the functions of the inverter AA Monitor Mode tite ti iinis itai 4 1 A gt gt Function Modea iedrsi ipea aerian 4 7 4 3 Communication Functions rere 4 98 4 4 About the emergency stop function 4 147 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode 4 1 1 Output frequency monitoring Related code When the output frequency monitoring function d001 is selected the d001 Output frequency monitoring inverter displays the output frequency The inverter displays 0 00 when the frequency output is stopped The Hz monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the output fre
327. not be restored If necessary the original function will have to be re assigned to said terminal Example If slide switch SW1 is set to ON when function 18 RS has been assigned to input terminal 2 by terminal setting C002 terminal setting C002 is changed to no no function assigned and function 18 RS is assigned to input terminal 1 by terminal setting C001 Even if slide switch SW1 is subsequently returned to OFF terminal 2 function C002 and terminal 1 function C001 will remain as no no function assigned and 18 RS respectively 4 Function 64 EMR cannot be assigned to input terminal 3 by an operation from the digital operator The function is automatically assigned to the terminal when slide switch SW1 is set to ON 5 After slide switch SW1 has been set to ON once function assignments to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 are not returned to their original assignments If necessary re assign original functions to the intelligent input terminals 4 147 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions x ore or Slide switch SW1 M i int HIT fo N eA Slide lever factory setting OFF arD a Note If the data of an optional operator SRW or SRW EX is copied If operator data is copied to your SJ700 series inverter whose slide switch SW1 is ON from another SJ7
328. not found O5h 85h 3h The specified data has an unacceptable format 06h 86h The data to be written to a register exceeds the range of inverter specifications The inverter restricts the execution of the specified function Rewriting a register that cannot be rewritten during the operation Issuing an Enter command during the operation in undervoltage status Writing to a register during tripping because of undervoltage Writing to a read only register coil 4 122 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 5 Enter command storing the updates of register data Neither the command 06h to write data to a register nor the command 10h to write data to multiple registers can store the updates they made in the internal memory of the inverter Turning the inverter power off without storing the updates deletes them and restores the original register settings If you intend to store register updates in the internal memory of the inverter issue the Enter command as described below If you have updated a control constant you must recalculate the motor constants In such cases use register 0900h for recalculation as described below How to issue the Enter command With the command 06h to write data to registers write all register data to the internal memory To recalculate the motor constants use the same command to write the data shown in th
329. not operate if the inverter has been tripped is in undervoltage status or stopped The control power fails momentarily or the main circuit DC voltage drops to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b051 or less This function operates when the conditions above are met even if the J51 connector cables have been disconnected from terminals RO and TO and cables are connected from main circuit terminal P to terminal RO and from main circuit terminal N to terminal TO If momentary power failure only lasts a short time the inverter can continue operation without stopping its output Conversely if momentary power failure causes undervoltage the inverter stops its output immediately and ends the operation of this function When power is subsequently restored the inverter operates according to the selection of restart mode b001 When 03 is specified for b050 the inverter can be restored to normal operation if the input power is recovered from momentary power failure before the inverter stops its output The inverter however may decelerate and stop the motor if a specific setting has been made for b051 The table below lists the differences in operation according to the setting of b051 b050 b051 Operation Decelerating and stopping the motor DC voltage constant control Example 1 b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery Decelerating and stopping the motor Example 2 Decelerating and stopping the mot
330. nse See Item 2 ii of this section 4 109 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions x 09 command This command checks whether set data can be stored in the EEPROM in the inverter Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 09 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter ACK Control code acknowledgement 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data 2 bytes 01 enabling data storage BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Negative response See Item 4 ii of this section xi 0A command This command stores set data in the EEPROM in the inverter Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02
331. nstant 1st 2nd 3rd motors H020 H220 Motor constant R1 1st 2nd motors H021 H221 Motor constant R2 1st 2nd motors H022 H222 Motor constant L 1st 2nd motors H023 H223 Motor constant lo 1st 2nd motors H024 H224 Motor constant J 1st 2nd motors H030 H230 Auto constant R1 1st 2nd motors H031 H231 Auto constant R2 1st 2nd motors H032 H232 Auto constant L 1st 2nd motors H033 H233 Auto constant lo 1st 2nd motors H034 H234 Auto constant J 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 Pl integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors Since the inverter indicates no distinction among the 1st 2nd and 3rd controls confirm the kind of control settings with the on off states of the SET and SETS terminals If both the SET and SETS terminals are turned on the SET terminal has priority and the 2nd control is selected While the inverter is operating the motor switching between the 1st 2nd and 3rd when motor stops controls is disabled Switching the motor control is valid onlywhen the motor is stopped so change is reflected after the operation The above setting items printed in italic bold type can be adjusted even while the inverter is operating the motor Whether each item can be set during operation and whether it can be changed during operation are indicated in the list of data settings in Chapter 8 4 51 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www c
332. nt safety information Also focus on and observe the items and instructions described under Notes in the text Many of the drawings in this Instruction Manual show the inverter with covers and or parts blocking your view being removed Do not operate the inverter in the status shown in those drawings If you have removed the covers and or parts be sure to reinstall them in their original positions before starting operation and follow all instructions in this Instruction Manual when operating the inverter 1 Installation Install the inverter on a non flammable surface e g metal Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not place flammable materials near the installed inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire When carrying the inverter do not hold its top cover Otherwise you run the risk of injury by dropping the inverter Prevent foreign matter e g cut pieces of wire sputtering welding materials iron chips wire and dust from entering the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Install the inverter on a structure able to bear the weight specified in this Instruction Manual Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Install the inverter on a vertical wall that is free of vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or its parts are missing Otherwise you run the risk of injury Install the inverte
333. ntrol DOWN function 02 x O 9 DWN remote control data clearing 31 OPE forcible operation 32 SFT multispeed bit 1 33 SF2 multispeed bit 2 4 47 4 SF3 multispeed bit 3 35 SF4 multispeed bit 4 C005 Terminal 5 function 36S F5 multispeed bit 5 37 SF6 multispeed bit 6 01 x fe 38 SF7 multispeed bit 7 39 OLR overload restriction selection 40 TL torque limit enable 41 TRQ1 torque limit selection bit 1 42 TRQ2 torque limit selection bit 2 43 PPI P PI mode selection C006 Terminal 6 function 46 LAC LAD cancellation 06 x O 50 ADD trigger for frequency addition A145 51 F TM forcible terminal operation 53 KHC cumulative power ley Seat 56 MI1 general purpose input 1 57 MI2 general purpose input 2 se C007 erminal 7 function 58 MI3 general purpose input 3 59 MI4 general purpose input 4 uy Q kz 60 MI5 general purpose input 5 61 MI6 general purpose input 6 62 MI7 general purpose input 7 63 MI8 general purpose input 8 eita i 64 EMR Emergency stop signal 65 AHD analog command holding Do C008 Terminal 8 function 74 PCNT pulse counter 75 PCC pulse counter clear 13 o a no NO no assignment e D C011 Terminal 1 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O a C012 Terminal 2 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C013 Terminal 3 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C014 Terminal 4 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C01
334. ny response 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to be read first If the function to write data to a specified register cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 120 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions v Performing a loopback test 08h The loopback test function is used to check the communication between the external control system master and the inverter slave Example When performing a loopback test with the inverter at slave address 1 Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 01 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 08 2 Function code 08 3 Diagnosis subcode upper digit 00 3 Diagnosis subcode upper digit 00 4 Diagnosis subcode lower digit 00 4 Diagnosis subcode lower digit 00 5 Data upper digit Arbitrary 5 Data upper digit Arbitrary 6 Data lower digit Arbitrary 6 Data lower digit Arbitrary 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit CRC 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit CRC 8 CRC 16 code lower digit CRC 8 _CRC 16 code lower digit CRC 1 This query cannot be broadcasted The diagnosis subcode only conforms to the echoing of query data 00h 00h It cannot be used for other commands vi Writing data to multiple coils OF
335. o free setting V f frequency 2 Hz 0 x x b101 Free setting V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b102 Free setting V f frequency 2 0 to free setting V f frequency 3 Hz 0 x x B b103 Free setting V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x 8 b104 Free setting V f frequency 3 0 to free setting V f frequency 4 Hz 0 x x a b105 Free setting V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b106 Free setting V f frequency 4 0 to free setting V f frequency 5 Hz 0 x x 456 5 b107 Free setting V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x 2 b108 Free setting V f frequency 5 0 to free setting V f frequency 6 Hz 0 x x 9 b109 Free setting V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b110 Free setting V f frequency 6 0 to free setting V f frequency 7 Hz 0 x x b111 Free setting V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b112 Free setting V f frequency 7 0 to 400 Hz 0 x x b113 Free setting V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b130 Overvoltage suppression enable 00 disabling the restraint 01 controlled deceleration 00 z o 02 enabling acceleration x 330 to 390 V 200 V class model 660 to 780 V 380 v b131 Overvoltage suppression level 400 V class model 760 x O D z 7 Acceleration and deceleration rate at 4 42 5 b132 overvoltage suppression 0 10 to 30 00 s 1 00 x O b133 one age suppression propotional 0 00 to 2 55 0 50 b134 Overvoltage suppression Integral time 0 000 to 9 9
336. o 255 Rae 3508h to Reserved inaccessible aaaea 4 146 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 4 About the emergency stop function disabled by the factory setting The emergency stop function shuts off the inverter output i e stops the switching operation of the main circuit elements in response to a command from a hardware circuit via an intelligent input terminal without the operation by internal CPU software Note The emergency stop function does not electrically shut off the inverter but merely stops the switching operation of the main circuit elements Therefore do not touch any terminals of the inverter or any power lines e g motor cables Otherwise electric shock injury or ground fault may result When the emergency stop function is enabled intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 are used exclusively for this function and no other functions can be assigned to these terminals Even if other functions have been assigned to these terminals these are automatically disabled and these terminals are used exclusively for the emergency stop function Terminal 1 function This terminal always serves as the a NO contact for the reset RS signal This signal resets the inverter and releases the inverter from the trip due to emergency stop E37 Terminal 3 function This terminal always serves as the b NC contact for the emergency
337. o be transmitted 2 bytes 01 Data oe be sent decimal ASCII 6 bytes See Note 2 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BEG Pres CNECK COJE 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 2 For example to set the output frequency of the inverter with station No 01 to 5 Hz the data is as follows wre STX 01 01 000500 BCC CR Cometson into ASCI format _ 99 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D Note 3 The data indicates a value 100 times as large as the actual frequency value to be set Example 5 Hz gt 500 000500 Conversion into ASCII format 30 30 30 35 30 30 Note 4 When using the data as the feedback data for PID control set the most significant byte to 1 Example 5 500 100500 Conversion into ASCII format 31 30 30 35 30 30 Response frame Positive response See ltem 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 102 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iii 02 12 command This command turns the specified intelligent input terminals on or off Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No ees ot control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2
338. ode Function name Monitored data or setting Default operation operation Page allowed allowed or not or not d001 Output frequency monitoring 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz O O 4 1 d002 Output current monitoring 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 A 4 1 d003 Rotation direction minitoring F forward rotation o stopped r reverse rotation A 4 1 doo4 Process variable PV PID 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 at feedback monitoring 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 E Example PW as _ Terminals FW 7 2 and 1 ON Terminals 8 6 5 4 and 3 OFF Intelligent input terminal ne T d005 status Ll 4 2 8 76 54 32 1 Example as SEN S Terminals 12 and 11 ON l l l Terminals AL 15 14 and 13 OFF Intelligent output terminal ria Eak d006 S 2 4 2 status D ND seals A AL 1514 1312 11 d007 Scaled output frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 1000 to 3996 10000 to 39960 2 o o 4 2 monitoring d012 Torque monitoring 200 to 200 4 3 d013 Output voltage monitoring 0 0 to 600 0 V 4 3 d014 Power monitoring 0 0 to 999 9 kW 3 4 3 10 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 4015 Cumulative power monitoring 1999 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to T999 100000 to 999000 F g 7 43 d016 Cumulative operation RUN 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 9990
339. of the inverter to start or stop the inverter To start and stop inverter operation by external signals use only the operation commands FW and RV signals that are input via control circuit terminals This inverter does not support a single phase power supply but supports only a three phase power supply If you need to use a single phase power input contact your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor Do not operate the inverter with an phase loss power input or it may be damaged Since the factory setting of the inverter disables the phase loss input protection the inverter will revert to the following status if a phase of power supply input is interrupted R or T phase interrupted The inverter does not operate S phase interrupted The inverter reverts to single phase operation and may trip because of insufficient voltage or overcurrent or be damaged Internal capacitors remain charged even when the power input is under an phase loss condition Therefore touching an internal part may result in electric shock and injury When rewiring the main circuit follow the instructions given in Item 1 Wiring instructions Carefully note that the internal converter module of the inverter may be damaged if the imbalance of power voltage is 3 or more the power supply capacity is at least 10 times as high as the inverter capacity and 500 kVA or more or the power voltage changes rapidly Example The above conditions may occur
340. olling the compressor for a refrigerator Assume that the temperature and voltage specifications of the temperature sensor are 20 C to 100 C and 0 to 10 V and the target value is 0 C If the current temperature is 10 C and the inverter is under the normal type of PID control the inverter will reduces the output frequency because the feedback data is larger than the target value In such a case specify 01 for function A077 to invert the feedback deviation Then the inverter will increase the output frequency PID target value PID operation PID feedback data 6 Limitation on PID variation range You can limit the PID output to within a specific range with reference to the target value To use the PID variation limit function set the PID variation range A078 Set a value on the assumption that the maximum frequency corresponds to 100 The variation of PID output is limited within value of A078 from the target value Setting 0 0 for the PID variation range A078 disables the PID variation limit function This function is deactivated when 0 0 is set on A078 PID PID output output range PID target value Time s Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 7 Output of inverted PID deviation If the inverter is under the normal PID control and the PID operation result is a negative value the frequency command to the
341. oltage power failure IMGs E EE E E chee es 4 33 AM sereg derat tanith A 2 8 4 77 E AM tae ere anann iea E Aoii a 2 8 4 77 analog command holding 4 61 analog input filter 4 15 asil mode etra aaea ia 4 101 AT ested E E T TATAE 2 8 4 12 automatic carrier frequency reduction 4 45 automatic torque boost sssseeeeessseeerereeeeeeee 4 18 AN m EPA E E en E hee 4 11 AVR voltage SeleCt ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 11 4 15 B basic AiSplay aheraine h 4 79 base frequency eeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeees 4 11 binary operation eeen 4 48 4 49 Dit operatio M esanei ente egee roosteren iiin 4 48 4 49 BRD wcehisaiedi ed dl ae ea 2 12 4 46 BRD load factor monitoring 4 6 Cc Capacitor life Warning eeen 4 70 Carrier frEQUENCY eeeeseeeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeneeeereenees 4 44 CAS ai iea e a ataei ana red A brane 4 59 GE ciclaititeiive Adie Shei a ee Mees 2 18 CFI CF2 GES GR4 vic siedee teenie ates 4 48 COM eee E T EA 2 8 2 21 commercial power supply switching 4 54 communication function 00 0 eee eee 4 70 4 98 communication line disconnection SIQM als csi cee cteaes eS2 hbsticd aaea aE 4 70 constant torque characteristic electronic thermal 4 37 constant torque characteristic VC 4 16 4 89 control circuit terminal s e 2 8 control gain switching 4 59 CONTFO MOG itiiti 4 16 Cooling fan Operation eee 4 46 4 71 cooling fan speed drop signal eee 4 71 COPYIN
342. om Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions See the list of inverter tripfactorsbelow See the list of inverter tripfactorsbelow _003Ch do85 R 003Fh Trip monitoring 5 voltage DC input voltage at tripping CT 1v 0040h Trip monitoring 5 running time high 0041h _ Trip monitoring 5 running time low Cumulative running time at tripping 0042h_ Trip monitoring 5 power on time high AE e 0043h Trip monitoring 5 power on time low Cumulative power on time at tripping In 0044h_ Trip monitoring 6 factor See the list of inverter trip factors below OoOo 0045h Trp monitoring 6 verter sane See the list of inverter trip factors below O d086 004Bh TE monitoring 6 re TD oo Cumulative running time at tripping 004Ch Trip monitoring 6 power on time high 004Dh Trip monitoring 6 power on time low Cumulative power on time at tripping EA 004Eh _ Programming error monitoring d090 a a 004Fh nuses Ea Motor constant recalculation 0001 Set data storage in EEPROM Other Motor constant recalculation and set data storage in EEPROM 0901h to 1000h Unused Inaccessible 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output current at tripping DC input voltage at tripping 0900h Writing to EEPROM Note 1 Assume that the rated current of the inverter is 1000 Note 2 If anumber not less than 1000 100 0 seconds is specified the second value after the decimal point will be ignored 4 127 Ph
343. on Communication wait time C078 0 to 1000 ms Time to wait until the inverter returns a response Communication mode C079 00 ASCII mode selection 01 Modbus RTU mode 4 99 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Communication test mode Use the communication test mode to check the hardware of the R8485 communication train Procedure for communication test 1 2 3 4 Remove all cables from the TM2 terminal block to perform a loopback test Make the following setting with the digital operator of the inverter Specify 02 loopback test for the communication speed selection C071 Turn the inverter power off once and then turn it back on whereupon the communication test begins After the test is completed the inverter displays one of the following When the communication is normal o Bisat When the communication train is abnormal Ea Press the STOP RESET key of the digital operator or the reset button on the copy unit to switch to the normal setting screen Using the setting screen change the setting made in step 2 to that desired 4 100 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 1 Communication in ASCII mode 1 Communication protocol The communication between the inverter and external control system is based on the following pro
344. on Jumper terminals P24 and PLC for the sink logic jumper terminals CM1 and PLC for the sink logic To use an external power supply to drive the contact inputs remove the jumper and connect the PLC terminal to the external interface circuit 11 Select five of a total 51 functions and assign these five functions to Voltage drop between each 12 terminals 11 to 15 terminal and CM2 when 13 Intelligent output If you have selected an alarm code using the function C062 terminals 11 output signal is on 4 V or 14 to 13 or 11 to 14 are used exclusively for the output of cause code for alarm less e g inverter trip The control logic between each of these terminals and the CM2 terminal always follows the sink or source logic Maximum allowable 15 voltage 27 VDC CM2 Intelligent output This terminal serves as the common terminal for intelligent output terminals Function selection and logic switching Contact input Status and factor common 11 to 15 Maximum allowable current 50 mA Maximum contact capacity AL1 ALO 250 VAC 2A Select functions from the 43 available and assign the selected functions to resistance or 0 2A Intelligent relay these terminals which serve as C contact output terminals nears BEANE TA output In the initial setting these terminals output an alarm indicating that the resistance or 0 2A inverter protection function has operated to stop inverter output inductive load Minimum contact ca
345. on error 1 45 Easy sequence user trip 0 to 9 50 to 59 Option 1 error 0 to 9 60 to 69 Option 2 error 0 to 9 70 to 79 4 128 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iii List of registers monitoring Register R W ae E Data Monitoring and setting items to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 to 9999 0 1 A Function name Function code 1001h d001 high T002h Output frequency monitoring 001 low 1003h Output current monitoring oO Oo Stopping 1 Forward rotation 2 Reverse 0 1 Hz rotation 2 0 Terminal 1 to 2 7 Terminal 8 ibt 0 Terminal 11 to 2 4 Terminal 15 01 20060 40000 to 40000 0 01 Hz Ea Ea R R _R_ 200 to 200 R a R R ES EE Oo Qa QO N 1004h Rotation direction minitoring d003 1005h __ Process variable PV PID d004 high 1006h d004 low 1007h __ Intelligent input terminal status d005 D D o oy D Q 3 fe sy fe za a Intelligent output terminal 100Ah monitoring d007 low 1008h Actual frequency monitoring d008 high 100Ch d008 low 100Dh 100Eh d010 100Fh 1010h Torque monitoring d012 1011h d013 1012h d014 AE Cumulative power monitorin d015 high Totan jvm P 9 d015 low N Inaccessible 200 to 200 a Qa fo Q e 200 to 200 to 6000 1 V to 9999 7 7 7 0 0 1 to 9999999 0 0 1 0 1
346. one 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions List of inverter trip factors Upper part of trip factor code indicating the factor P cr eet oa a on Name Code Name Code No trip factor 0 Resetting 0 Overcurrent protection durin Anal a operation j 1 Stopping Overcurrent protection during deceleration 2 Decelerating 2 Overcurrent protection during acceleration 3 Constant speed operation 3 Overcurrent protection during stopping 4 Accelerating 4 Overload protection 5 Operating at zero frequency 5 Braking resistor overload protection 6 Starting 6 Overvoltage protection i DC braking 7 EEPROM error 8 Overload restricted 8 Undervoltage protection 9 SON or FOC operation in progress 9 CT error 10 CPU error 11 External trip 12 USP error 13 Ground fault protection 14 Input overvoltage protection 15 Instantaneous power failure protection 16 Power module temperature error with the fan stopped ae Power module temperature error 21 Gate array communication error 23 Phase loss input protection 24 Main circuit error 25 IGBT error 30 Thermistor error 35 Braking error added 36 Emergency stop error 37 Electronic thermal protection at low speeds 38 Easy sequence error invalid instruction 43 Easy sequence error invalid nesting count 44 Easy sequence executi
347. ontrol DOWN function 1000000000000000 MI5 General purpose input 5 0000000020000000 DWN Remote control data clearing 2000000000000000 MI6 General purpose input 6 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 MI7 General purpose input 7 0000000080000000 OPE Forcible operation 8000000000000000 MI8 General purpose input 8 4 103 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Note 6 The table below lists the functions of the intelligent input terminals and corresponding hexadecimal data for 12 command For details see the explanation of the intelligent input terminal functions Data hexadecimal Description Data hexadecimal Description 0000000000000001 0000000100000000 0000000000000002 AHD analog command holding 0000000200000000 0000000000000004 CP1 multistage position settings 0000000400000000 0000000000000008 selection 1 0000000800000000 0000000000000010 CP2 multistage position settings 0000001000000000 0000000000000020 selection 2 0000002000000000 0000000000000040 CP3 multistage position settings 0000004000000000 0000000000000080 selection 3 0000008000000000 0000000000000100 ORL Zero return limit function 0000010000000000 0000000000000200 ORG Zero return trigger function 0000020000000000 0000000000000400 FOT forward drive stop 0000040000000000 0000000000000800 ROT reverse drive stop 00000800000000
348. op is specified for the overvoltage suppression enable b130 the inverter will decelerate by keeping the voltage of the main circuit DC section at over voltage suppression level 6131 When 02 enabling the overvoltage suppression with acceleration is specified for the overvoltage suppression enable b130 the inverter will start acceleration according to the acceleration and deceleration rate at overvoltage suppression b132 if the voltage of the main circuit DC section exceeds the overvoltage suppression level b131 Subsequently the inverter will restart deceleration when the voltage falls below the level b131 Data or range of data Os Disable o H MH Enabling the overvoltage suppression with controlled deceleration See example 1 note5 Enabling the overvoltage suppression with acceleration See example 2 b131 330 to 390 V Level setting for 200 V class models 660 to 780 V Level setting for 400 V class models Related code b130 Overvoitage suppression enable b131 Overvoltage suppression level b132 Acceleration and deceleration rate at overvoltage suppression Overvoltage suppression enable Overvoltage suppression level See Note 4 Acceleration rate at b132 0 10 to 30 00 s Specifying the acceleration rate to be overvoltage suppression applied when the function is enabled Overvoltage suppression b134 0 to 255 Overvoltage suppression propotional gain propotional gain setting valid when b1
349. op bit selection 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 1 x O ET a z z 4 97 8 00 tripping 01 tripping after decelerating and stopping the motor 2 5 C076 Selection of the operation after 02 ignoring errors 03 stopping the motor after free running 02 x O communication error i E 04 decelerating and stopping the motor 8 C077 Communication timeout limit before 0 00 to 99 99 s 0 00 o ripping C078 Communication wait time 0 to 1000 ms 0 O C079 Communication mode selection 00 ASCIl 01 Modbus RTU 00 O C081 O input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 eae O O bra ed Factory t C082 Ol input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 setting O A Fact C083 02 input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 ery O O no lt C085 Thermistor input tuning 0 0 to 999 9 1000 See O O 4 75 C091 Debug mode enable Do not change this parameter which is intended for factory adjustment 00 x x C101 Up Down memory mode selection 00 not storing the frequency data 01 storing the frequency data 00 x O 4 57 00 resetting the trip when RS is on p 3 01 resetting the trip when RS is off 0102 Reset mode selection 02 enabling resetting only upon tripping resetting when RS is on pe 2 O 03 resetting only trip 4 55 C103 Restart mode after reset 00 starting with 0 Hz 01 starting with matching frequency 00 x o 02 restarting with active matching frequency
350. optional regenerative braking unit to the P and N terminals of the inverters The cable length between the inverter and optional regenerative braking unit must be 5 m or less and the two cables must be twisted for wiring Do not use these terminals for connecting any devices other than the optional external braking resistor and regenerative braking unit 5 Inverter ground terminal G Be sure to ground the inverter and motor to prevent electric shock According to the Electric Apparatus Engineering Regulations connect 200 V class models to grounding electrodes constructed in compliance with type D grounding conventional type II grounding with ground resistance of 100Q or less or the 400 V class models to grounding electrodes constructed in compliance with type C grounding conventional special type lll grounding with ground resistance of 100 or less Use a grounding cable thicker than the specified applicable cable and make the ground wiring as short as possible When grounding multiple inverters avoid a multi drop connection of the grounding route and formation of a ground loop otherwise the inverter may malfunction Grounding bolt prepared by user 2 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 Layout of main circuit terminals The figures below show the terminal layout on the main circuit terminal block of the inverter
351. or DC voltage constant control Example 1 b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery Decelerating and stopping the motor Example 2 When this function operates and the inverter decelerates and stops the motor the motor is forcibly stopped even if the FW signal is on To restart the motor turn on the FW signal again after confirming the recovery of inverter input power Note 4 Each of the values of b051 and b052 must be the undervoltage 210V 200V class 410V 400V class level or more This function does not operate when undervoltage occurs The value of b051 must be less than that of b052 When b051 is much higher proportional gain 6055 results in overcurrent by rapid acceleration after this function operates Note 5 When 02 or 03 is specified for b050 PI control is performed so that the internal DC voltage is maintained at a constant level Setting a higher proportional gain b055 results in a faster response However an excessively high proportional gain causes the control to diverge and results in the inverter easily tripping Setting a shorter integral time b056 results in a faster response However an excessively short integral time results in the inverter easily tripping Setting a lower proportional gain b055 results in undervoltage trip due to a voltage drop immediately after starting this function 02 No b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery restoration 03 Re
352. oring the errors and alarm output after communication error 03 Stopping the The inverter stops the motor after 00 Tripping motor after free running without tripping and alarm free running FRS output after reception timeout The inverter decelerates and stops the motor without tripping and alarm output after reception timeout time setting Time to wait until the inverter starts sending a Communication wait time C078 0 to 1000 ms response after reception of a query excluding the silent interval 04 Decelerating and stopping the motor The inverter sends a response frame 2 always after receiving a query frame 1 The inverter does not actively output any frame to the external control system 4 114 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions The formats of the query and response frames are described below Message configuration Query Header silent interval Slave address Error check code Trailer silent interval i Slave address The slave address is a number 1 to 32 that is assigned to the inverter slave beforehand A query is received by the inverter having the same slave address as that specified in the query The query with the slave address set to 0 is broadcasted to all the connected inverters With a broadcast query the master system can neither read inverter data nor perform a loopback test ii Da
353. ors O Ol O2 Ol and O2 are within the maximum and minimum limits specified for the window comparator You can monitor analog inputs with reference to arbitrary levels to find input terminal disconnection and other errors You can specify a hysteresis width for the maximum limit and minimum limit levels of the window comparator You can specify limit levels and a hysteresis width individually for analog inputs O Ol and O2 You can fix the analog input data to be applied to an arbitrary value when WCO WCOI or WCO2 is output For this purpose specify a desired value as the operation level at O Ol O2 disconnection b070 b071 b072 When no is specified the analog input data is reflected as input Output values of ODc OlDc and O2Dc are the same as those of WCO WCOI and WCO2 respectively Functi Item me Range of data Description code 27 ODc Detection of analog input O disconnection Terminal 11 to terminal 28 OlDc Detection of analog input Ol 15 functions disconnection p ei 29 O2Dc Detection of analog input O2 disconnection Aani ALY TRIE 54 WCO Window comparator O Rati y 55 WCOI Window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 Window comparator O2 Maximuidirit level f b060 O Minimum limit level hysteresis width 2 ANUIT SVO O b063 Ol minimum of 0 to 100 a window comparators T PER ae Setting of maximum limit level 0 01 02 b066 02 Minimum li
354. otor constant selection Directly input the desired values for H030 to H034 When the offline auto tuning has not been performed the constants Hitachi general purpose motor constants of the motors in the same capacity class as the inverter have been set for H030 H230 to H034 H234 4 90 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 95 Sensorless vector control Related code A001 Frequency source setting A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors F001 Output frequency setting b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 H002 H202 Motor data selection 1st 2nd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H020 H220 Motor constant R1 1st 2nd motors H021 H221 Motor constant R2 1st 2nd motors H022 H222 Motor constant L 1st 2nd motors H023 H223 Motor constant lo 1st 2nd motors H024 H224 Motor constant J 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors The sensorless vector control function estimates and controls the motor speed and output torque on the basis of the inverter output voltage and output current and the motor constants set on the inverter This f
355. ou run the risk of electric shock or injury Do not remove rubber bushings from the wiring section Otherwise the edges of the wiring cover may damage the wire resulting in a short circuit or ground fault Make sure that the voltage of AC power supply matches the rated voltage of your inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire Do not input single phase power into the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not connect AC power supply to any of the output terminals U V and W Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire Do not connect a resistor directly to any of the DC terminals PD P and N Otherwise you run the risk of fire Connect an earth leakage breaker to the power input circuit Otherwise you run the risk of fire Use only the power cables earth leakage breaker and magnetic contactors that have the specified capacity ratings Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not use the magnetic contactor installed on the primary and secondary sides of the inverter to stop its operation Tighten each screw to the specified torque No screws must be left loose Otherwise you run the risk of fire Before operating slide switch SW1 in the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Since the inverter supports two modes of cooling fan operation the inverter power is not always off even when the cooling fan is stopped Therefore be sure to confi
356. out 20 when the inverter drives a motor that has the same output ratings as the inverter Data or range of data VIE characteristic SUVE A044 A244 03 Sensorless vector control selection FM siginal selection C027 Output torque AM siginal selection C028 ar ial selection C029 11 Output torque signed only for C028 0 20 to 75 0 kW Motor capacity selection H003 H203 lt 0 2 to 160 EN S Motor pole selection H004 H204 2 4 6 8 or 10 poles NOTE lt gt applied for 90 to 160kW Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions 4 2 97 Forcing function FOC The forcing function allows you to apply an exciting current via an input terminal to the inverter to pre build magnetic flux when 03 sensorless vector control is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 To use this function assign function 55 FOC to an intelligent input terminal After the FOC function is assigned the inverter will accept operation commands only when the FOC terminal is turned on If the FOC terminal is turned off while the inverter is operating the motor the inverter sets the motor into the free running state If the FOC terminal is turned on subsequently the inverter restarts the motor according to the setting of the restart mode after FRS b088 FOC FWRVW The inverter does not operate the motor because the
357. ove noise sources Main Cir EM OL LowSP Check whether the motor load is too high Reduce the load factor Check whether the communication speed setting is correct Check whether the wiring distance is NET ERR appropriate Check the connections Check whether the option board is mounted correctly Refer to the Check the board mounting instruction Check whether the option board is used manual for correctly the SJ DG Check the instruction manual for the option or SJ DN board 3 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power 4 The inverter will not accept the reset command entered from the digital operator Therefore reset the inverter by turning on the RS terminal 5 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes 7 Display on Display on remote The inverter detects errors in the option board mounted in the optional slot 2 For details refer to the instruction Option 2 manual for the mounted option board error If the input voltage falls the inverter will shut off its output display the code shown on the right and wait for the recovery of the input voltage Waiting in The inverter will display the same error undervoltage code also during an instantaneous status power failure remark Inverter trips with under voltage wh
358. ow i 00 command This command instructs the inverter to drive the motor for forward or reverse rotation or stop the motor To use this command set A002 to 03 RS485 Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No oo eee of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 00 Data Data to be transmitted 1 byte See Note 1 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 1 pe i Stop command 1 Forward rotation command s O Reverse rotation command gt gt S O Example When sending a forward rotation command to the inverter with station No 01 STX 01 00 1 BCC CR _ Conversion into ASCII format 02 30 31 30 30 31 33 30 0D Response frame Positive response See ltem 2 i of this section Negative response See ltem 2 ii of this section ii 01 command This command sets the inverter output frequency To use this command set A001 to 03 RS485 Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No aes olicontro target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command t
359. ows a 2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 02 and then press the key once to specify the digital operator as the operating device to input frequency setting commands The display reverts to A001 4 Select the digital operator as the operating device by the run command source setting function Display the function code A002 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a 2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 02 and then press the key once to specify the digital operator as the operating device to input operation commands The display reverts to A002 The operating device indicator lamp above the RUN key goes on 5 Set the output frequency Display the function code F001 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a preset output frequency With the factory setting 0 Hz is shown Use the and or 2 key to change the displayed numeric value to the desired output frequency and then press the key once to determine the frequency The display reverts t F001 6 Set the operation direction of the motor Display the function code F004 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows 00 or 01 3 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 3 Operation Use the A and or
360. pacity 100 VAC 10 mA 5 VDC 100 mA Allowable range of input Connect to an external thermistor to make the inverter trip if an abnormal voltages temperature is detected 0 to 8 VDC The CM1 terminal serves as the common terminal for this terminal Input circuit TH External Recommended thermistor properties x 2a 9 a S 2 2 Ta ro o Q O Relay contact output Status and alarm thermistor input Allowable rated power 100 mW or more Impedance at temperature error 3kQ a T The impedance to detect temperature errors can be adjusted within the range OQ to 9 9990 Analog input Thermistor CM1 2 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 3 Explanation of switch SW1 It is a switch that switches effective and the invalidity of the urgent disconnect function The state of the factory shipment this function invalidity Please use the urgent invalidity function after perusing 4 4 urgent disconnect function oo Slide switch SW1 Slide lever factory setting OFF or ID a Note Slide Switch 12 Some models have slide switch in the position as shown below Default setting of this switch is at ON position Please don t change the setting If it is changed inverter may trip and disabled to run Slide switch S
361. pins until it touches the Be careful not to bend the connector pins fixing screw seats Be careful not to break the board guide pins Precautions Push in the board slowly Be careful not to bend the connector pins Be careful not to break the board guide pins Secure the control circuit terminal block board with two fixing screws Precaution Be sure to fix the board with the two fixing screws A 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Appendix 2 Copying the parameter settings If you use an optional remote operator SRW OJ or SRW OEX you can copy import the parameter settings from the L300P series into the L700 series Note however that you cannot copy the parameter settings from the L700 series to the L800P series because the L700 series has many new functions and additional parameters Precaution Copying of the data on an optional operator SRW or SRW EX If you copy parameter data from the L700 or L300P series inverter in which the slide switch SW1 is set to OFF to the L700 series inverter in which the slide switch SW1 is set to ON the operator may momentarily display an error message R ERROR COPY ROM This event occurs because the data on intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 cannot be copied because the copy destination L700 series has exclusively assigned special functions to these terminals according to the ON setting of the slide switch SW1 Other parameter data is
362. place the Hi and Lo bytes of CRC 1 with each other Is the bit put out of CRC 1 1 Set the XOR of CRC 1 data and A001h in CRC 1 The target data is shifted by 1 byte v Header and trailer silent interval The header and trailer set the total time the inverter should wait before sending a response after having received a query from the master system Be sure to specify the time corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters 24 bits as the waiting time If a shorter waiting time corresponding to the transmission of fewer than 3 5 characters is specified the inverter will not respond The actual waiting time is the sum of the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters and the communication wait time C078 4 116 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Message configuration Response i Time required for communication After the inverter receives a query the inverter waits for the sum of the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters and the communication wait time C078 before sending a response After receiving a response from the inverter the master system must wait for the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters or longer before sending the next query to the inverter ii Normal response If the query specifies the func
363. quency Display 0 00 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 in steps of 0 1 Hz Note When you have selected the digital operator as the device to input frequency setting commands A001 02 you can change the output frequency setting by using the A and or V key only while the inverter is operating the motor The change in output frequency made in this mode can be reflected in the frequency setting function F001 Press the STR key to write the new frequency over the currently selected frequency setting You cannot change the output frequency while the PID function is enabled or the inverter is not operating the motor 4 1 2 Output current monitoring Related code When the output current monitoring function d002 is selected the d002 Output current monitoring inverter displays the output current The inverter displays 0 0 when the current output is stopped The A monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the output current Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1A 4 1 3 Rotation direction monitoring Related code When the rotation direction monitoring function d003 is selected the d003 Rotation direction monitoring inverter displays the motor operation direction The RUN lamp lights up while the inverter is operating the motor in forward or reverse direction Display F Forward operation o Motor stopped r Reverse operation 4 1 4 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring W
364. r entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power 5 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 5 Error Codes e Display on Display on gt If the inverter input voltage drops the control circuit of the inverter cannot function normally Therefore the inverter shuts off its output when the input voltage falls below a specified level Undervoltage The inverter will trip if the DC voltage across the P and N terminals exceeds about 175 VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 345 VDC in case of the 400 V class models If an error occurs in the internal current detector CT the inverter will shut off its CT error output and display the error code shown on the right The inverter will trip when the CT outputs about 0 6 V or more at power on If the internal CPU malfunctions or an error occurs in it the inverter will shut off CPU error its output and display the error code 3 shown on the right Note Reading an abnormal data from the EEPROM may result in a CPU error If an error occurs in the external equipment or device connected to the inverter the inverter will fetch the error External trip signal and shut off its output This protective function is enabled when the external trip function is enabled A USP error is indicated when the inverter power is turned on with an input operation signal remaining in the USP error invert
365. r in a well ventilated indoor site not exposed to direct sunlight Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to high temperature high humidity condensation dust explosive gases corrosive gases flammable gases grinding fluid mist or salt water Otherwise you run the risk of fire The inverter is precision equipment Do not allow it to fall or be subject to high impacts step on it or place a heavy load on it Doing so may cause the inverter to fail Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety Instructions 2 Wiring Be sure to ground the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Commit wiring work to a qualified electrician Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Before wiring make sure that the power supply is off Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Perform wiring only after installing the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or injury Do not remove rubber bushings from the wiring section Otherwise the edges of the wiring cover may damage the wire resulting in a short circuit or ground fault Make sure that the voltage of AC power supply matches the rated voltage of your inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire Do not input single phase power into the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not connect AC power supply to any of the output terminals U V and W Otherwis
366. r of poles of the motor Voltage compensation gain fA setting for automatic torque A046 A246 0 to 255 eae 2 Automatic torque boost Slippage compensation gain P setting for automatic torque A047 A247 0 to 255 acme r Automatic tordue boost 1 Automatic torque boost The inverter outputs the voltage according to the settings of the manual torque boost A042 A242 A342 and manual torque boost frequency adjustment A043 A243 A343 Use the manual torque boost value A042 A242 A342 to specify the rate of the boost to the voltage 100 set by the AVR voltage select The set rate of voltage corresponds to the boost voltage that is output when the output frequency is 0 Hz When increasing the value of the manual torque boost value be careful to prevent motor over excitation Over excitation may result in motor burnout Use the manual torque boost frequency adjustment A043 A243 A343 to specify the rate of the frequency at each breakpoint to the base frequency 100 To switch the settings among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings A041 to A043 A241 to A243 and A342 and A343 assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching Related code A041 A241 Torque boost selection 1st 2nd motors A042 A242 A342 Manual torque boost value 1st 2nd3rd motors A043 A243 A343 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 1st 2nd 3rd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1s
367. r operates the motor with a full voltage for the jogging operation the inverter can easily trip during the latter Adjust the jog frequency setting A038 properly so that the inverter will not trip Range of data Jog frequency A038 0 0 or start frequency Setting of the frequency to output during jogging setting to 9 99 Hz operation 2 Jog stop mode ltem Function code Data Description Disabling jogging while the motor is operating and enabling free running when the motor is stopped Disabling jogging while the motor is operating and 01 enabling stopping after deceleration when the motor is stopped 2 See Note 2 Disabling jogging while the motor is operating and enabling DC braking when the motor is stopped Jog stop mode Enabling jogging while the motor is operating and enabling free running when the motor is stopped Enabling jogging while the motor is operating and 04 enabling stopping after deceleration when the motor is stopped Enabling jogging while the motor is operating and 05 See Note 2 enabling DC braking when the motor is stopped Note 1 To perform the jogging operation always turn on the JG terminal before turning on the FW or RV terminals Follow this sequence of command inputs also when using the digital operator to enter operation commands Example 1 Example 2 a a T SS w l FW Output ee ee ae Output Deceleration ormal Eae id Jogging operation freq
368. rature monitoring d019 b98 PPE eee eee eee eee ete eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 z 4 4 1 16 Life check monitoring d022 Pere Pee rer rrerererererererrrrrererrerertrrrrrrrererererrrrrrrrreterirrirrr irri 4 Es 4 4 1 17 Program counter display easy Sequence FUNCTION A023 srete 4 4 4 1 18 Program number monitoring easy Sequence FUNCTION Q024 serrer 4 4 4 1 19 User monitors 0 to 2 easy sequence function eee eee Tete ere eee eee eee eee eee eee eed 4 a 5 4 1 20 Pulse counter monitor Pere eee Per eer rererere rere rerrrerrrerererrrerrrerrrerererrrrerrrerrrer iret errr errr errr errr erry 4 5 4 1 21 Trip Counter d080 PERE REE eee eT eee ere eet eer eee eee rete ere er ete eer eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee 4 5 4 1 22 Trip monitoring 1 to 6 d081 d082 to d086 PEPE eee Tete eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 5 4 1 23 Programming error monitoring d090 Pee e Eee eee eee eet terete ete eee eter eee eee eee ee eee eee 4 5 4 1 24 DC voltage monitoring d102 OPER e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 2 5 4 1 25 BRD load factor monitoring d103 b090 essssuseususossususuuousasonsususussusossasonsususussusossnsunusnnnn 4 6 4 1 26 Electronic thermal overload monitoring d104 ssnsssnnssnunsnnnsnuunnnunnnunsnunnnunsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 2 6 4 2 Function Mode OEE e Eee eee eer eee erate eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 al 7 4 2 1 Output frequency setting F001 A001 A020 C001 to C008 estresse 4 7 4 2 2 Keypad Run key
369. rformed at the occurrence of instantaneous power failure or undervoltage If you specify a retry operation for the selection of restart mode b001 the inverter will retry the motor operation for the number of times set as b005 after an instantaneous power failure or the number of times set as b009 after overvoltage respectively and then trip if all retries fail The inverter will not trip if you specify an unlimited number of retries With function b004 you can select whether to make the inverter trip when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occur while the inverter is in a stopped state When selecting a retry operation also set the retry conditions listed below according to the system to be driven by the inverter Even during a retry operation the inverter will trip with error code E09 undervoltage displayed if the undervoltage status continues for 40 seconds aaa 00 Tripping Restarting the motor with 0 Hz at retry Starting the motor with a matching frequency at retry 02 Selection of restart mode See example 1 3 4 6 b001 Starting the motor with a matching frequency at retry 03 The inverter trips after decelerating and stopping the motor 1 3 04 Restarting the motor with an input frequency at retry See example 1 3 Restarting the motor when the power failure duration does Allowable under voltage not exceed the specified time See example 1 power failure time b002 0 3 to 25 0 s
370. rimp terminals for the UL standard suitable for the use electric wire when you connect the electric wire with the main circuit terminal stand Please put on pressure to the crimp terminals with a crimp tool that the terminal stand maker recommends Connecting the control circuit to a power supply separately from the main circuit If the protective circuit of the inverter operates to open the magnetic contactor in the input power supply circuit the inverter control circuit power is lost and the alarm signal cannot be retained To retain the alarm signal connect control circuit terminals RO and TO to a power supply In details connect the control circuit power supply terminals RO and TO to the primary side of the magnetic contactor as shown below Connection method Power receiving specifications 200 V class model 200 to 240 V 410 15 50 60 Hz 5 282 to 339 VDC 400 V class model 380 to 480 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 537 to 678 VDC Remove the connected cables Remove the J51 connector Connect the control circuit power supply cables to the control circuit power supply terminal block Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Note the following when connecting separate power supplies to control circuit power supply terminals RO and TO and main circuit power supply terminals R S and T Use a cable thicker than 1 25 mm
371. ring 1 running time hours power on time hours e i PRR Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V do82 Trip monitoring 2 running time hours power on time hours F EE Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V do83 Trip monitoring 3 running time hours power on time hours 2 z E re Per Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V d084 Trip monitoring 4 running time hours power on time hours 7 r TR Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V do85 Trip monitoring 5 running time hours power on time hours i rae Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V d086 Trip monitoring 6 running time hours power on time hours 5 z 7 d090 Programming error monitoring Warning code 4 5 d102 DC voltage monitoring 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 5 d103 BRD load factor monitoring 0 0 to 100 0 4 6 Electronic thermal overload o d104 monitoring 0 0 to 100 0 4 6 8 3 Function Mode Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed or allowed or a not not 0 0 start frequency to maximum frequency F001 Output frequency setting or maximum frequency 2nd 3rd motors Hz 0 00 O O 4 7 0 0 to 100 0 when PID function is enabled F002 Acceleration 1 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 O Oo 4 10 Pade peceleratlon 1 time s
372. rm codes that can be output Intelligent output terminals When 4 bits is selected When 3 bits is selected Cause of wipping Factoroode Cause ottipning Factor code Cause of tripping Factor code Cause of tripping po fo Normal Normal operation E01 to E03 E04 Overcurrent protection E01 to E03 E04 Overcurrent protection 0 Overload protection Overload protection E05 E38 Low speed overload E05 Low speed overload protection protection Overvoltage input Overvoltage input E07 E19 overvoltage protection EOL EIS overvoltage protection EAKIENEN E09 Undervoltage protection E09 Undervoltage protection 1 1 E16 Instantaneous power failure E16 Instantaneous power protection faire protection o 1 1 0 E30 IGBT error Braking resistor overload protection Other error EEPROM CPU GA 1 E08 ae E23 communication or main circuit error eae ae Nal i of of 7 FIO CT error External trip USP error Fae E12 ese E35 thermistor error or braking error bet ft Ground fault protection See Invalid instruction in easy sequence Nesting error in easy E43 44 E45 sequence Easy sequence execution command error Temperature error due to low 1 1 0 1 E20 E21 cooling fan speed Temperature error 1 1 1 0 E24 Phase loss input protection Easy sequence user trip 0 9 1 i 1 d E30 10 673 option 1 2 error 0 9 00 No output of alarm code Alarm code outpu
373. rm that the power supply is off before wiring Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury 2 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 1 Terminal connection diagram and explanation of terminals and switch settings 3 phase power supply 200 V class 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 O 400 V class 380 to 480 V 10 15 d 50 60 Hz 5 When connecting separate power supplies to main and control circuits remove J51 connector cables beforehand Le See page 2 21 Power supply for control circuit dH PL Jumper Default jumper position sinking type inputs pal Forward rotation command O O Q f Oo O_O Pet meee Intelligent input O O O 8 contacts Digital monitor output PWM output L ize d 3 Frequency setting circuit 500 to 2 000Q Analog monitor output voltage output 0 to 10 V 10 bits fn 4 to 20 mA 10 bits Analog monitor output current output BAAD iw o Ep RUN BE a ai 1E Veoh ISTCP RESET Motor Braking resistor Q Jumper optional bar Models with 30kW or less capacity have a built in BRD circuit The dotted line indicates the detachable control terminal ALO board O O default alarm output Intelligent output 5 terminals I I i i Intelligent relay output contact i I i I I
374. rminal function C021 to C025 NDc Communication line disconnection signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 Epp io Setting of the limit time for Communication trip time C077 0 00 to 99 99 s reception timeout 4 70 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 69 Cooling fan speed drop signal WAF The inverter outputs the cooling fan speed drop WAF signal when it detects that the rotation speed of its internal cooling fan has fallen to 75 or less of the full speed If 01 has been selected for the cooling fan control 0092 the inverter will not output the WAF signal even when the cooling fan stops If the WAF signal is output check the cooling fan cover for clogging You can monitor the state of the WAF signal by using the life check monitoring function d022 Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function b092 Cooling fan control d022 Life check monitoring Terminal function C021 to C025 40 WAF Cooling fan speed Alarm relay terminal function C026 drop signal 4 2 70 Starting contact signal FR Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions The inverter outputs the starting contact FR signal while itis C026 Alarm relay terminal function receiving an operation command The FR signal is output regardless of the setting of the run command source setting
375. rol Output frequency range 0 1 to 400 Hz Note3 Frequency accuracy Within 0 01 of the maximum output frequency for digital input within 0 2 of maximum frequency for digital input at 25 10 C Frequency setting Digital input 0 01 Hz Analog input Maximum output frequency 4000 resolution O terminal input 12 bits 0 to 10 V O2 terminal input 12 bits 10 to 10 V Ol terminal input 12 bits 0 to 20 mA Voltage frequency V f characteristic variable with the base frequency set between 30 to 400 Hz constant or characteristic reduced torque V f control sensorless vector control Speed fluctuation 0 5 with sensorless vector control _Note8 Rated overload current 120 60 seconds Acceleration deceleration time 0 01 to 3 600 0 seconds in linear or curved pattern Starting torque 150 0 5 Hz with sensorless vector control 120 0 5Hz do to DC braking Triggered at motor start up when the actual motor frequency exceeds the acceleration frequency set by a stop command when the actual motor frequency exceeds the frequency set by a frequency command or by an externally input command braking force time and frequency are variable 7 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications 3 Common specifications of 200 V class and 400 V class models continued Model name type nam
376. ronic thermal protection is easily protection If the error occurs the inverter will trip triggered when the output frequency is 5 Hz or 1 according to the setting of the electronic less If the moment of inertia of the load is large thermal function this protective function may operate when the inverter accelerates the motor and the acceleration may be disabled If this problem occurs increase the torque boost current or adjust other settings as needed When the BRD operation rate exceeds Check whether the inverter has decreased the the setting of b090 this protective motor quickly function shuts off the inverter output and Increase the deceleration time Braking displays the error code shown on the Check whether the operation cycle is too short resistor right E Prolong the operation cycle overload Check whether the set BRD operation rate is protection too low Adjust the setting to an appropriate level Note confirm the maximum allowable capacity of the resistor If the DC voltage across the P and N terminals rises too high an inverter failure may result To avoid this problem this protective function shuts off the inverter output and displays the error code shown on the right when the DC voltage across the P and N terminals exceeds a specified level because of an increase in the energy regenerated by the motor or the input voltage during operation The inverter will trip if the DC voltage across the P and N termi
377. rted after the delay When setting the DC braking time with function A055 or for the DC braking operation via the DB terminal determine the length of time in consideration of the heat generation on the motor Select the braking mode by the DC braking edge or level detection for DB input A056 and then make any other necessary settings suitable for your system a Edge mode A056 00 b Level mode A056 01 Example 1 a FW DB S E Output 1 Example 1 b FW DB E Output Example 2 a Output ho frequency lt A055 gt Example 2 b rs Output frequency Example 3 a as es Output Free running frequency D a A055 A053 l lt gt lt gt Example 3 b w Tq L o Free running Output 9 frequency T L A053 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Internal DC braking A051 01 You can apply DC braking to the motor even without entering braking signals via the DB terminal when the inverter starts and stops To use the internal DC braking function specify 01 for the DC braking enable A051 Use function A057 to set the DC braking force for starting and use function A058 to specify the DC braking time for starting regardless of the braking mode selection edge or level mode See examples 4 a and 4 b Set the braking for
378. rter is expiring Use the life warning as an indication for the timing of part replacement For details see Sections 4 1 16 Life check monitoring 4 2 58 Intelligent output terminal setting and 4 2 59 Intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection The self diagnosis for the life warning is based on the expected design life which is not the guaranteed life of each part The actual parts life may vary depending on the inverter operation environment and conditions 6 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 9 Methods of Measuring the Input Output Voltages Current and Power This section describes the measuring instruments generally used to measure the input and output voltages output current and output power of the inverter Power supply Measurement item Measuring point Measuring instrument Remarks Reference values Input voltage Ew Input current ln Across R S S T and T R Er Es and Er Current at R S and T In Is and Ir Moving iron voltmeter or f rectifier type voltmeter Moving iron ammeter Effective value of full waves Effective value of full waves 200 V class models 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 400 V class 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz When input currents are unbalanced lin IR ls 4 17 3 Input power Win Across R S S T and T R Wia
379. s 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the motor temperature is 0 C or less General analog YA 0 See example 1 1 This signal is output only when the V F characteristic curve selection see Section 4 2 17 is the sensorless vector control 00 4 Output voltage See example 1 0 to 133 75 of full scale is equivalent to 100 Input power See example 1 0 to 200 C027 Electronic thermal overload 0 to 100 See example 1 08 Digital current monitoring See example 2 E Heat sink temperature See example 1 Example 1 When 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 or 12 is Example 2 When 03 or 08 us selected slected t t lt _1 Cycle T Fixed 6 4 ms Cycle T Varied Duty t T Varied Duty t T Fixed 1 2 2 Digital current monitoring If the output current matches the digital current monitor reference value C030 the FM terminal will output a signal indicating 1 440 Hz Item Range of data Digital current monitor reference value C030 0 2 x rated current to Setting of the current for 1 5 x rated current A 1 440 Hz output 3 For detail of the function refer Programming software Ez SQ user manual 4 When b086 frequency scaling conversion facto is set the value converted by gain is diplayed refer 4 1 7 Scaled output frequency monitoring 2 FM terminal analog meter adjustment Adjust the inverter output gain for the external met
380. s 0 C or less f Output only from the AM terminal 0 Output torque signed S 4 2 General analog YA eats from the AM terminal 0 to 100 1 This signal is output only when the V F characteristic curve selection see Section 4 2 17 is the sensorless vector control 2 The specifications of the output torque signed are as follows AM output V When the AM gain C106 is 100 When the AM gain C106 is 200 When the AM offset C109 is 50 Torque 0 100 200 3 For detail of the function refer Programing software Ez SQ user manual 2 AM AMI adjustment Adjust the inverter output gain for the external meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals Range of data Setting of the gain for AM monitoring C106 50 to 200 Setting of the gain for AM monitoring Setting of the offset for AM monitoring C109 0 to 100 Setting of the offset for AM monitoring Setting of the gain for AMI monitoring C107 50 to 200 Setting of the gain for AMI monitoring Setting of the offset for AMI monitoring C110 O to 100 Setting of the offset for AMI monitoring Note The offset data is in percentage Example When the current range of AMI terminal output is 4 to 20 mA default the offset of 4 mA is 20 4 77 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 83 Initialization setting The initialization function
381. s Data resolution bara 125Fh PID Function Enable A071 ro 1 enabling 2 enabling inverted data utput PID proportional gain to 50 PID integral time constant to 36000 PID derivative gain to 10000 PV scale conversion to 9999 input via Ol 1 input via O 2 external 1264h PV source setting A076 R W communication 3 pulse train frequency input 10 operation result output gt a oO oO oO o fo 1265h__ Reverse PID A077 R W_ 00 disabling 01 enabling 1266h PID output limiter A078 0 to 1000 1267h PID feed forward selection A079 R W_ 0 disabled 1 O input 2 Ol input 3 O2 input 1268h _ Reserved RM Inaccessible 1269h AVR function select A081 always on 1 always off 2 off during deceleration 00 V class 0 200 1 215 2 220 3 230 4 240 126Ah AVR voltage select A082 R W 400 V class 5 380 6 400 7 415 8 440 9 460 10 480 126Bh_ Reserved RM Inaccessible 126Ch__ Reserved RM Inaccessible 0 normal operation 1 energy saving operation 2 126Dh Operation mode selection A085 R W fuzzy operation 126Eh__ Energy saving mode tuning A086 R W_ 0 to 1000 0 1 Be rove west 1274h Acceleration 2 time A092 high 1275h __ setting A092 low _R w_ t 360000 0 01 Ree 1276h__ Deceleration 2 time A093 high se seanbn 0 01 sec 1277h__ setting A093 low Select method to switch to ois pets 1278h Acc2 Dec profile A094 0 switching by 2C
382. s E power failure Instantaneous power failure undervoltage 4 33 10 TRQ Torque limited Torque limitation function 4 92 11 RNT Operation time over Operation time over signal 4 66 12 ONT Plug in time over Plug in time over signal 4 66 13 THM Thermal alarm signal Electronic thermal protection 4 37 21 ZS 0 Hz detection signal 0 Hz detection signal 4 66 24 FA4 Set frequency overreached 2 Frequency arrival signals 4 64 25 FA5 Set frequency reached 2 26 OL2 Overload notice advance signal 2 Overload restriction overload notice advance signal 4 40 27 _ Odc Analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc Analog Ol disconnection detection Window comparators function 4 74 29 O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID feedback comparison PID function 4 26 32 _ NDc Communication line disconnection RS485 4 67 33 LOG1 Logical operation result 1 34 LOG2 Logical operation result 2 35 LOG3 Logical operation result 3 36 LOG4 Logical operation result 4 moa eet operation function 466 37 LOGS5 Logical operation result 5 38 LOG6 Logical operation result 6 39 WAC Capacitor life warning Capacitor life warning 4 70 40 WAF Cooling fan speed drop Cooling fan speed drop 4 71 41 FR Starting contact signal Starting contact signal 4 71 42 _ OHF Heat sink overheat warning Heat sink overheat warning 4 71 43 _ LOC Low current indication signal Low current indication signal 4 72 44 MO1 General output 1 45 M02 General output 2 4
383. s the motor in this way reduce the setting of b028 After the inverter output has been shut off the digital operator continues to display O O O until the inverter restarts the motor operation 2 a es re 028 Output current J Deceleration according to the setting of b029 Inverter output frequency Frequency selected as the setting of b030 Motor speed 003 lt _S 4 2 28 Phase loss power input protection Related code The phase loss power input protection function gives a warning when b006 Phase loss detection enable phase loss power is input to the inverter Phase loss detection ae 00 Disabling the protection enable Enabling the protection An phase loss power input may cause the following conditions resulting in an inverter failure 1 The ripple current increases in the main capacitor and the capacitor life will be shortened significantly 2 When the inverter is connected to a load the internal converter or thyristor of the inverter may be damaged 4 36 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 29 Electronic thermal protection Related code The electronic thermal protection function allows you to protect b012 b212 b312 Electronic thermal setting the motor against overheating Make settings of this function ra ater le inverterifroni cuirent ouiput based on the rated current o
384. se motor 3 The online auto tuning operates for a maximum of 5 seconds after the motor has stopped DC excitation is executed once to tune constants R1 and R2 The result of tuning is not reflected in the data displayed on the monitor If an operation command is input during the auto tuning operation the online auto tuning ends midway because the operation command has priority over the online auto tuning In such cases the result of tuning is not reflected in the inverter settings 4 When the DC braking at stopping has been specified the online tuning is performed after the DC braking operation ends 5 When FOC SON terminals are assigned online auto tuning is not executed Operating procedure 1 Specify 02 enabling the online auto tuning for the motor constant selection H002 Specify 00 disabling the auto tuning for the Auto tuning Setting H001 2 Input an operation command The inverter will automatically perform the online auto tuning after the motor stops 4 88 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 93 Secondary resistance compensation temperature compensation function The secondary resistance compensation function allows you to compensate for the secondary resistance to control the motor speed fluctuations due to the changes in the motor temperature This function can operate when the control mode is the sensorless
385. setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A004 A204 A304 Maximum frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A020 A220 A320 Multispeed frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A041 A241 Torque boost method selection 1st 2nd motors A042 A242 A342 Manual torque boost value 1st 2nd 3rd motors A043 A243 A343 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 1st 2nd 3rd motors A044 A244 A344 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors A046 A246 Voltage compensation gain setting for automatic torque boost 1st 2nd motors A047 A247 Slippage compensation gain setting for automatic torque boost 1st 2nd motors A061 A261 Frequency upper limit setting 1st 2nd motors A062 A262 Frequency lower limit setting 1st 2nd motors A092 A292 A392 Acceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A093 A293 A393 Deceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A094 A294 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile 1st 2nd motors A095 A295 Acci to Acc2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors A096 A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors b012 b212 b312 Electronic thermal setting calculated within the inverter from current output 1st 2nd 3rd motors b013 b213 b313 Electronic thermal characteristic 1st 2nd 3rd motors H002 H202 Motor data selection 1st 2nd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H006 H206 H306 Motor stabilization co
386. stop EMR signal This signal shuts off the inverter output without the operation by internal CPU software This signal makes the inverter trip due to emergency stop E37 Note If intelligent input terminal 3 is left unconnected the cable connected to the terminal is disconnected or the signal logic is improper the inverter trips due to emergency stop E37 If this occurs check and correct the wiring and signal logic and then input the reset RS signal Only the reset RS signal input from intelligent input terminal 1 can release the inverter from tripping due to emergency stop E37 The inverter cannot be released from the E37 status by any operation from the digital operator To enable the emergency stop function set the slide lever of slide switch SW1 to ON With the factory setting slide switch SW1 is set to OFF to disable the function Note Before operating slide switch SW1 make sure that the input power supply is off Setting of slide switch SW1 setting and function selection for intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 Setti f slid i Intelligent input terminal 1 Intelligent input terminal 3 etting of slide switc Sw1 Terminal 1 function C001 a b o Seeon Terminal 3 function C003 T on SW1 is OFF Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable IG Selectable arbitrarily Selectable arbitrarily 4 Emerdenoy Stop Factor Factor Factor Factor disabled tory 18 RS Ory 00 NO Ory 06 JG y 0 NO factor
387. storation b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery to be done Example 1 Example 2 Voltage across main circuit terminals P and N Voltage across main circuit terminals P and N Vpn V VPA ee DC voltage across main Circuit Recovery of input power Period of DC voltage 3 wae frequency constant contor ant contro Z SEERE bo5o oS running gt Ti Output frequency ane Hz b050 02 b050 02 03 4 decelerate to stop Recovery of input power Recovery of input power Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code H001 Auto tuning Setting H002 H202 Motor data selection 1st motor H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st motor H004 H204 Motor poles setting dst motor H030 H230 Auto constant R1 1 1a motor H031 H231 Auto constant R2 1 2 motor H032 H232 Auto constant L 1 2 motor H033 H233 Auto constant lo 1 2 motor H034 H234 Auto constant J 1 2 motor A003 A203 Base frequency setting A051 DC braking selection A082 AVR voltage select b046 Reverse run proctection enable 4 2 91 Offline auto tuning function The offline auto tuning function allows you to make the inverter automatically measure and set the motor constants that are required for the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control and vector control with s
388. struction Manual it will not be resupplied so please keep it carefully No part of this Instruction Manual may be reproduced in any form without the publisher s permission If you find any incorrect description missing description or have a question concerning the contents of this Instruction Manual please contact the publisher Revision History First edition a Fs The current edition of this Instruction Manual also includes some corrections of simple misprints missing letters misdescriptions and certain added explanations other than those listed in the above Revision History table Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety Instructions Safety Instructions Be sure to read this Instruction Manual and appended documents thoroughly before installing operating maintaining or inspecting the inverter In this Instruction Manual safety instructions are classified into two levels namely WARNING and CAUTION lt gt WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations which may result in serious personal injury or death CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations which may result in moderate or slight personal injury or physical damage alone Note that even a CAUTION level situation may lead to a serious consequence according to circumstances Be sure to follow every safety instruction which contains importa
389. t 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors Output voltage 100 A043 A243 A343 Base frequency Output 100 frequency 4 18 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Automatic torque boost When automatic torque boost data 01 is selected by the torque boost selection A041 A241 the inverter automatically adjusts the output frequency and voltage according to the load on the motor During actual operation the automatic torque boost is usually combined with the manual torque boost When you select the automatic torque boost adjust the settings of the motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole selection HO04 H204 according to the motor to be driven If the inverter trips due to overcurrent during motor deceleration set the AVR function select A081 to always enable the AVR function data 00 If you cannot obtain the desired operation characteristic by using the automatic torque boost make the following adjustments Symptom Adjustment method Adjustment item 1 Increase the voltage setting for manual torque boost A042 A242 on by step ao Sing micientat low 2 Increase the slippage compensation gain for A047 A247 speed nomate torque boost step by step Ki nemotor goes nolrotate view 3 Increase the voltage compensation gain for speed 9 p 9 A046 A246 suena torque boost step by step
390. t Output of 3 bit code Output of 4 bit code 4 68 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 66 Logical output signal operation function LOG1 to LOG6 Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C142 Logical output signal 1 selection 1 C143 Logical output signal 1 selection 2 C144 Logical output signal 1 operator selection C145 Logical output signal 2 selection 1 C146 Logical output signal 2 selection 2 C147 Logical output signal 2 operator selection C148 Logical output signal 3 selection 1 C149 Logical output signal 3 selection 2 C150 Logical output signal 3 operator selection C151 Logical output signal 4 selection 1 C152 Logical output signal 4 selection 2 C153 Logical output signal 4 operator selection C154 Logical output signal 5 selection 1 C155 Logical output signal 5 selection 2 C156 Logical output signal 5 operator selection C157 Logical output signal 6 selection 1 C158 Logical output signal 6 selection 2 C159 Logical output signal 6 operator selection The logical output signal operation function allows you to make the inverter internally perform a logical operation of output signals This function applies to all output signals except to logical operation results LOG1 to LOG6 Three types of operators AND OR and XOR are sel
391. t selected by the AVR voltage select function A082 Base Maximum frequency frequency Range of data Maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 30 to 400 Hz The maximum output frequency is set 4 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 11 External analog input setting O Ol and O2 The inverter has the following three types of external analog input terminals O L terminal O to 10 V Ol L terminal 4 to 20 mA O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V Related code A005 AT selection A006 O2 selection C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions The table below lists the settings of the external analog input terminals Function Item code Switching between the O and Ol Turning on the AT terminal enables the OI L terminal terminals with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O L terminal Switching between the O and O2 Turning on the AT terminal enables the O2 L terminal terminals with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O L terminal Valid only when the OPE SR is used Turning on the AT terminal enables the pot on AT Switching between the O terminal and OPE SR terminal the control with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O L terminal Valid only when the OPE SR is used Turning on the AT terminal enables the pot on Switching between the Ol terminal and OPE SR terminal the con
392. t0 255 GOA SPY Haas Ra eee ee are a eee wf o f o A247 ouiomatic tordue boost nd motor 1O 258 wj o j 9 A051 DC braking enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 set frequency only 00 x O A052 DC braking frequency setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 50 x Oo A053 DC braking wait time 0 0 to 5 0 s 0 0 x O A054 DC braking force during deceleration 0 to 70 lt 0 to 50 gt 0 x O A055 DC braking time for deceleration 0 0 to 60 0 s 0 5 x O 4 20 2 A056 A onlevel detection for 00 edge operation 01 level operation 01 x O A057 DC braking force for starting 0 to 70 lt 0 to 50 gt 0 x O A058 DC braking time for starting 0 0 to 60 0 s 0 0 x O A059 DC braking carrier frequency setting 0 5 to 12 0 kHz lt 0 5 to 8 0 kHz gt 3 0 x x gt A061 Frequency upper limit setting 0 00 or 1st minimum frequency limit to maximum frequency Hz 0 00 x O 5 A261 Frequency upper limit setting 2nd motor 0 00 or 2nd minimum frequency limit to maximum frequency 2nd motor Hz 0 00 x O 404 g A062 Frequency lower limit setting 0 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency limit Hz 0 00 x O A262 Frequency lower limit setting 2nd motor 0 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor limit Hz 0 00 x O 5 A063 Jump center frequency setting 1 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x D g A064 Jump hysteresis frequency width 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 50 o setting 1 ra A065 Jump
393. ta The data contains a functional instruction The L700 series inverter supports the following Modbus data format Coil data 1 bit binary data that can be referenced and changed Register data 16 bit data that can be referenced and changed Function code The function code specifies the function to be executed by the inverter The table below lists the function codes supported by the L700 series inverter ii Function codes Maximum number of data Maximum data count in a Function code Function i bytes in a message message Reads the coil status 32 coils in units of bit Reads registers tC 4 registers in units of byte Writes data to a coil T coil in units of bit Osh _ Performs aloopbacktest o o5 T 10h Writes data to multiple registers 8 amp 8 S registers in units of byte _ 4 115 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iv Error check code The Modbus RTU protocol uses the cyclic redundancy check CRC as the error check method The CRC code is the 16 bit data generated for a data block that has an arbitrary data length in units of 8 bits A generative polynomial for CRC 16 X X X 1 is used to generate the CRC code Example of CRC 16 calculation CRC 16 operation CRC FFFFh CRC CRC register 2 bytes Set the XOR of CRC 1 data and target data in CRC 1 Re
394. ta Description th Both forward and reverse operations are enabled Rotational direction TEA b035 01 Only forward operation is enabled restriction 02 Only reverse operation is enabled 4 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 4 Frequency source setting Related code The frequency source setting function allows you to select the method to A001 Frequency source setting input the frequency setting command Motor rotation direction is inverted when 10 to OV is given as frequency command to 02 L terminals E a EE Description Valid a o when the OPE SR is used Use the control a o on the digital operator to set the frequency Input the frequency setting command via a control circuit terminal 0 L Ol L or O2 L Use the digital operator function F001 or remote operator to set the frequency Input the frequency setting command via an R8485 communication F terminal roquengy Input the frequency setting command from the board connected to source A001 setting optional port 1 Input the frequency setting command from the board connected to optional port 2 Use the SJ FB to input the frequency setting command as a pulse train see 4 2 21 Use the SET Freq command of the easy sequence function as the frequency setting command Use the operation result of the set frequency operation function as the frequency setting comma
395. ta Settings 8 1 Precautions for Data Setting PEC e ee Chee eee A T eee beede cen A N ded ereenacececeusteiueesueuderssenceutsuceeGessuttusecwstusecs 8 es 1 8 2 Monitoring Mode TTT PCCER TT TEPER Ee TER PRT PCCLE TET E EE TLE NE A EN E E E E ree rere rrr 8 a 1 8 3 Function Mode PRTETTTETITETITTRTET RC CCRRT TERRE TTP ETRE E A EVE E errr A A rere errr rercer rere rcrre err 8 2 8 4 Extended Function Mode I A E N A E A A E E A E E E A ET E 8 a 3 Appendix Appendix PEELE ECE CEER TCP LEEPER CEE EEE CET CEP CEEP TELE CE eee CCE Ere CCC CLEL TITEL CEEETCP LETT CETTE EEE RCC LELE PET CEO Cee EEE EC RCE TSS A 1 Index din dd dius Uieie A WWeineleGlee Usisa welele sd ciseUlee Ws Due beleG Suis UGleGUciseSeus cue bee E bee sGcisnSeleddsuebeledaneebiledesiicsletesine seucmuiegnweusas Index 1 xii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 1 Overview This chapter describes the inspection of the purchased product the product warranty and the names of parts 1 1 Inspection of the Purchased Product esee 1 1 1 2 Method of Inquiry and Product Warranty 1 2 1 3 Exterior Views and Names of Parts evevenes e 1 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 Inspection of the Purchased Product 1 1 1 Inspecting the product After unpacking inspect the product as described below If you find the product to be abnormal or defective conta
396. temperature 10 heat sink temperature 14 eneral purpose output YA2 Digital current monitor 00 to 1500 R W_ 0 NO 4 N Zz ool oo LeLeLeLeEE S fo IW 1 DO 2 2 PUPPY ojlo 22 2 2222 2 1425h_ Reserved J A 0 output during acceleration deceleration and 1426h Se coe signal C038 R W constant speed operation 1 output only during P constant speed operation 1424h Alarm relay active state C036 NO 1 Q o w o HE a Low current indication signal 1427h detection level R W 0 to 1500 0 1 00 output during acceleration deceleration and 1428h Overload signal output mode C040 W_ constant speed operation constant speed operation 1429h Overload level setting C041 R W_ 0 to 1500 1 1 01 output only during oO a zm a O O 4 138 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions C042 high 142Bh Frequency arrival setting for accel C042 low rRw to 40000 0 01 Hz 142Ch 7 C043 high 142Dh Frequency arrival setting for decel C043 low Rw to 40000 0 01 Hz 142Eh PID deviation level setting C044 R W_ 0 to 1000 0 1 142Fh_ Frequency arrival setting for C045 high RW fo to 40000 0 01 Hz 1430h_ acceleration 2 C045 low 1431h_ Frequency arrival setting for C046 high 0 01 Hz 1432h deceleration 2 1433h to 1
397. ter function at the original position Note that only inverter models with a capacity of less than 22 kW have the RB terminal Motor Power supply 4 7 aa aan Ty 4 T Ground Ground W Do not connect terminal terminal power supply cables to the inverter 500 VDC megger Do not connect the inverter cables to the motor Be sure to remove the jumper for switching the internal filter function 6 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 5 Withstand Voltage Test Do not carry out a withstand voltage test for the inverter The test may damage its internal parts or cause them to deteriorate 6 6 Method of Checking the Inverter and Converter Circuits You can check the quality of the inverter and converter circuits by using a tester Preparation 1 Remove the external power supply cables from terminals R T and T the motor cables from terminals U V and W and the regenerative braking resistor cables from terminals P and RB 2 Prepare a tester Use the 1Q measuring range Checking method Measure the current conduction at each of the inverter s main circuit terminals R S T U V W RB P and N while switching the tester polarity alternately Note 1 Before checking the circuits measure the voltage across terminals P and N with the tester in DC voltage range mode to confirm that the smoothing capacitor
398. terms of functions After assigning the desired functions to intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 confirm that the assigned functions have been stored on the inverter 01 _ RV Reverse RUN command Operationcommand 03 A i Multispeed operation function 06 JG Jogging Jogging operation function 08 SET Set2ndmotordata SS 2nd 3rd motorcontrolfunction 451 09 2CH 2 stage acceleration deceleration 2 stage acceleration deceleration function FRS Free run stop External trip function nattended start protection function 48 4 4 58 U 4 57 CS Commercial power source enable Commercial power supply switching function 4 54 SFT Software lock control circuit terminal block Software lock function AT Analog input voltage current select External analog input setting function SET3 3rd motor control 2nd 3rd motor control function RS Reset STA Starting by 3 wire input STP Stopping by 3 wire input 3 wire input function 4 58 F R Forward reverse switching by 3 wire input 4 26 59 C001 to C008 Se PP disable bap uncon 88 Remote control UP DWN function 4 57 SF4 Multispeed 4 setting bit operation Multispeed operation function SF6 Multispeed 6 setting bit operation SF7 Multispeed 7 setting bit operation Torque limitation function 4 47 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 51 F TM Forcible terminal operation Forc
399. th a matching frequency at retry 03 The inverter trips after decelerating and stopping the motor Restarting the motor with an input frequency at retry Retrying the motor operation up to 16 times after Selection of retry count b009 undervoltage after undervoltage 01 Retrying the motor operation an unlimited number of times after undervoltage Selection of retry count 3 i Number of retries to be made after the occurrence of are oF b010 1 10 Siimes overvoltage or overcurrent 5 Retry walt ime after b011 0 3 to 100 s Time to wait until restarting the motor overvoltage or overcurrent 00 Frequency set when the inverter output has been shut off Active frequency matching b030 Maximum frequency restart frequency select Newly set frequency Active frequency matching Dea s b028 current to 1 50 x Current limit for restarting with active matching frequency scan start frequency rated current Active frequency matching Duration of frequency lowering when restarting with active 4 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions i 2 3 4 S 6 7 If the inverter trips because of overvoltage or overcurrent while decelerating the motor the inverter will display error code E16 instantaneous power failure and the motor will start free running If this error occurs prolong the deceleration time If a DC voltage
400. th power of VP free V f characteristic sensorless vector control Related code A044 A244 A344 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C063 Zero speed detection level Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 214 ZS 0 Hz speed detection signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 Zero speed detection level C063 0 00 to 100 0 Hz oe E 12S 4 66 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 64 Over torque signal OTQ Related code A044 A244 A344 V F characteristic curve selection The inverter outputs the over torque signal when it detects 1st 2nd 3rd motors C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions that the estimated motor output torque exceeds the specified level C055 Over torque forward driving level setting C056 Over torque reverse regenerating level setting To enable this function assign function 07 OTQ over torque signal to an intelligent output terminal C057 Over torque reverse driving level setting C058 Over torque forward regenerating level setting This function is effective only when the V F characteristic curve selection selected with function A044 or A244 is the sensorless vector control With any other V F characteristic curve selection the output of the OTQ signal is unpredictable When usi
401. the Modbus RTU mode is selected C078 01 Write the setting data on the assumption that 10000 indicates 100 to register address 0006h Register Function name Function code Readable writaole Monitored data or setting Data No R W resolution 0006h PID feedback RW O to 10000 0 01 Note This register is readable and writable However this register can be read only when Modbus RTU has been specified as the communication mode for PID feedback It cannot be read with other settings When pulse train input is specified for PID feedback the input pulse train frequency Hz is converted to a percentage with maximum frequency corresponding to 100 and fetched as the feedback For the pulse train input frequency see Section 4 3 21 4 Feed forward selection Select the terminal to be used for the feed forward signal through PID feed forward selection A079 Even if the terminal selected for the target or feedback data is also selected for the terminal by A079 the terminal functions according to the setting of A079 Specifying the value to disable selection for A079 disables feed forward control 5 Output of inverted PID deviation Some sensor characteristics may cause the polarity of the deviation of feedback data from the target value to be inconsistent with the inverter operation command If the inconsistency occurs specify 01 for function A077 to invert the polarity of the deviation Example When contr
402. the easy sequence program Range of data Acceleration 1 time F002 F202 0 01 to 3600 s Set the length of time to accelerate the motor from 0 setting F302 Hz to the maximum frequency Deceleration 1 time F003 F203 Set the length of time to decelerate the motor from 0 01 to 3600 s setting F303 the maximum frequency to 0 Hz 00 Input from the digital operator OPE Output frequency Accel decel time input P031 selection Maximum frequency i i Set output frequency Actual i Actua etl deceleration _ acceleration time time f F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 The actual time to accelerate decelerate the motor will be no less than the minimum acceleration deceleration time that depends on the inertial effect J due to the mechanical system and motor torque If you set a time shorter than the minimum acceleration deceleration time the inverter may trip because of overcurrent or overvoltage Acceleration time ts JL Jm X Nm Ji Inertia effect J of the load converted to that of the motor shaft kg m 9 55x Ts TL Juz Inertia effect J of the motor kg m Nu Motor speed rpm Ts Maximum acceleration torque driven by the inverter N m Tp Maximum deceleration torque driven by the inverter N m T Required running torque N m i Deceleration time ts JL Jm x Nm 9 55x Te TL ts 4 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Ema
403. the frequency to be added C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Item Data or range of data Description Frequency to be added A145 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Setting of the frequency to be added Selection of the sign of the A146 00 Frequency command A145 frequency to be added Frequency commana A145 j ADD selection of the trigger for adding Terminal function C001 to C008 the frequency A145 Note 1 If the sign of the frequency value in the frequency command changes from minus to plus or vice versa as the result of frequency addition the motor operation direction will be inverted Note 2 When the PID function is used the frequency addition function can apply to PID target data In such cases the data display by function A145 is in percentage in steps of 0 01 4 2 14 Start end frequency setting for external analog input The start end frequency setting function Related code allows you to set the inverter output A011 O L input active range start frequency A103 Ol L input active range start current A012 O L input active range end frequency A104 Ol L input active range end current frequency in relation to the external analog A013 O L input active range start voltage A105 Ol L input start frequency enable A014 O L input active range end voltage A111 02 L input active range start frequency inputs frequency commands via the A015 O L input start fr
404. the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 The free run stop FRS function operates as long as the FRS terminal is on When the FRS terminal is turned off the inverter restarts the motor after the retry wait time b003 However the inverter does not restart the motor if the digital operator 02 has been specified for the run command source setting A002 To restart the motor in such status enter a new operation command You can select the inverter output mode for restarting with the restart mode after FRS b088 from starting the motor with 0 Hz starting the motor with a matching frequency and restarting the motor with the input frequency See examples 1 2 and 3 Even when restarting with matching frequency has been selected the inverter restarts the motor with 0 Hz if it detects a frequency lower than the restart frequency threshold b007 The settings including that of the FRS terminal which you make for this function will affect the inverter operation at recovery of the motor from the free running status Data or range of data 00 O Start with 0 Hz See example 1 a b088 Start with matching frequency See example 2 Restart with input frequency See example 3 Retry wait time before i i i b003 0 3 to 100 s Time to wait until restarting the motor Restart frequency Setting of the minimum level for frequency threshold 5007 0 00 10 400 0 Fiz adjustment Related code b088 Restart mode after FRS b003 Retry
405. tion 2 02 4 8 amp A003 Base frequency setting 30 to maximum frequency Hz 60 x x Base frequency setting i o A203 2nd motor 30 to maximum frequency 2nd motor Hz 60 x x 4 11 N i aa Base frequency setting may n x x A303 3rd motor 30 to maximum frequency 3rd motor Hz 60 A004 Maximum frequency setting 30 to 400 Hz 60 x x A204 Maximum frequency setting 2nd motor 30 to 400 Hz 60 x x 4 11 A304 Maximum frequency setting 3rd motor 30 to 400 Hz 60 x x 00 switching between O and Ol terminals 01 switching between O and O2 terminals A005 AT selection 02 switching between O terminal and keypad potentiometer 1 00 x x 03 switching between Ol terminal and keypad potentiometer 1 04 switching between O2 and keypad potentiometer 1 4 12 j 00 single D 01 auxiliary frequency input via O and Ol terminals nonreversible A006 02 selection 02 auxiliary frequency input via O and Ol terminals reversible 03 x x g 03 disabling O2 terminal A011 OJ L input active range start frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O a A012 O L input active range end frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O D g A013 O L input active range start voltage 0 to O L input active range end voltage 0 x O 4 14 lt qT A014 O L input active range end voltage O L input active range start voltage to 100 100 x O A015 OTL input
406. tion code 08h for the loopback test the inverter returns a response that has the same contents as the query If the query specifies a function code 05h 06h OFh or 10h for writing data to registers or coils the inverter returns the query without a change as a response If the query specifies a function code 01h or 03h for reading a register or coil the inverter returns a response that contains the slave address and function code specified in the query and the data read from the register or coil ii Response upon error Field configuration Slave address Exception code CRC 16 If the query includes an error other than a communication error the inverter returns an exception response without executing the function specified by the query To know the error check the function code set in the exception response The exception response in reply to a query includes a function code that is the sum of 80h and the function code specified by the query The exception code in the exception response indicates the content of the error Exception codes Writing to a register during tripping because of undervoltage Writing to a read only register coil The inverter restricts the execution of the specified function Rewriting a register that cannot be rewritten during the operation 22h Issuing an Enter command during the operation in undervoltage status iv lt No response The inverter ignores a q
407. tion function and set the overload restriction level to 1 5 times as high as the rated current of the motor Note10 It is likely not to decelerate when the voltage of the power supply is high when Optimum accel decel operation function is used In this case please cut power off and stop the motor And please turn on the power supply again change the setting of this function to Normal operation or Energy saving operation and use it 4 83 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 90 Deceleration and stopping at power failure nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure The nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure is the function making the inverter decelerate and stop the motor while maintaining the voltage below the overvoltage level when an instantaneous power failure occurs during the inverter operation You can select three modes with controller deceleration and stop on power loss b050 Related code b050 Controller deceleration and stop on power loss b051 DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b052 Over voltage threshold during power loss b053 Deceleration time setting during power loss b054 Initial output frequency decrease during power loss Integral time setting for nonstop operation at momentary power failure b055 Proportional gain setting for nonstop operation at momentary power failure b056 Int
408. tion if the inverter has tripped because of overcurrent when starting the motor This function can operate with every acceleration pattern regardless of the setting of the acceleration curve selection A097 Range of data n stop frequency A069 0 00 to 400 0 Hz A a ia at which to Acceleration stop time A070 0 0 to 60 0 s Setting of the length of time to stop frequency setting acceleration Output frequency Frequency command 4 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 23 PID function The PID function allows you to use the inverter for the process control on fluid flow airflow and pressure To enable this function specify 01 lenabled or 02 inverted data output enabled for function A071 You can disable the PID function with an external signal during the PID operation For this purpose assign function 23 PID terminal disabling PID operation to an intelligent input terminal Turning the PID terminal on disables the PID function and makes the inverter perform the normal output With the PID function you can limit the PID output according to various conditions Refer to maximum frequency 4 2 10 frequency limiter 4 2 20 PID rariation range A078 Related code A001 Frequency source setting A005 AT selection A006 O2 selection A071 PID Function Enable A072 PID proportional gain A073 PID integra
409. tional digital operator When operating the inverter with a digital operator alone you need not wire the control circuit terminals Items required for operation 1 Optional digital operator not required when you use the standard digital operator O O Digital operator 2 Entering operation and frequency setting commands via control circuit terminals This operating method allows you to operate the inverter via the input of operation signals from external devices e g frequency setting circuit and start switch to control circuit terminals The inverter starts operation when the input power supply is turned on and then an operation command signal FW or RV is turned on You can select the frequency setting method setting by voltage specification or current specification through the input to a control circuit terminal according to your system For details see Item 2 Explanation of control circuit terminals in Section 2 2 1 on pages 2 7 and 2 8 Items required for operation 1 Operation command input device External switch or relay 2 Frequency setting command input device External device to input signals 0 to 10 VDC 10 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA Control circuit terminal block lt Operation command input device switch Frequency setting command input device control 3 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email i
410. tions C001 to C008 EXT External trip Note Do not turn on the EXT terminal after the inverter power is shut off Otherwise the error history may not be stored correctly ao S S Motor speed i Free running 4 2 53 3 wire interface operation function STA STP and F R on Related code The 3 wire interface operation function allows you to use automatic C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions reset contacts e g pushbutton switches to start and stop the inverter Specify 01 control circuit terminal block for the run command source setting A002 Assign function 20 STA 21 STP and 22 F R to three of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 to enable the control operations described below Assigning the STP function to an intelligent input terminal disables the functions of the FW and RV terminals The figure below shows the inverter outputs according to terminal operations Operation commands FW and RV EXT terminal RS terminal Alarm output terminal STA Starting the motor 21 STP Stoppingthemotor Terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 21 SIP Stopping ihe motor F R Switching the motor operation 22 SF direction ON STA OFF STP ON OFF F R Forward rotation Output frequency Reverse rotation 4 58 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 54 Control
411. to clear or store respectively the frequency settings adjusted with the UP and DWN signals In this case OHz is set as initial value C001 to C008 C101 00 Disabling the storage of frequency settings selection 1 Do not operate the UP or DWN terminal after the inverter power is shut off Otherwise the frequency settings may not be stored correctly Operation command e FW or RV DWN rn Terminal function Turning on the UP and DWN terminals at the same time disables acceleration and deceleration Output frequency 4 57 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 52 External trip EXT function Related code The external trip function allows you to make the inverter trip C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions according to the error trip signal generated by an external system To use this function assign function 12 EXT to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the EXT terminal is turned on the inverter trips with error code E12 displayed and stops the output After the inverter trips with error code E12 displayed it will not be recovered from tripping even when the error signal from the external system is reset i e the EXT terminal is turned off To recover the inverter from tripping reset the inverter or turn the inverter power off and on Terminal 1 to 8 func
412. to control power supply terminals RO and TO Example 5 b004 00 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power supply ON 7 r Power supply ON 7 OFF OFF t Operation command oN Operation command WN 7 Inverter output ON Inverter output F i i ooo a AL or AL a ma IP a m IP oe es ie Example 6 b004 01 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power supply ON Power supply ofr L___f ote L_f Operation command oN Operation command ON 7 m Inverter output ON Inverter output 0 EE e ER AL OFF ia AL ON J IP mr m B IP SN cece Example 7 b004 02 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power supply ON ama Power supply ON p OFF OFF TL T Operation command QN Operation command ON 7 Inverter output ON Inverter output ON it _ wooo eo AL FF AL a ee ip oe cones De Ip ore Example 8 b004 00 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power supply ON Power supply 0 OFF Le ee E Operation command oh Operation command oN Inverter output ON Inverter output ON OFF AL ie AL se cere IP OFF 1 IP oe Example 9 b004 01 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power supply ON Power supply ON off L_ ae Operation command QN Operation command ON j t tput ON t tput ae nverter outpu nverter outpu
413. tocol 1 External control system Inverter Waiting time to be set with the digital operator 1 Frame that is sent from the external control system to the inverter 2 Frame that is sent from the inverter to the external control system The inverter sends frame 2 as a response always after receiving frame 1 The inverter does not actively output any frame to the external control system The following table lists the frames commands used for communication Commands Command Function Broadcast toal Remarks stations Instructs the inverter to drive the motor for 00 forward or reverse rotation or stop the motor 01 Sets the inverter output frequency 02 Turns specified intelligent input terminals on or off 03 Reads all monitored data 04 Reads the inverter status 05 Reads a specified setting item 06 Writes data to a specified setting item 07 Initializes specified settings This command can operate only Instructs the inverter to drive the motor for wien 01 a 02 has been specifica 98 forward or reverse rotation or stop the motor Orne Nalan MOE OS i Otherwise only the trip history data is cleared 09 Checks whether set data can be stored in the EEPROM OA Stores set data in the EEPROM 0B Recalculates the constants set in the inverter 4 101 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions The commands are described bel
414. toring 1 to 6 When the trip monitoring function d081 to d086 is selected the inverter displays the trip history data The last six protective trips the inverter made can be displayed Select the trip monitoring 1 d081 to display the data on the most recent trip Display contents 1 Factor of tripping one of E01 to E79 1 2 Output frequency at tripping Hz Output current at tripping A 2 Main circuit DC voltage at tripping V 3 es Cumulative inverter running time until tripping h Cumulative inverter power on time until tripping h 1 See Section 5 1 1 Protective functions 2 When the inverter status is in stop mode as a trip history monitored value can be zero 3 When grounding fault is detected at power on monitored value can be zero 3 4 5 6 Display by trip monitoring 1 Factor of 2 Frequency 3 Current at 4 Main circuit DC 5 Cumulative 6 Cumulative oe at tripping tripping voltage at tripping running time power on time 338 Ve gt MAM ghi gt ts IO AANER 40 ON HA 0 e 1 x PL EN A AY l I l l l l i 1 I I l l l I l EEEE E E EEE PAET ee eee A EEEE Sete Lasiana Danaa 1 l l l l l I sa a a re ee I cl yy ol ee a sh iss Dei cs Cet a a ee ee I 2 If the inverter has not tripped before the inverter displays 4 1 23 Programming error monitoring Related code If an attempt is made to set the data conflicting with
415. tput function assign function 04 OD to one of the terminal functions C021 to C025 or the alarm relay terminal function C026 10 Feedback comparison signal A feedback comparison signal can be output to an intelligent output terminal when the PID feedback data exceeds the specified range To use this signal output function assign function 31 FBV to one of the terminal functions C021 to C025 or the alarm relay terminal function C026 Conn C052 Off level PID feedback f peee C053 on level Time Fw ON OFF FBv ON l OFF 11 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring d004 You can monitor the PID feedback data on the inverter When you set a PV scale conversion with function A075 the value to be displayed as the monitored data can be the product of the feedback data and the scale Monitored value feedback data x PV scale conversion A075 12 Reset of PID integration PIDC This reset function clears the integral result of PID operation To use this function assign function 24 PIDC to one of the terminal functions C001 to C008 The integral result is cleared each time the PIDC terminal is turned on Never turn on the PIDC terminal during the PID operation Otherwise the inverter may trip because of overcurrent Be sure to disable the PID function before turning on the PIDC terminal 4 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrw
416. tr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 24 Two stage acceleration deceleration function 2CH The two stage acceleration deceleration function allows you to change the acceleration or deceleration time while the inverter is accelerating or decelerating the motor Select one of the following three methods of changing the acceleration or deceleration time 1 Changing the time by the signal input to an intelligent input terminal 2 Automatically changing the time when the output frequency reaches a specified frequency 3 Automatically changing the time only when switching the motor operation from forward rotation to reverse rotation or vice versa Selecting the 3rd control system enables the change of the Related code F002 F202 F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A092 A292 A392 Acceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A093 A293 A393 Deceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A094 A294 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile 1st 2nd motor A095 A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors A096 A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions acceleration or deceleration time only by terminal input Not bytwo stage acceleration deceleration frequency To change the acceleration deceleration time by the signal input to an intell
417. trol with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the OI L terminal Valid only when the OPE SR is used Turning on the AT terminal enables the pot on Switching between the O2 terminal OPE SR terminal and the control with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O2 L terminal Using the O2 terminal independently Using the O2 terminal for auxiliary frequency command nonreversible in addition to the O and 02 Ol terminals selection Using the O2 terminal for auxiliary frequency command reversible in addition to the O and Ol terminals Disabling the O2 terminal selection Note that whether frequency commands are input to the O2 L terminal and whether the motor operation is reversible depend on the combination of settings of functions A005 and A006 and whether function 16 AT is assigned to an intelligent input terminal as shown in the table below When the motor operation is reversible the inverter operates the motor in a reverse direction if the sum of the frequencies specified by the main frequency and auxiliary frequency commands is less than 0 even when the forward operation FW terminal is on Even when no wire is connected to the 02 terminal reverse operation of the motor may occur and prolong the acceleration time if the output voltage fluctuates near 0 V Whether to input an auxiliary peel Main frequency command frequency command tse A via the O2 L terminal OL terminal A oo OFF O L termin
418. tronic thermal protection level 4 2 29 Derating is not needed when electronic thermal level is already set to lower then derating level 2 lt gt applied for 90 to 160kW 3 Over current protection Overload restriction Over current limiting and Electronic thermal protection might operate from the set value when Carrier frequency setting is used with less than 2kHz by a low value Please set to 2kHz or more and use the setting of Carrier frequency setting for such a situation Voltage dase 200 V class 400 V class capacity fo kHz Detatingatto t2 kHz lt Derating at fo 8kHa gt 11kW 12 100 12 100 15kW 7 90 52 2Aor less 12 100 18 5kW 8 90 65 7Aor less 12 100 22kW 6 90 76 5Aor less 8 95 40 8Aor less 30kW 5 90 101 7Aor less 8 90 51 3Aor less 37kW 8 80 112Aor less 10 80 56 0Aor less 45kW 3 75 126 7Aor less 9 90 76 5Aor less 55kW 8 90 189Aor less 8 80 84Aor less 75kW 3 90 243Aor less 6 175 101 2Aor less 90kW 7 90 144Aor less 110kW 3 80 156Aor less 132kW 4 I85 195 5Aor less 160kW 3 70 203Aor less lt gt indicate the setting range of 90 to 160kW 200Vclass 30kW 22kW15kW 400Vclass 132kW 90kW 45kW a lt 18 5kW 55kW Derating of output current Derating of output current 052 4 6 8 10 12 052 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency kHz Carrier frequency kHz 4 44 Phone 800 894
419. ue may cause damage to the terminal block or inverter body Select an earth leakage breaker ELB of which the rated sensitivity current matches the total length of cables connected between the inverter and power supply and between the inverter and motor Do not use a high speed type ELB but use a delayed type ELB because the high speed type may malfunction When a CV cable is used for wiring through a metal conduit the average current leakage is 30 mA km When an IV cable which has a high relative dielectric constant is used the leakage current is about eight times as high as the standard cable Therefore when using an IV cable use the ELB of which the rated sensitivity current is eight times as high as that given in the table below If the total cable length exceeds 100 m use a CV cable Total cable length Sensitivity current mA 100 m or less 300 m or less Reactor on input side for Use this reactor to control harmonic waves or when the harmonic control power imbalance of power supply voltage is 3 or more when the supply coordination and power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more or when the power factor improvement voltage may change rapidly This reactor also improves the ALI XXX power factor This noise filter reduces the conductive noise that is generated by the inverter and transmitted in cables Connect this noise filter to the primary side input side of the inverter The inverter may generate radio noise through
420. uency b086 Frequency scaling conversion factor with the frequency scaling conversion factor b086 Use this function for example to change the unit of a value e g motor speed on display Value displayed by function d007 output frequency monitor d001 x frequency scaling conversion factor b086 The frequency scaling conversion factor b086 can be set within the range 0 1 to 99 9 in steps of 0 1 Example Displaying the speed of a 4 pole motor Speed N min 120 x f Hz pole f Hz x 30 As the result of the above calculation with the factor b086 set to 30 0 the inverter displays 1800 60 x 30 0 when the output frequency is 60 Hz Display 0 00 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 1000 to 9999 in steps of 1 1000 to 3996 in units of 10 Note When you have selected the digital operator as the device to input frequency setting commands you can change the output frequency setting by using the A and or V key only while the inverter is operating the motor The change in output frequency made in this mode can be reflected in the frequency setting function F001 Press the STR key to write the new frequency over the currently selected frequency setting The precision of the storable frequency data depends on the frequency setting You cannot change the output frequency while the PID function is enabled or the inverter is not operating the motor 4 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax
421. uency frequency Free running 7 Acceleration according to the setting of b088 When 00 01 or 02 is specified for the jog stop When 03 04 or 05 is specified for the jog stop mode mode A039 the jogging operation will not be A039 the jogging operation will be performed even if the performed if the FW signal is turned on earlier than FW signal is turned on earlier than the JG signal However the JG signal the motor will stop after free running if the JG signal is turned off earlier than the FW signal Note 2 You must set DC braking data if you specify 02 or 05 for the jog stop mode A039 See Section 4 2 19 4 50 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 43 2nd 3rd motor control function SET and SET3 This motor control function allows you to switch the inverter settings to control three different types of motors To use this function assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to two of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 Turn the SET and SET3 terminals on and off for switching 08 SET Set 2nd motor data Terminal function C001 to C008 SETS 3rd motor control You can switch the following functional settings with the SET or SET3 terminal F002 F202 F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A003 A203 A303 Base frequency
422. uency function is enabled you cannot set any inverter output frequency within the specified range of the frequencies to jump Note that while the inverter is accelerating or decelerating the motor the inverter output frequency changes continuously according to the set acceleration deceleration time You can set up to three frequencies to jump Related code A063 Jump center frequency setting 1 A064 Jump hysteresis frequency width setting 1 A065 Jump center frequency setting 2 A066 Jump hysteresis frequency width setting 2 A067 Jump center frequency setting 3 A068 Jump hysteresis frequency width setting 3 Range of data Jump center frequency A063 A065 3 Setting of the center frequency of the settings 1st 2nd 3rd settings A067 0 00 10 400 0 C1 frequency range to be jumped Jump hysteresis frequency width settings 1st 2nd 3rd settings A064 A066 Setting of the half bandwidth of the A068 0 00 t0 10 00 2 frequency range to be jumped 1 Setting of 0 Hz disables the jump frequency function Output frequency Frequency command 4 2 22 Acceleration stop frequency setting Related code The acceleration stop frequency setting function allows you to make A069 Acceleration stop frequency setting the inverter wait upon starting the motor until the slipping of the a REN stop time frequency motor becomes less when the load on the motor causes a large moment of inertia Use this func
423. uency threshold b007 is set and the detected frequency is lower than that _ __ ___ FW i Starting with matching Free running frequency Motor speed Note The reset operation clears the inverter s internal counters that are used for protective functions Therefore if you intend to use an intelligent input terminal to shut off the inverter output use the free run stop FRS terminal Example 4 Restarting with active matching frequency After the retry wait time b003 the inverter restarts the motor with the me tony setas POS The rr subsequently decelerates the motor according to the setting of b029 RS eater ee ee while maintaining the output current at the level specified for b029 When the output voltage matches Deceleration according to the frequency the inverter i the setting of b029 re accelerates the motor up to the af a frequency that was set when the inverter shut off the output to the Frequency selected as the motor before the restart Occurrence of trip setting of b030 If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it restarts the motor with input frequency reduce the setting of b028 Output current Inverter output frequency Motor speed 003 note Inverter starts from OHz when reset signal is given during retry waiting because the frequency stored in inverter is cleared 4 56 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr
424. uery without returning any response if the query is a broadcast query a communication occurs during the reception of the query the slave address specified in the query differs from that of the inverter the time interval between data items in the query message is less than the time corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters or the data length of the query is invalid Note In the master system set a timer to monitor the responses from the inverter and configure the master system so that when the inverter does not return the response to a query within a specified limit time the master system resends the query 4 117 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 Explanation of function codes i Reading the coil status 01h This function reads the coil status on or off Example When reading the status of the intelligent input terminals 1 to 6 of the inverter at slave address 8 Assume that the intelligent input terminals are in the status as shown below mteligentinputterminal 1 2 3 tT e Coil number 11 Coils 13 and 14 are off Terminai sens On ON On OFF ON OFF Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 08 1 Slave address 08 2 Function code 01 2 Function code 01 3 Starting coil number 00 3 Number of data bytes 01 upper digit
425. um frequency Related code F001 Output frequency setting A001 Frequency source setting A020 A220 A320 Multispeed frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Range of data Output frequency setting F001 The frequency set with F001 is equal to the 0 0 start frequency to setting of A020 maximum frequency The second control frequency set with F001 1st 2nd 3rd motors is equal to the setting of A220 Hz The third control frequency set with F001 is equal to the setting of A320 A020 A220 Multispeed 0 A320 4 2 2 Keypad Run key routing Related code When you enter operation commands via the digital operator the Keypad F004 Keypad Run key routing Run key routing function allows you to select the direction of motor operation This function is ineffective when you use the control terminal block or remote operator to input operation commands i PaRaS un key routing 4 2 3 Rotational direction restriction Related code The rotational direction restriction function allows you to restrict the b035 Rotational direction restriction direction of motor operation This function is effective regardless of the specification of operation command input device e g control circuit block or digital operator If an operation command to drive the motor in a restricted direction is input the inverter digital operator will display o0 Qo o Item Function code Da
426. unction enables the inverter to accurately operate the motor with a high starting torque even at a low frequency 0 3 Hz or more To use this function specify 03 for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 Before using this function be sure to make optimum constant settings for the motor with reference to Section 4 2 91 Motor constant selection When using this function observe the following precautions 1 If you use the inverter to drive a motor of which the capacity is two classes lower than the maximum applicable capacity of the inverter you may not be able to obtain adequate motor characteristics 2 If you cannot obtain the desired characteristics from the motor driven under the sensorless vector control readjust the motor constants according to the symptom as described in the table below yen Symptom Adjustment method Adjustment item Momentary speed Increase the motor constant R2 step by step from the H021 H221 H031 variation is negative set value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value Powering Momentary speed Reduce the motor constant R2 step by step from the set ne S i H021 H221 H031 variation is positive value down to 0 8 times as high as the set value Torque is insufficient at Increase the motor constant R1 step by step from the H020 H220 H030 set value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value megeneraling Ow equericies Increase the motor constant lo step by step from the set several Hz
427. ure the output voltage Inverter Diode 600 V 0 1 A or more 200 V class model 1 000 V 0 1 A or more 400 V class model Effective value of fundamental wave Vac Vac 1 1 x Voe 6 6 Moving coil voltmeter 300 V 200 V class model 600 V 400 V class model Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications E This chapter describes the specifications and external dimensions of the inverter 7 1 Specifications 2 2 0 ee eeeeeceeeeteeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 7 1 7 2 External dimensions ceeccsseeeeeeeeeaee 7 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Specifications 1 Specifications of the 200 V class model Model name type name L700 XXXLFF 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 Max applicable motor 3 7 4 7 capacity 4 pole kW 11 15 18 5 22 30 3 5 55 5 Rated capacity 200V 15 2 20 0 26 3 29 4 39 1 49 5 59 2 72 7 93 5 KVA 240V 18 2 24 1 31 5 35 3 46 9 59 4 71 87 2 112 2 Rated input AC voltage Three phase 3 wire 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage Three phase 3 wire 200 to 240 V corresponding to the input voltage Rate
428. urned on See example 1 When operation is normal Disabling the inverter output When an error has occurred Resetting the trip Trip is reset See example 1 Internal data is not reset see 4 3 13 When operation is normal Disabling the inverter output When an error has occurred Resetting the trip 00 Start with 0 Hz Raia C103 Start with matching frequency See example 3 reset Restart with input frequency See example 4 Related code b003 Retry wait time betore motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold C102 Reset mode selection C103 Restart mode after reset C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions 4 55 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Example 1 Example 2 w F eas o Alarm Alarm Example 3 If you select 01 starting with matching frequency as the restart mode after reset C103 you can also make the inverter start the motor with matching frequency after the power reset When 00 starting with 0 Hz is selected as the restart mode after reset C103 the setting of the retry wait time before motor restart b003 is ignored Note that even when restarting with matching frequency has been selected the inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the output frequency is no more than half the base frequency or 2 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly 3 the restart freq
429. use even normally over a specified number of years Each part should be replaced at specified intervals to prevent inverter faults and changes in inverter characteristics Be sure to periodically replace the parts for preventive maintenance Part name Standard replacement Replacement and maintenance interval methods Inverter circuit and converter circuit 5 Decide whether to replace after examination Cooling fan 10 years 2 4 7 Replace with a new part DC bus capacitors of main circuit 10 years 1 3 7 Replace with a new part Decide whether to replace after examination Electrolytic capacitors on the board 10 years 1 3 Replace with a new part Decide whether to replace after examination Relay 6 Inspect the part after examination 1 The operating life of the smoothing capacitor is under the influence of the ambient temperature Refer to Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve as a standard for the operating life until replacement 2 The operating life of the cooling fan varies depending on environmental conditions including the ambient temperature and dust Check the status of the cooling fan operation during daily inspections 3 The standard operating life number of years or operation cycles and the data described in Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve are based on the expected design life but they do not indicate the guaranteed life of any parts Please refer to the manual of each model for Smoothing
430. valid only when the OPE SR is connected 8 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF allowed allowed or not or not 00 tripping 01 starting with 0 Hz 02 starting with matching frequency 2 b001 Selection of restart mode 03 tripping after deceleration and stopping with matching frequency 00 x O 2 04 restarting with active matching frequency b002 eo under voltage power failure 0 3 to 25 0 s 1 0 X o X 5 b003 Retry wait time before motor restart 0 3 to 100 0 s 1 0 x O 33 b004 Instantaneous power 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 o g failure under voltage trip alarm enable 02 disabling during stopping and decelerating to stop 2 Number of restarts on power A Ree a a b005 failure under voltage trip events 00 16 times 01 unlimited 00 2 b006 Phase loss detection enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 x O 4 36 b007 Restart frequency threshold 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O Cc g 00 tripping 01 starting with 0 Hz 02 starting with matching frequency amp b008 Selection of retry after tripping 03 tripping after deceleration and stoppi
431. ve A044 R W selection 1st motor V f gain setting A045 R W Voltage compensation gain setting for automatic torque A046 R W boost 1st motor Slippage compensation gain setting for automatic torque boost 1st motor DC braking enable A051 DC braking frequency setting A052 R W DC braking wait time A053 R W DC braking force during DC braking time for DC braking edge or level A056 detection for DB input DC braking force for starting A057 DC braking time for starting A058 R W DC braking carrier frequency Reserved Se ie Frequency upper limit setting A061 high R W Frequency lower limit setting A061 low 1252h __ Jump center frequency 1253h __ setting 1 1254h __ Jump hysteresis frequency 1255h width setting 1 1256h Jump center frequency 1257h_ _ Jump hysteresis frequency A065 low 1258h width setting 2 A066 1259h Jump center frequency A067 high 123Ah 123Bh 123Ch 123Dh 123Eh 123Fh 1240h 1241h 1242h to1244h 1245h 1246h 1247h 1248h 1249h 124Ah 124Bh 124Ch 124Dh 124Eh 124Fh oO Oo gt o o are fo fo So Q Oo Oo setting 3 125Ah___ Jump hysteresis frequency A067 low 125Bh__ width setting 3 A068 Acceleration stop frequency F 125Dh_ Acceleration stop time A069 low 125Eh frequency setting A070 Jog frequency setting A038 RW Start frequency to 999 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Monitoring and setting items
432. ve acceleration deceleration EL S curve acceleration deceleration 01 small degree of swelling Acceleration deceleration A131 A132 01 to 10 4 curve constants setting 10 large degree of swelling O Curvature for FL Scurve A150 A151 Oto Curvature of EL S curve for acceleration acceleration 1 2 Curvature for EL S curve 0 to 50 deceleration 1 2 A152 A153 Loe F Curvature of EL S curve for deceleration 1 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection Select acceleration and deceleration patterns with reference to the following table Setting 00 01 02 03 04 Curve Linear S curve U curve Inverted U curve EL S curve S fey ro p Cc Cc aos 3 a a a a accele g g g ration 3 2 2 2 2 pattern 3 3 a Z a Time Time Time Time A098 gt D Fey decele amp S 5 5 S ration g 3 3 3 3 pattern 3 2 g 2 g 2 gt g 6 6 6 6 Time Time Time Time Time With this pattern the This pattern is This pattern is effective for the tension control This pattern is similar motor is accelerated or effective for preventing on a winding machine driven by the inverter to to the S curve pattern decelerated linearly the collapse of cargo prevent cutting of the object to be wound for the shockless Descrip until its speed reaches carried by a lift or starting and stopping tion the set output conveyor driven by the of the motor except frequency in
433. ve power on time monitoring 0 Disabling the signal output Setting in units of 10 hours Setting in units of 100 hours range 100 000 to 655 300 hours The inverter outputs the operation time over RNT signal or the plug in time over ONT signal when the time specified as the run power on warning time b034 is exceeded Run power on warning time 1 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1 Operation time over RNT signal To use this signal function assign function 11 RNT to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 Specify the run power on warning time b034 2 Plug in time over ONT signal To use this signal function assign function 12 ONT to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 Specify the run power on warning time b034 4 2 63 0 Hz speed detection signal ZS The inverter outputs the 0 Hz speed detection signal when the inverter output frequency falls below the threshold frequency specified as the zero speed detection level C063 To use this signal function assign function 21 ZS to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 This signal function applies to the inverter output frequency when the V F characteristic curve selection is based on the constant torque characteristic VC reduced torque characteristic 1 7
434. vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor Use the thermistor model PB 41E made by Shibaura Electronics Corporation When using this function specify 02 NTC for the thermistor for thermal protection control b098 With a thermistor other than the PB 41E or another setting of the thermistor for thermal protection control the motor temperature cannot be detected correctly Related code P025 Temperature compensation thermistor enable b098 Thermistor for thermal protection control item Functioncode Data Description _ Temperature compensation 00 Disabling the secondary resistance compensation P025 5 thermistor enable Enabling the secondary resistance compensation 4 2 94 Motor constants selection Adjust the motor constant settings to the motor to be driven by the inverter When using a single inverter to drive multiple motors in the control mode based on VC VP or free V f characteristic calculate the total capacity of the motors and specify a value close to the total capacity for the motor capacity selection H003 H203 When the automatic torque boost function is used the motor constant settings that do not match the motor may result in a reduced motor or unstable motor operation You can select the motor constants that are used when the control mode is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor from
435. verter that the middle section of this pattern is linear 4 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Curve constant swelling degree Specify the swelling degree of the acceleration curve with reference to the following graphs Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Target Target Target frequency frequency frequency 100 100 100 gt gt 96 9 82 4 35 4 31 6 12 5 17 6 6 25 3 1 0 39 25 50 75 25 50 75 Time Time Time Acceleration time 100 to reach Acceleration time 100 to reach Acceleration time 100 to reach the set output frequency the set output frequency the set output frequency The acceleration or deceleration time may be shortened midway through the acceleration or deceleration according to the S curve pattern If the LAD cancellation LAC function has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal and the LAC terminal is turned on the selected acceleration and deceleration patterns are ignored and the output frequency is quickly adjusted to that specified by the frequency command 3 Curvature of EL S curve pattern When using the EL S curve pattern you can set the curvatures A150 to A153 individually for acceleration and deceleration If all curvatures are set to 50 the EL S curve pattern will be equivalent to the S curve pattern Output frequency rate
436. void this Check for the ground fault problem the inverter Check the output cables and motor ae off i output m During Check whether the inverter has decelerated the isplays the error code Ha OC Decel motor quickly shown on the right when it deceleration i i Obes oot Increase the deceleration time detects a current higher Check whether the inverter has accelerated the than a specified level motor quickly This protective function Increase the acceleration time uses a DC current During m Check whether the motor has been locked detector CT to detect acceleration Li Check the motor and wiring overcurrent Check whether the torque boost current has When a current as high as been set too high about 220 of the Reduce the boost current inverter s rated output Check whether the DC braking force is too high current is detected the Reduce the braking force protective circuit operates Others ri Check whether the current detector CT is and the inverter trips normal Overcurrent protection Replace or repair the CT This protective function monitors the Check whether the motor load is too high inverter output current and shuts off the Reduce the load factor inverter output and displays the error code Check whether the thermal level is appropriate shown on the right when the internal Adjust the level appropriately electronic thermal protection circuit Note Overload detects a motor overload The elect
437. voltage select Carefully note that selecting an inappropriate control system V f characteristic may result in overcurrent during motor acceleration or deceleration or vibration of the motor or other machine driven by the inverter Output voltage V V7 Voltage that can be output by the inverter or that was specified by the AVR voltage select V6 A 0 f6 f7 Output frequency Hz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 18 Torque boost setting The torque boost setting function allows you to compensate for the voltage drop due to wiring and the primary resistance of the motor so as to improve the motor torque at low speeds When you select automatic torque boost by the torque boost selection A041 A241 adjust the settings of the motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole selection H004 H204 based on the motor to be driven Data or range of data 00 Manual torque boost Torque boost selection A041 A241 Automatic torque boost Setting of the rate of the boost to O Manual torque boost value A042 A242 A342 0 0 to 20 0 the output voltage 100 Manual torque boost frequency g Setting of the rate of the frequency adjustment AUIS ano OOo 50 010 at breakpoint to the base frequency Motor capacity coe 0 20 to 75 0 kW Selection of the motor capacity Motor poles setting HooaHaoa 2 4 6 8 or 10 poles Selection of the numbe
438. w N Conductive TR6 N WwW Nonconductive z RB P Nonconductive oO A 3 T87 P RB Coridu tive Q RB N Nonconductive a N RV Nonconductive 6 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 7 DC Bus Capacitor Life Curve Ambient temperature C When energized 24 hours a day 40 Apanan eeen l 30 DO EEEE eee oe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Capacitor life number of years Note 1 The ambient temperature indicates the temperature measured at a position about 5 cm distant from the bottom center of the inverter body If the inverter is mounted in an enclosure the ambient temperature is the temperature within the enclosure Note 2 The DC Bus capacitor has a limited life because chemical reactions occur inside the capacitor during operation You should replace the DC Bus capacitor after about 10 years of use as standard 10 years is not the guaranteed lifespan but rather the expected design lifespan Note that the smoothing capacitor life will be shortened significantly if the inverter is used at a high ambient temperature or with a heavy load that requires a current beyond its rated current 6 8 Output of Life Warning The inverter can output a warning based on self diagnosis when the life of a life limited part smoothing capacitor on the circuit board or cooling fan except the smoothing capacitor in the main circuit in the inve
439. wait time DC braking force during deceleration DC braking time for deceleration DC braking edge or level detection for DB input DC braking force for starting A058 DC braking time for starting A059 DC braking carrier frequency setting C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions A051 A052 A053 A054 A055 A056 A057 Data or range of data DC braking enable DC braking frequency setting A052 0 00 to 60 00 Hz A053 0 0 to 5 0 s DC braking wait time DC braking force during deceleration DC braking force for starting DC braking time for A054 A057 deceleration 0 s level detection for A056 DB input POoraking imefor A058 0 0 to 60 0 s starting DC braking carrier A059 0 5 to 12 kHz frequency setting lt 0 5 to 8 kHz gt 0 to 70 lt 0 to 50 gt Internal DC braking is disabled Internal DC braking is enabled Internal DC braking is enabled The braking operates only with the set braking frequency With internal DC braking enabled DC braking is started when the output frequency reaches the set braking frequency The DC braking wait time specifies the delay in starting DC braking after the set braking time has elapsed or the DB terminal has been turned on 0 specifies the smallest force zero current 100 specifies the largest force rated current This setting is valid for the external DC braking in A039 0 0 10 600 edge mode or for the int
440. wait time before motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold Active frequency 0 20 x rated current to He scan start 1 50 x rated current Active frequency matching scan time b029 0 10 to 30 00 s constant A Frequency set when the inverter output has Active frequency been shut off i b030 matching restart Maximum frequency ja ait ee eee NOTE lt gt applied for 90 to 160kW Example 1 Restarting with 0 Hz Example 2 Restarting with matching frequency FW FW FRS Tl FRS fp Free running Free running Motor Pe oe Motor wee speed E speed i 3 l f i Restarting with 0 Hz 0 6003 i i Restarting with matching frequency The inverter restarts the motor with 0 Hz The inverter waits for the retry wait time after the FRS regardless of the motor speed The setting of retry terminal has been turned off detects the motor speed wait time is ignored for restarting with 0 Hz frequency and restarts the motor with the matching If the inverter restarts the motor with 0 Hz when frequency without stopping it If the inverter trips because the motor speed is high the inverter may trip of overcurrent when it restarts the motor with matching because of overcurrent frequency prolongs the retry wait time Even when restarting with matching frequency has been selected the inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the output frequency is no more than half the base frequency or 2 t
441. when A001 03 0002h Frequency source setting F001 low 0 01 Hz 0 Initial status 1 Waiting for Vdc establishment 2 Stopping 3 Running 4 Free run stop FRS 0003h Inverter status A 5 Jogging 6 DC braking 7 Frequency being input 8 Retrying operation 9 Undervoltage V 0004h InverterstatusB R 0 Stopping 1 Running 2 Tripping E 0 1 Stopping 2 Decelerating 3 Constant speed operation 4 Accelerating 5 Forward rotation 6 Reverse rotation 7 Inverter status C Switching from forward rotation to reverse rotation 8 Switching from reverse rotation to forward rotation 9 Starting forward rotation 10 Starting reverse rotation 0006h_ PID feedback _ RW 0 to 10000 0 01 0007h to Reserved Inaccessible 0010h 0011h do80 R Oto 65530 See the list of inverter trip factors below See the list of inverter trip factors below 0014h dost Cumulative running time at tripping 1 See the list of inverter trip factors below See the list of inverter trip factors below 001Eh Trip monitoring 2 frequency high Geer 0 01 Hz DC input voltage at tripping 0022h Trip monitoring 2 running time high oe EN P 0023h Trip monitoring 2 running time low Cumulative running time at tripping 0025h _ Trip monitoring 2 power on time low Cumulative Poweron time at tripping 0026h Trip monitoring 3 factor See the list of inverter trip factors below
442. when multiple inverters are connected to each other by a short bus line or your system includes a phase advanced capacitor that is turned on and off during operation Do not turn the inverter power on and off more often than once every 3 minutes Otherwise the inverter may be damaged 2 Inverter output terminals U V and W Use a cable thicker than the specified applicable cable for the wiring of output terminals to prevent the output voltage between the inverter and motor dropping Especially at low frequency output a voltage drop due to cable will cause the motor torque to decrease Do not connect a phase advanced capacitor or surge absorber on the output side of the inverter If connected the inverter may trip or the phase advanced capacitor or surge absorber may be damaged If the cable length between the inverter and motor exceeds 20 m especially in the case of 400 V class models the stray capacitance and inductance of the cable may cause a surge voltage at motor terminals resulting in a motor burnout A special filter to suppress the surge voltage is available If you need this filter contact your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor 2 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring When connecting multiple motors to the inverter connect a thermal relay to the inverter output circuit for each motor The RC rating of the thermal rel
443. with bar terminal 0 25mm 0 5mm example PC 1 25 F 7 made by J S T Mfg Co Ltd Striped covering length 5mm Screw torque 0 22Nm 0 25Nm screw size M2 4 98 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Connection As illustrated below connect the inverters in parallel to the external control system and connect the RP and SN terminals with a jumper on the inverter at the end of the network Similarly jumper the RP and SN terminals when only one inverter is connected to the external control system for R8485 communication Connecting the RP and SN terminals enables the terminating resistor in the control circuit terminal block board of the inverter which suppresses signal reflections External control system SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN 2 Required settings The following table lists the inverter settings required for the R8485 communication Data or range of data oe Assignment of a station number to the inverter Node allocation C072 1 to 32 Set this item when your inverter is connected together with other s to a control system selection 8 Communication parity 20 S C074 01 02 Communication stop bit 1 00 Selection of operation after the motor ay C076 gt communication error 02 03 04 Communication trip limit time C077 0 00 to 99 99 s Limit length of time to determine setting communication train disconnecti
444. x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code m Output torque x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Output voltage V x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 3 Electric power kW x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 8 bytes Always 00000000 reserved for data storage Cumulative running time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code a Cumulative power on time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Note 8 Monitoring of intelligent input terminals Note 8 Monitoring of intelligent output terminals Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 105 Terminal Data Terminal Data Terminal 1 00000001 Terminal 11 00000001 Terminal 2 00000002 Terminal 12 00000002 Terminal 3 00000004 Terminal 13 00000004 Terminal 4 00000008 Terminal 14 00000008 Terminal 5 00000010 Terminal 15 00000010 Terminal 6 00000020 Relay terminal 00000020 Terminal 7 00000040 Terminal 8 00000080 FW terminal 00000100 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions v 04 command This command reads the status of the inverter Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 04 BCC Block check code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to Data Se
445. y setting setting setting setting setting 3 Automatic assignment of functions to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 and the terminal to which function 18 RS has been SW1 is ON assigned Emergency stop Fixed function Fixed function Fixed function Fixed function enabled 5 cannot be cannot be 00 NO cannot be EMR cannot be NC se a sere se SW1 is ON after Selectable Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable Selectable arbitrarily 4 setting to OFF once Setting made Setting made Released no Setting made hen SW1 is when SW1 is from F when SW1 is Emergency stop w No function disabled 3 5 set ON set ON emergency assigned set ON retained retained stop function retained 1 When function 18 RS is assigned to the input terminal a b NO NC selection is always 00 NO 2 When terminal setting C003 is 64 EMR terminal setting C013 is always 01 NC 3 If function 18 RS has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal other than intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 before slide switch SW1 is set to ON the input terminal setting for said terminal is automatically changed to no no function assigned when slide switch SW1 is set to ON to prevent any duplication of terminal functions Even if slide switch SW1 is subsequently returned to OFF the original function setting for said terminal will

Hitachi L700 Series AC Drives Instruction Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents